Pentra XL 80

Technical manual
REF: 1300018562
Int. Ref. Doc: RAA022GEN
Contents
1 - Introduction
1. Revision ..................................................................................................................3
2. Legal Information ..................................................................................................4
3. Operational Conditions .........................................................................................6
4. Labels and connections .....................................................................................10
5. Instrument general cleaning ..............................................................................18
6. Warning and precautions ...................................................................................20
7. Specifications ......................................................................................................23
8. Instrument description & technology ................................................................27
9. Reagent specifications .......................................................................................29
10. Printer .................................................................................................................29
Technical Manual
Ref: 1300018562 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA022GEN 0-1
Contents
2 - Hydraulic & Pneumatic Principles
1. Hydropneumatic connections ............................................................................. 2
2. Valves functions .................................................................................................. 13
3. Hydraulic circuit .................................................................................................. 15
4. Pneumatic diagrams .......................................................................................... 26
Technical Manual
0-2 Ref: 1300018562 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA022GEN
Contents
3 - Electric & Electronic Principles
1. Boards ....................................................................................................................3
2. Flat cables ..............................................................................................................9
3. Connectors ..........................................................................................................10
4. Fan ........................................................................................................................13
5. Synoptics .............................................................................................................13
Technical Manual
Contents
4 - Analysis Cycle Technology
1. Analysis cycle description (principles) ............................................................... 2
2. Measuring principles .......................................................................................... 12
3. Raw counts ......................................................................................................... 24
Technical Manual
Contents
5 - Software Versions
1. Service software overview ...................................................................................2
2. Windows Explorer Access ....................................................................................3
3. Software releases .................................................................................................3
Technical Manual
Contents
6 - Alarms & Errors
1. Analyzer error messages ..................................................................................... 2
2. Transfer error messages ..................................................................................... 3
3. STAT mode error messages ................................................................................ 4
4. Environment error messages .............................................................................. 4
5. User error messages ............................................................................................ 5
6. Expiration date error messages .......................................................................... 5
7. Analyzer internal error types messages ............................................................. 6
Technical Manual
Contents
07 - Maintenance
1. Maintenance ..........................................................................................................2
2. Prevention against the electrostatic discharges ...............................................3
3. Maintenance tables and kits ................................................................................6
4. Maintenance kits ...................................................................................................7
5. Maintenance procedures .....................................................................................9

RAS324G: Installation
RAS325F: 6 month maintenance
RAS326E: Yearly maintenance
RAS327F: 2 year maintenance
RAS328D: Decontamination & rinse
RAS329D: Chambers adjustment
RAS330E: Needle adjustment
RAS331E: Mother Board Adjustment
RAS332D: Motor board adjustment
RAS333E: Temperature adjustment
RAS334E: Vacuum adjustment
RAS335D: Bubbling adjustment
RAS336F: LMNE flowcell adjustment
RAS337D: LMNE balance adjustment
RAS338D: Tube holder adjustment
RAS339D: Power supply replacement
RAS340D: Check up after intervention
RAS341E: Optical bench dismantling & replacement
RAS342D: Front panel & covers dismantling
RAS343D: Internal barcode reader adjustment
RAS344G: External barcode reader configuration
RAS345D: Heater assy replacement
RAS346D: Mixer replacement
RAS347D: Automatic sampler adjustment
RAS348D: Internal PC replacement
RAS349D: PC Hard Disk replacement
RAS351D: PC floppy disk reader replacement
RAS352D: PC CD-ROM drive replacement
RAS353D: PC touch screen replacement
RAS354F: Instrument mother board replacement
RAS355D: Motor board replacement
RAS356F: Sensors check & adjustment
RAS357E: Save and restore settings
RAS514B: Mixer assembly spring replacement
RAS516B: Takasago valve assembly dismantling
RAS519B: Rack needle height adjustment
RAS735D: RET optical bench
RAS736C: Hub board replacement
RAS738E: Version installation and update
RAS816A: Password recovery
Technical Manual
Contents
8 - Exploded Views
1. List ......................................................................................................................... 2
2. Valves ..................................................................................................................... 9
3. Carriage assy ...................................................................................................... 10
4. Rinse block & needles ........................................................................................ 11
5. Reagent syringe .................................................................................................. 12
6. DIFF syringe ........................................................................................................ 13
7. Sampling syringe ................................................................................................ 14
8. Waste syringe (1 & 2) .......................................................................................... 15
9. Counting syringe assy ........................................................................................ 16
10. 2.5 mL dispenser assy (PXLR) ......................................................................... 17
11. Diluent tank assy .............................................................................................. 17
12. Optical bench for P80 / PXL80 ........................................................................ 18
13. Optical bench for Pentra XLR .......................................................................... 19
14. Sampling percutor ............................................................................................ 20
15. Chambers .......................................................................................................... 21
16. Chamber parts .................................................................................................. 22
17. Thermostated room .......................................................................................... 23
18. Tube holder assy .............................................................................................. 24
19. Mixer assy ......................................................................................................... 25
20. Barcode readers ............................................................................................... 26
21. Loader assy ....................................................................................................... 27
22. Transfer assy ..................................................................................................... 28
23. Ejection assy ..................................................................................................... 29
Technical Manual
Contents
24. Front covers magnets & switches ...................................................................30
25. Main fan .............................................................................................................30
26. Electronic boards ..............................................................................................31
27. Cups ...................................................................................................................32
28. Internal computer ..............................................................................................33
29. Reagent straws and tubings ............................................................................34
30. Stickers ..............................................................................................................35
31. Covers ................................................................................................................36
32. References .........................................................................................................37
Technical Manual
Contents
Technical Manual
0 - 10 Ref: 1300018562 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA022GEN
Introduction
1 - Introduction
1. Revision .......................................................................................................................... 3
2. Legal Information .......................................................................................................... 4

2.1. Declaration of Conformity ............................................................................................................... 4
2.2. Notice of liability ............................................................................................................................. 4
2.3. Potential hazards ............................................................................................................................ 4
2.4. Graphics ......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.5. Trademarks ..................................................................................................................................... 5
2.6. Copyright 2015 HORIBA ABX SAS ................................................................................................ 5
3. Operational Conditions ................................................................................................. 6

3.1. Environment .................................................................................................................................... 6
3.2. Location .......................................................................................................................................... 6
3.3. Grounding ....................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4. Humidity/temperature conditions ................................................................................................... 7
3.5. Electromagnetic environment check .............................................................................................. 7
3.6. Main power supply ......................................................................................................................... 7
3.7. Environmental protection ............................................................................................................... 8
3.8. Transportation and storage conditions .......................................................................................... 8
3.9. Installation ...................................................................................................................................... 8
4. Labels and connections ............................................................................................. 10

4.1. Serial number label ....................................................................................................................... 10
4.2. Power supply connection ............................................................................................................. 10
4.3. Laser labels (Pentra XLR only) ...................................................................................................... 11
4.4. Diluent and waste connections .................................................................................................... 11
4.5. Peripheral connections ................................................................................................................. 12
4.6. Computer connections ................................................................................................................. 12
4.7. Warning and biological risk labels ................................................................................................ 13
5. Instrument general cleaning ...................................................................................... 14

5.1. Instrument external cleaning ........................................................................................................ 14
5.2. Instrument internal cleaning ......................................................................................................... 14
6. Warning and precautions ........................................................................................... 16

6.1. Limited warranty ........................................................................................................................... 16
6.2. Safety Precautions ....................................................................................................................... 17
7. Specifications .............................................................................................................. 19
7.1. Technical specifications ............................................................................................................... 19
7.2. Physical specifications ................................................................................................................. 20
8. Instrument description & technology ........................................................................ 23
9. Reagent specifications ............................................................................................... 25
10. Printer ......................................................................................................................... 25
Technical Manual
Ref: 1300018562- Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA022GEN 1-1
Introduction
Technical Manual
1-2 Ref: 1300018562- Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA022GEN
Introduction
Revision
1. Revision
Reference Internal Reference Software Version Date
RAA022AA RAA022AA V1.0 March 2002
P80: V1.3
RAA022BEN RAA022BEN April 2004
PXL80: V1.1
P80: V1.7
RAA022CEN RAA022CEN March 2008
PXL80: V1.6
P80/XL80: V1.11
RAA022DEN RAA022DEN March 2013
PXLR: V2.0
RAA022EEN RAA022EEN V2.0 December 2013
1300012448 RAA022FEN V2.3 February 2015
1300018562 RAA022GEN V2.4 June 2016
This document applies to the latest software version.

When a subsequent software version changes the information in this document, a new edition will be released.
Technical Manual
Introduction
Legal Information
2. Legal Information
2.1. Declaration of Conformity
This instrument complies with the Standards and Directives named in the Declaration of Conformity. The latest
version of the CE Declaration of Conformity for this instrument is available on www.horiba.com
2.2. Notice of liability
The Information in this manual is distributed on an "As Is" basis, without warranty. While every precaution has
been taken in the preparation of this manual, HORIBA Medical will not accept any liability to any persons or
entities with respect to loss or damage, caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by not following
the instructions contained in this manual, or by using the computer software and hardware products described
herein in a manner inconsistent with our product labeling.
2.3. Potential hazards
To alert the operator of potentially hazardous conditions, one of the headings which are described below is
provided wherever necessary throughout this text.
Flags a procedure that if not followed properly, can prove to be extremely hazardous to either the
operator or the environment or both.
Emphasizes an operating procedure that must be followed to avoid possible damage to the
instrument or erroneous test results.
Emphasizes important information especially helpful to the operator before, during or after a specific
operational function.
Gives a summary of what can be achieved if the task is performed.
Technical Manual
Introduction
Legal Information
2.4. Graphics
All graphics, including screens, printouts and photographs, are for illustration purposes only and are not
contractual.
2.5. Trademarks
Other product names mentioned within this publication may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
2.6. Copyright 2016 HORIBA ABX SAS
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of HORIBA
Medical.
HORIBA ABX SAS

Parc Euromédecine - Rue du Caducée
B.P. 7290
34184 MONTPELLIER Cedex 4 - FRANCE
Tel: + 33 (0)4 67 14 15 16
Fax: + 33 (0)4 67 14 15 17
Technical Manual
Introduction
Operational Conditions
3. Operational Conditions
3.1. Environment
■ The operation of the ABX Pentra 80 / ABX Pentra XL80 / Pentra XLR should be restricted to indoor location
use only. The instrument is operational at an altitude of 3000 m (9800 ft) maximum.
■ The instrument is designed for safety from voltage surges according to INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and
POLLUTION DEGREE 2 (IEC 61010-1).
■ Please contact your local representative for more information regarding operation locations, when it does not
comply with the recommended specifications.
3.2. Location
■ Place your instrument on a clean and level table or workbench.
Keep in mind that the instrument and printer weigh approximately 55 kg (121 lbs) [ABX Pentra 80/
ABX Pentra XL80] or 57 kg (126 lbs) [Pentra XLR]. To move the instrument, two persons are required
and must use the lifting handles provided in the installation kit.
■ Avoid exposure to sunlight.

■ Place your instrument where it is not exposed to water or vapor.
■ Avoid direct exposure to air conditioner.
■ Place your instrument where it is free from vibration or shock.
■ Place your instrument where an independent power receptacle can be used.
■ Use a receptacle different from the one used by a device that easily generates noise, such as a centrifuge.
■ Provide a space of at least 20 cm (8 in.) at the back of the instrument for proper ventilation and an easy access
to connections.
The power switch and power supply connection should always be accessible. When positioning the
system for operational use, leave the required amount of space for easy accessibility to these items.
3.3. Grounding
Proper grounding is required when installing the system. Check the wall outlet ground (earth) for proper
grounding to the facilities electrical ground. If you are unsure of the outlet grounding, contact your facilities
engineer to verify the proper outlet ground.
Technical Manual
Introduction
3.4. Humidity/temperature conditions
Instrument operating temperature:

from +16°C (+61°F) to +34°C (+93°F). If the instrument is stored at a temperature lower than 10°C (50°F), it
should stand for one hour at normal room temperature before use.
Humidity Conditions:
Relative humidity of 80% maximum for temperatures up to 31°C (88°F), decreasing linearly to 50% at 40°C
(104°F).
3.5. Electromagnetic environment check
■ The instrument has been designed to produce less than the accepted level of electromagnetic interference in
order to operate in conformity with its destination, allowing the correct operation of other instruments also in
conformity with their destination.
■ In case of suspected electromagnetic noise, check that the instrument has not been placed in the proximity
of electromagnetic fields or short wave emissions, e.g. radar, X-rays, scanners, cell phones, etc.
3.6. Main power supply
If a power failure or sudden extinction occurs during routine series, eject the racks still in the
instrument. Check the integrity of results and patient identification in accordance with the history of
the samples for all the tubes present in the machine during the incident. It is recommended to install
the system on UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply).
■ Grounding is required. Check that the earth wall-plug is correctly connected to the laboratory grounding
system. If there is no such system, a ground stake should be used.
■ Use only the main supply cable delivered with the instrument.
■ Main supply voltage fluctuations must not exceed +/- 10% of the nominal voltage.
■ Alwaysdisconnect the system from the supply before servicing.

■ Toreduce the risk of electrical shock, do not remove the cover or the back panel.
■ Connections to the supply have to be done by your local representative.
Technical Manual
Introduction
3.7. Environmental protection
Used Accessories and Consumables Disposal

Disposable used accessories and consumables must be collected by a laboratory specialized in elimination
and recycling of this kind of material according to the local legislation.
Instrument disposal
This product should be disposed of and recycled at the end of the useful life in accordance with
European Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) and/or
European Directive 2006/66/EC on batteries and accumulators.
If any doubt, please contact your local HORIBA Medical representative service department.
3.8. Transportation and storage conditions
Condition for storage and transportation: Temperature from -20°C to +50°C (-4°F to 122°F).
Prior to the transportation of an instrument, whatever the destination, an external decontamination

procedure must be carried out on the instrument.
Before the instrument removal from use, transportation or disposal, perform a general cleaning procedure and
a draining procedure on the instrument.
3.9. Installation
An HORIBA Medical representative will install your instrument, software and printer.
Verify that all of the parts from the packages are present:
Package content:
■ Analyzer
■ Keyboard (for computer connection)

■ Keyboard drawer
■ Computer mouse
■ Power supply cable
Technical Manual
Introduction
■ Documentation CD-ROM
■ Daily Guide
■ Safety Information booklet
■ Reagents, Controls and Calibrators CD-ROM
■ Installation kit
■ External Barcode reader
■ Printer
■ Lifting handles
■ Racks
■ Waste tank
■ External tank sensor
■ Diluent container opening tool
Technical Manual
Introduction
Labels and connections
4. Labels and connections
4.1. Serial number label
The serial label is located at the back of the instrument.
4.2. Power supply connection
The power switch and power supply connection should always be accessible. When positioning the
system for operational use, leave the required amount of space for easy accessibility to these items.
This connector is located at the back of the instrument.
Technical Manual
1 - 10 Ref: 1300018562- Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA022GEN
Introduction
1 - Power supply connector

2 - ON/OFF switch
4.3. Laser labels (Pentra XLR only)
CAUTION - CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

This label is located at the back of the
instrument
CAUTION - CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION

This label is located on the front of the laser
bench
The laser used in this instrument is a Class 3B laser (complies with IEC 60825 - 1:2007). Its beam
presents, by definition, a high safety hazard.
4.4. Diluent and waste connections
1 - ABX Diluent input
2 - Waste output 1
3 - Waste level detection

2
Technical Manual
Ref: 1300018562- Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA022GEN 1 - 11
Introduction
Waste must be handled according to your local and/or national guidelines.
4.5. Peripheral connections
All peripheral devices should comply with relevant standards.
Connections until the CCC039A (1201841039) computer reference
1 - RS232 output (for LIS connection)

1
2 - Printer connection
3 - Ethernet connection (classified as Safety 2

Extra Low Voltage - SELV)
4 - 4 USB connections
3 4
Technical Manual
Introduction
Connections since the 1300013733 computer reference

1
2 - Ethernet connection (classified as Safety
2 3
Technical Manual
Introduction
4.6. Computer connections
Connections until the CCC039A (1201841039) computer reference
1 2 3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10
1 - VGA 06 - Printer
2 - Mouse 07 - COM3: Unused port
3 - Keyboard 08 - COM2: Labo Link
4 - LAN 09 - COM1: To mother board
5 - USB ports 10 - Power
Connections since the 1300013733 computer reference
4 5 4
1
3 2
1 - Power
2 - COM2 (laboratory link)
3 - COM1 (to motherboard)
4 - 4 USB ports
5 - LAN
1 - USB port
Technical Manual
Introduction
4.7. Warning and biological risk labels
Warning! Biological risk
Near the waste output
On the tube holder inner door
Technical Manual
Introduction
On the right door
Caution, consult accompanying documents
Back of the instrument
Inside the instrument
Technical Manual
Introduction
Warning! Laser device(Pentra XLR only)
On the laser bench front side
Technical Manual
Introduction
Instrument general cleaning
5. Instrument general cleaning
5.1. Instrument external cleaning
The external surfaces of the instrument must be decontaminated considering the biological environment.
■ Never spill liquids on the instrument.

■ Never use disinfectant product that contains alcohol
■ The use of cleaning products (bleach, ABX Minoclair, ABX Cleaner) through the retic pneumatical
circuit is forbidden. Distilled water, used in the same circuit, can cause erroneous results.
5.1.1. Display screen

Use a soft cloth moistened with a disinfectant product*. Wipe the screen gently and dry it to remove any trace
of moisture.
5.1.2. All contaminated surfaces

Slightly dampen a sponge with a disinfectant product* and wipe the dirty surfaces.
5.1.3. Stainless steel

Slightly dampen a sponge with a disinfectant product* and wipe the dirty surfaces. Dry with a soft cloth.
* Products having the following microbiological properties:

■ Bactericidal,
■ Fungicidal,
■ Active on Aspergillus fumigatus,

■ Active on Mycobacterium tuberculosis (B.K),
■ Antiviral (HIV, HBV and rotavirus)
Product Example validated by HORIBA Medical:

ANIOS detergent disinfectant; WIP’ANIOS; ref: 1316.424
Please also refer to the WHO (World Health Organization) guidelines: "Laboratory Biosafety Manual,
3rd edition", for further information.
5.2. Instrument internal cleaning
5.2.1. Concentrated cleaning

Counting chambers and hydraulic parts are decontaminated by performing a concentrated cleaning.
Technical Manual
Introduction
Instrument general cleaning
5.2.2. Sampling needle

The sampling needle must be decontaminated as follows:
1- Prepare a solution of Sodium Hypochlorite to 100 mL/L.
2- Fill a 5 mL tube with this solution.
3- Run 5 analyses on bleach in STAT mode.
Technical Manual
Introduction
Warning and precautions
6. Warning and precautions

Work safety reliability and general characteristics are guaranteed by HORIBA Medical under the following
conditions:
■ Technical manual must be entirely read, and personnel must be trained by HORIBA Medical before attempting
to operate the instrument.
■ Always operate with full knowledge and appreciation of the instrument warnings and alarms.
■ Always refer to labeling and HORIBA Medical instructions in order to avoid compromising system integrity.
The instrument must be operated as instructed in the technical manual. Any other use might compromise the
system integrity and might be hazardous for the operator.
This instrument complies with the Standards and Directives named in the Declaration of Conformity. The latest
version of the CE Declaration of Conformity for this instrument is available on www.horiba-abx.com.
■ The reagents and accessories stipulated by HORIBA Medical have been validated in accordance
with the European Directive for in vitro medical devices (98/79/CE).
■ The use of any other reagents and accessories may place at risk the performance of the
instrument, engaging the user’s reponsability. In this case, HORIBA Medical takes no responsability
for the device nor for the results rendered.
■ Disposable gloves, eye protections and lab coats must be worn by the operator.
■ Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.
■ Mobile phones should not be used in proximity of the instrument.
■ All peripheral devices should be IEC compatible.
6.1. Limited warranty
The duration of warranty is stipulated in the Sales conditions associated with the purchase of this instrument.
To validate the warranty, ensure the following is adhered to:
■ The system is operated under the instructions of this manual.
■ Only software or hardware specified by HORIBA Medical is installed on the instrument. This software must
be the original copyright version.
■ Services and reparations are performed by a HORIBA Medical authorized technician, using only HORIBA
Medical approved spare parts.
■ The electrical supply of the laboratory adheres to national or international regulations.
■ The system is operated according to HORIBA Medical’s recommendations.
■ Specimens are collected and stored in normal conditions.
■ Reagents used are those specified in the user manual.
■ Proper tools are used when maintenance or troubleshooting operations are performed (Refer to the
Maintenance chapter).
If this instrument has been supplied to you by anyone other than HORIBA Medical or an authorized
representative, HORIBA Medical cannot guarantee this product in terms of specifications, latest
revisions and latest documentation. Further information may be obtained from your authorized
representative.
Technical Manual
Introduction
6.2. Safety Precautions
6.2.1. Laser Safety Precautions (Pentra XLR only)
LASER: it is strictly forbidden to disable laser cover sensors as it may cause operator (and persons
around) injuries. Laser protection covers must never be handled nor opened. Class 3B laser product
(Standard series IEC 60825 - 1:2007).
1 - Class 3B Laser cover
6.2.2. Electronic and moving parts

The following parts must not be handled or checked by the user:
■ Electrical Power supply.
■ Electronic circuit boards.
■ Laser device (Pentra XLR only).
Operator injury may occur from an electric shock. Electronic components can shock and injure the
user. Do not tamper with the instrument and do not remove any components (covers, doors, panels,
etc.) unless otherwise instructed within this document.
Danger of explosion if the battery is not replaced correctly. When replacing the battery, always use
the same and/or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries
according to the manufacturer's specific instructions.
Moving parts: It is strictly forbidden to disable sensors as it may cause operator (and persons
around) injuries. Protection covers must not be opened during instrument operations.
Opening the doors and covers during instrument operations triggers the instrument emergency
stop.
Technical Manual
Introduction
6.2.3. Biological risks
Consider all specimens, reagents, calibrators, controls, etc. that contain human blood or serum as
potentially infectious. Use established, good laboratory working practices when handling
specimens. Wear protective gear, gloves, lab coats, safety glasses and/or face shields, and follow
other biosafety practices as specified in the OSHA Blood borne Pathogens Rule (29 CFR part 1910.
1030) or equivalent biosafety procedures.
HORIBA Medical uses disinfectant product for instrument decontamination (including the touch screen) and
highly recommends it to decontaminate your instrument.
Technical Manual
Introduction
Specifications
7. Specifications
7.1. Technical specifications
7.1.1. Parameters
* PDW, PCT, ALY%, ALY#, LIC%, LIC# and RHCc have not been established as indications for use
in the United States for this instrument. Their use should be restricted to research or investigational
use only (RUO parameters).
CBC Parameters Descriptions

WBC White Blood Cell
RBC Red Blood Cell
HGB Hemoglobin concentration
HCT Hematocrit
MCV Mean Corpuscular Volume
MCH Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin
MCHC Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin Concentration
RDW
(P80 or PXL/PXLR until V2.3.0 Red Distribution Width
software version)
RDW-CV
(PXL/PXLR from V2.3.0 software Red Distribution Width - Coefficient of Variation
version)
RDW-SD
(PXL/PXLR from V2.3.0 software Red Distribution Width - Standard Deviation
version)
PLT Platelets
PDW* Platelet Distribution Width
MPV Mean Platelet Volume
PCT* Plateletcrit
DIFF Parameters Descriptions

LYM% Lymphocyte percentage
LYM# Lymphocyte absolute value
MON% Monocyte percentage
MON# Monocyte absolute value
NEU% Neutrophil percentage
NEU# Neutrophil absolute value
EOS% Eosinophil percentage
EOS# Eosinophil absolute value
BAS% Basophil percentage
BAS# Basophil absolute value
Technical Manual
Introduction
Specifications
DIFF Parameters Descriptions

LIC%* Large Immature Cell percentage
LIC#* Large Immature Cell absolute value
ALY%* Atypical Lymphocyte percentage
ALY#* Atypical Lymphocyte absolute value
RET Parameters Descriptions

RET% Reticulocyte percentage
RET# Reticulocyte absolute value
RETL Reticulocytes with low RNA content
RETM Reticulocytes with medium RNA content
RETH Reticulocytes with high RNA content
CRC Corrected Reticulocyte Count
MRV Mean Reticulocyte Volume
MFI Mean Fluorescence Index
IRF Immature Reticulocyte Fraction
RHCc Reticulocyte Hemoglobin Cell content
7.1.2. Throughput analyses

The rate of analysis of the instrument is approximately 80 samples per hour for CBC and DIFF analyses.
For RET analyses (Pentra XLR only), the approximate rate of analyses is 36 samples per hour.
7.1.3. Tube identification

Tube identification can be done by using:
■ an external keyboard,
■ the integrated barcode reader,
■ an external barcode reader (optional).
7.1.4. Reagents
■ ABX Diluent (10 Liters or 20 Liters).
■ ABX Cleaner (1 Liter, Integrated).
■ ABX Basolyse II (1 Liter, Integrated).
■ ABX Eosinofix (1 Liter, Integrated).
■ ABX Lysebio (0.4 Liter or 1 Liter, Integrated or 1 Liter, Integrated [ABX Pentra 80 and ABX Pentra XL80]).
■ ABX Fluocyte (0.5 Liter, Integrated) [Pentra XLR only].
■ ABX Minoclair (0.5 Liter, non-integrated).
7.2. Physical specifications
Power requirements
From 100 Vac to 240 Vac (+/-10%)
Power supply:
50 Hz to 60 Hz
Maximum power consumption: 230 W
Technical Manual
Introduction
Specifications
Power requirements
Maximum heat output: 670 kJ/h (635 BTU/h)
Printer: Refer to the printer manual
Computer Characteristics
Color LCD touch screen: 12 in.
Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0 for ABX Pentra 80
Operating System:
Windows XP or Windows 7 for ABX Pentra XL80 and Pentra XLR
Celeron 433 MHz, or
Processor:
Dual Core Intel Atom 1.46 GHz
128 MB for ABX Pentra 80
RAM (Random Access Memory):
4 Go for ABX Pentra XL80 and Pentra XLR
CD drive or external DVD/CD drive connected to the instrument USB port
Hard drive: 10 GB minimum
RS232, Ethernet, 4 USB connections
Capacity: 10000 results + graphics
Keyboard
Mouse
External Drive Characteristics: DVD±RW Drive (DVD-RAM)

Interface: Hi-speed USB
Dimensions: 14.5 x 15.6 x 2.1 cm (Width x Depth x Height)
Weight: 0.35 kg
Temperature conditions: 5°C to 35°C
Humidity: 10% - 80%
Laser specifications
Laser Melles Griot, Class IIIb Diode Laser
Wavelength: 488 nm
Emission power: 50 mW
Power consumption: 9W
Heat output: Negligible
Dimensions: 120 x 55 x 73 mm (Width x Depth x Height)
Dimensions and weight

Instrument dimensions: 82 x 57 x 54 cm (Width x Depth x Height)
55 kg (121 lbs) [ABX Pentra 80/ABX Pentra XL80]
Instrument weight:
62.5 kg (138 lbs)[Pentra XLR]
Minimum specimen volume

CBC mode: 35 µL
DIFF mode: 53 µL
RET mode (Pentra XLR only): 35 µL
Dilution ratios
RBC/PLT: 1/10000 HGB: 1/250
Technical Manual
Introduction
Specifications
Dilution ratios
WBC/BAS: 1/200 RET (Pentra XLR only): 1/15000
LMNE: 1/80
Counting aperture diameters

RBC/PLT: 50 µm
WBC/BAS: 80 µm
LMNE: 60 µm
RET (Pentra XLR only): 60 µm
HGB measurement
Modified Drabkin method: Cyanide-free determination for ABX Lysebio
Light source: Electroluminescent diode
Wavelength: 550 nm
Bandwidth: 10 nm
Measurements and computation

RBC, PLT, WBC, BAS: Impedance
HGB: Photometry
LYM, MON, NEU, EOS, ALY, LIC: Impedance and absorbance
HCT, MCH, MCHC, MCV, RDW, PDW, PCT, CRC, MRV, RHCc: Computation from stored data
RET: Impedance and fluorescence
Technical Manual
Introduction
Instrument description & technology
8. Instrument description & technology

Front side:
1
2
3 4
5 6 7
1 = Reagent cover 4 = Rack unloading tray 7 = Right front cover

2 = Touch screen 5 = Left front cover
3 = Rack loading tray 6 = Tube holder door
Left side:
5
3
4
1 = Reagent access 3 = LMNE syringe assembly 5 = USB port

2 = Optical bench / Laser 4 = Reagent syringe
bench (Pentra XLR only) assembly
Technical Manual
Introduction
Instrument description & technology
Right side:
1 = Sampling syringe 2 = Counting chambers 3 = Mother board
STAT tube holder:
1
4
2
3
1 = Sampling position 1 for 3 = Sampling position 3 for

5 = LEDs
5 mL tubes latex
2 = Sampling position 2 for 4 = Sampling position 4 for
3 mL tubes microtainers
Technical Manual
Introduction
Reagent specifications
9. Reagent specifications
The HORIBA Medical reagents specified for this instrument has been approved in accordance with
the European Directive 95/79/CE (Annexe III) for in vitro medical devices.
The CD-ROM RAX055 delivered with your instrument provides Reagents, Controls and Calibrators
leaflets/MSDS. The latest versions of these documents are available on:
www.horiba-abx.com/documentation.
Waste handling precautions:
When disposing of waste, protective clothing must be worn (lab coats, gloves, eye protections, etc.).
Follow your local and /or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
■ If required, waste can be neutralized before being discarded. Follow your laboratory protocol when
neutralizing and disposing of waste.
■ The disposal of the waste container must be done according to the local or national regulatory requirements.
HORIBA Medical manufactures and markets reagents, calibrators and control bloods specially
designed for use with this analyzer. The use of products not recommended by HORIBA Medical may
give erroneous results or instrument operation problems. Contact your HORIBA Medical authorized
representative for all information regarding the recommended products.
10. Printer
Use the printer supplied or approved by HORIBA Medical.
Contact your local HORIBA Medical representative for more information about printer compatibility
and consumable part numbers.
Technical Manual
Introduction
Printer
Technical Manual
Hydraulic & Pneumatic Principles
2 - Hydraulic & Pneumatic Principles
1. Hydropneumatic connections ...................................................................................... 2

1.1. Without Takasago valves ................................................................................................................ 2
1.2. With Takasago valves ..................................................................................................................... 5
1.3. Pentra XLR ...................................................................................................................................... 8
2. Valves functions .......................................................................................................... 13
3. Hydraulic circuit .......................................................................................................... 15

3.1. ABX Cleaner circuit ....................................................................................................................... 15
3.2. ABX Basolyse II circuit .................................................................................................................. 16
3.3. ABX Eosinofix circuit .................................................................................................................... 17
3.4. ABX Lysebio circuit ...................................................................................................................... 18
3.5. ABX Fluocyte circuit (Pentra XLR only) ......................................................................................... 19
3.6. ABX Diluent circuit ........................................................................................................................ 20
3.7. ABX Diluent prime circuit .............................................................................................................. 21
3.8. RBC sample transfer .................................................................................................................... 22
3.9. Counting circuit ............................................................................................................................ 23
3.10. LMNE transfer circuit .................................................................................................................. 24
3.11. LMNE injection circuit ................................................................................................................. 25
4. Pneumatic diagrams ................................................................................................... 26
Technical Manual
Hydropneumatic connections
1. Hydropneumatic connections
1.1. Without Takasago valves
Read this table as follows: LV3_2 means connection to port 2 of valve 3.
Circuit From Sleeving Diameter Length Sleeving To

AIR Atmosphere 2.06 140 LV14_2
LV14_1 1.52 70 Count syringe_1
Rinse chamber_1 - Atmos. 2.06 550 LV17_2
LV17_1 1.52 30 T8_1
Atmosphere 2.06 80 LV19_1
LV19_3 1.52 500 Diluent reservoir_2
LV19_2 1.52 60 T8_3
T8_2 1.52 230 Drain syringe # 2_1
LV21_1 1.30 185 Isolator_2
LV24_1 1.52 90 Drain syringe # 1_1
maxi.
ABX Diluent ABX Diluent container C 3x6 Diluent input
2000
Diluent input 2.54 190 S LV29_2
LV29_1 S 2.54 180 S Diluent reservoir_4
2.06 65 Diluent reservoir_1
Diluent reservoir_1 2.06 370 LV2_1
LV2_3 S 2.06 120 LMNE syringe_2
LV2_2 S 1.52 50 S LV3_3
LV3_1 S 1.52 60 S LV1_3
LV1_1 S 1.52 200 S Isolator_1
Isolator_2 S 1.52 100 T1_1
T1_2 1.14 35 LMNE flow cell_4
T1_2 Xba403a LMNE flow cell_4
LV1_2 1.52 300 T6_3
LV3_2 1.02 175 LMNE syringe_4
LMNE syringe_1 1.02 205 LMNE flow cell_5
LMNE flow cell_7 1.02 10 (Cap)
Diluent reservoir_3 2.06 610 S LV10_1
LV10_3 S 2.06 160 Reagent syringe_4
LV10_2 S 1.52 50 S LV11_3
LV11_1 S 1.52 15 T5_2
T5_1 1.52 760 LV22_3
Technical Manual

LV22_1 1.52 50 LV23_3
LV23_1 1.52 190 T3_1
T3_3 1.52 75 Probe rinse block_1
T3_2 1.30 15 Isolator_1
Isolator_3 1.52 215 LV20_1
LV20_2 1.52 760 T7_1
LV23_2 2.06 300 Probe rinse block_2
LV22_2 1.02 115 Sample syringe_2
LV11_2 S 1.52 440 LV25_3
LV25_1 1.52 65 LV27_3
LV27_1 1.52 50 LV26_3
LV26_1 1.52 200 S Reagent heater_7
Reagent heater_8 S 1.52 160 RBC chamber_1
DIL1/HGB
Reagent heater_2 S 1.52 160
chamber_1
LV27_2 1.52 50 T10_2
WBC/Baso
LV25_2 1.52 170
chamber_4
ABX Cleaner ABX Cleaner bottle 2.06 800 LV8_1
LV8_3 2.06 160 Reagent syringe_2
LV8_2 1.52 70 LV6_3
LV6_1 1.52 300 T10_3
WBC/Baso
T10_1 1.52 180
chamber_1
LV6_2 1.52 120 T5_3
ABX Eosinofix ABX Eosinofix bottle 2.06 800 LV9_1
Reagent heater_4 S 1.52 160 LMNE chamber_3
ABX Basolyse II ABX Basolyse II bottle TG 2.06 800 LV12_1
LV12_3 TG 2.06 160 Reagent syringe_5
LV12_2 S TG 2.06 575 S Reagent heater_10
Reagent heater_9 S TG 2.06 60 S Reagent heater_11
1.6 straight
Reagent heater_12 S TG 2.06 160
connection_2
WBC/BASO
1.6 straight connection_1 1.52 15
chamber_2
ABX Lysebio ABX Lysebio bottle 1.52 800 LV7_1
DIL1/HGB
LV7_2 1.52 480
chamber_2
SAMPLING Needle_1 1.02 205 Sample syringe_1
Needle_1 S Sample syringe_1
LMNE
LMNE chamber_4 1.30 20 M4_2 photocell
COUNTING
M4_1 photocell 1.30 320 LV4_1
Technical Manual

LV4_2 1.02 130 T2_2
T2_3 1.02 250 LMNE syringe_5
LMNE syringe_3 1.14 85 T4_1
T4_2 1.02 15 LV5_1
LV5_2 1.52 280 T7_2
T2_1 S 1.85 10 LMNE flow cell_6
0.19 4 LMNE flow cell_6
LMNE flow cell_output 1.52 20 E1_1 anode fitting
E1_2 anode fitting 1.52 70 Isolator_1
Isolator_2 1.52 80 E2_1 ground fitting
E2_2 ground fitting 1.52 335 LV28_2
LV28_1 1.52 120 T6_2
T6_1 1.52 160 S Reagent heater_5
WBC/RBC
WBC/Baso chamber_3 1.52 200 RBC chamber_3
COUNTING
RBC chamber_2 1.52 480 LV15_2
WASTE Rinse chamber_3 2.06 20 Filter_1
Filter_2 2.06 100 LV31_2
LV31_1 1.52 30 T12_3
DIL1/HGB chamber_3 1.52 65 LV32_2
LV32_1 1.52 15 T12_2
T12_1 1.52 35 T13_3
LV34_1 1.52 15 T13_2
T13_1 1.52 180 M1_1 photocell
M1_2 photocell 1.52 15 Isolator # 1_1
Isolator # 1_2 2.06 280 LV30_1
LV30_3 S 2.54 160 S Drain syringe # 1_2
LV30_2 S 2.54 150 T14_3
LMNE chamber_5 1.52 65 LV33_2
LV33_1 1.52 15 T11_2
T11_1 1.52 40 E3_1
E3_2 1.52 50 M2_1 photocell
Isolator # 2_2 2.06 500 LV18_1
T7_3 1.52 215 T11_3
WBC/Baso chamber_5 1.52 50 LV35_2
LV35_1 1.52 130 M3_1 photocell
Isolator # 3_2 2.06 460 Count syringe_3
LV18_2 S 2.54 150 T9_2
T9_1 2.54 225 T14_2
Technical Manual

T14_1 2.54 20 Waste output
T14_3 2.54 150 S LV30_2
T4_3 1.02 150 LV13_1
Count syringe_5 2.06 120 LV16_1
LV16_2 S 2.54 150 T9_3
maxi.
Waste output C 4x6 Waste container
2000
1.2. With Takasago valves

LV17_1 1.52 30 T8_1
LV19_2 1.52 60 T8_3
T8_2 1.52 230 Drain syringe # 2_1
LV21_1 1.30 185 Isolator_2
maxi.
ABX Diluent ABX Diluent container 3x6 Diluent input
2000
LV2_2 S 1.52 50 S LV3_3
LV3_1 S 1.52 60 S LV1_3
LV1_1 S 1.52 200 S Isolator_1
Isolator_2 S 1.52 100 T1_1
LV1_2 1.52 300 T6_3
Technical Manual

LV10_2 S 1.52 50 S LV11_3
LV11_1 S 1.52 15 T5_2
T5_1 1.52 760 LV22_3
LV22_1 1.52 50 LV23_3
LV23_1 1.52 190 T3_1
Needle rinse
T3_3 1.52 75
block_1
T3_2 1.30 15 Isolator_1
Isolator_3 1.52 215 LV20_1
LV20_2 1.52 760 T7_1
Needle rinse
LV23_2 2.06 300
block_2
LV11_2 S 1.52 440 LV25_3
LV25_1 1.52 65 LV27_3
LV27_1 1.52 50 LV26_3
Reagent heater_8 S 1.52 160 T15_3
RBC chamber_1
DIL1/HGB
chamber_1
LV27_2 1.52 50 T10_2
WBC/BASO
LV25_2 1.52 170
chamber_4
LV8_2 1.52 70 LV6_3
LV6_1 1.52 300 T10_3
WBC/BASO
T10_1 1.52 180
chamber_1
LV6_2 1.52 120 T5_3
ABX Basolyse II ABX Basolyse II bottle TG 2.06 800 LV12_1
LV12_3 TG 2.06 160 Reagent syringe_5
LV12_2 S TG 2.06 575 S Reagent heater_10
Technical Manual

1.6 straight
Reagent heater_12 S TG 2.06 160
connection_2
WBC/BASO
1.6 straight connection_1 1.52 15
chamber_2
DIL1/HGB
LV7_2 1.52 480
chamber_2
T15_2 1.52 180 LV36_1
LV36_2 LV37_2
LV36_3 1.52 200 RBC chamber_1
T15_1 1.52 70 LV37_3
DIL1/HGB
LV37_1 1.02 50
chamber_4
LMNE
COUNTING
LV4_2 1.02 130 T2_2
T4_2 1.02 15 LV5_1
LV5_2 1.52 280 T7_2
LV28_1 1.52 120 T6_2
WBC/RBC
WBC/BASO chamber_3 1.52 200 RBC chamber_3
COUNTING
Filter_2 2.06 150 LV31_2
LV31_1 1.52 30 T12_3
LV32_1 1.52 15 T12_2
T12_1 1.52 35 T13_3
LV34_1 1.52 15 T13_2
T13_1 1.52 180 M1_1 photocell
Technical Manual

Isolator # 1_2 2.06 280 LV30_1
LV30_2 S 2.54 150 T14_3
LV33_1 1.52 15 T11_2
T11_3 1.52 215 T7_3
T11_1 1.52 40 E3_1
Isolator # 2_2 2.06 500 LV18_1
LV18_2 S 2.54 150 T9_2
WBC/BASO chamber_5 1.52 50 LV35_2
T4_3 1.02 150 LV13_1
LV16_2 S 2.54 150 T9_3
T9_1 2.54 225 T14_2
maxi.
Waste output 4x6 Waste container
2000
1.3. Pentra XLR

LV17_1 1.52 30 T8_1
LV19_2 1.52 60 T8_3
T8_2 1.52 230 Drain syringe # 2_1
LV21_1 1.30 185 Isolator_2
LV24_1 1.52 70 T16_3
Technical Manual

Drain syringe # 1_1 1.52 20 T16_1
T16_2 1.52 450 LV39_1
LV39_2 1.52 180 Membrane pump
maxi.
ABX Diluent ABX Diluent container 3.2x6.4 Diluent input
2000
LV2_2 S 1.52 50 S LV3_3
LV3_1 S 1.52 60 S LV1_3
LV1_1 S 1.52 160 E7_1
E7_2 1.52 80 S Isolator_1
Isolator_2 S 1.52 100 T1_1
LV1_2 1.52 300 T6_3
LV10_2 S 1.52 50 S LV11_3
LV11_1 S 1.52 15 T5_2
T5_1 1.52 760 LV22_3
LV22_1 1.52 50 LV23_3
LV23_1 1.52 190 T3_1
Needle rinse
T3_3 1.52 75
block_1
T3_2 1.30 15 Isolator_1
Isolator_3 1.52 215 LV20_1
LV20_2 1.52 680 E9_2
E9_1 1.52 90 T7_1
Needle rinse
LV23_2 2.06 300
block_2
LV11_2 S 1.52 440 LV25_3
LV25_1 1.52 65 LV27_3
LV27_1 1.52 50 LV26_3
Reagent heater_8 S 1.52 160 T15_3
RBC chamber_1
Technical Manual

DIL1/HGB
chamber_1
LV27_2 1.52 50 T10_2
WBC/BASO
LV25_2 1.52 170
chamber_4
LV8_2 1.52 70 LV6_3
LV6_1 1.52 300 T10_3
WBC/BASO
T10_1 1.52 180
chamber_1
LV6_2 1.52 120 T5_3
ABX Basolyse II ABX Basolyse II bottle TG 2.06 800 E8_2
E8_1 2.06 15 LV12_1
LV12_3 2.06 15 E3_2
E3_1 TG 2.06 160 Reagent syringe_5
LV12_2 S 2.06 15 E4_1
E4_2 TG 2.06 575 S Reagent heater_10
Reagent heater_12 S TG 2.06 160 E5_2
WBC/BASO
E5_1 1.52 15
chamber_2
DIL1/HGB
LV7_2 1.52 480
chamber_2
ABX Fluocyte ABX Fluocyte bottle 5X8 20
ABX Fluocyte bottle 1.6 420 LV38_1
2.05 15 LV38_1
LV38_3 2.05 15
LV38_3 1.6 180 Membrane pump
5X8 20 Membrane pump
LV38_2 2.05 15
LV38_2 1.6 1800 LMNE Chamber_1
5X8 20 LMNE Chamber_1
T15_2 1.52 180 LV36_1
LV36_2 LV37_2
LV36_3 1.52 200 RBC chamber_1
T15_1 1.52 70 LV37_3
Technical Manual

DIL1/HGB
LV37_1 1.02 50
chamber_4
LMNE
COUNTING
LV4_2 1.02 130 T2_2
T4_2 1.02 15 LV5_1
LV5_2 1.52 280 T7_2
LV28_1 1.52 120 T6_2
WBC/RBC
WBC/BASO chamber_3 1.52 200 RBC chamber_3
COUNTING
Filter_2 2.06 150 LV31_2
LV31_1 1.52 30 T12_3
LV32_1 1.52 15 T12_2
T12_1 1.52 35 T13_3
LV34_1 1.52 15 T13_2
T13_1 1.52 180 M1_1 photocell
Isolator # 1_2 2.06 280 LV30_1
LV30_2 S 2.54 150 T14_3
LV33_1 1.52 15 T11_2
T11_3 1.52 215 T7_3
T11_1 1.52 40 E6_1
Isolator # 2_2 2.06 500 LV18_1
LV18_2 S 2.54 150 T9_2
WBC/BASO chamber_5 1.52 50 LV35_2
Technical Manual
Ref: 1300018562 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA022GEN 2 - 11

T4_3 1.02 150 LV13_1
LV16_2 S 2.54 150 T9_3
T9_1 2.54 225 T14_2
maxi.
Waste output 4x6 Waste container
2000
Technical Manual
Valves functions
2. Valves functions
Valve number Subject Functions
1 Differencial diluent Selects flowcell sheath 2 or LMNE chamber
2 Differencial diluent
3 Differencial diluent Selects flowcell sheath 1 or sheath 2
4 Flowcell sample supply Opens the pathway from the LMNE chamber to the flowcell
5 Flowcell sample injector Opens the waste path for sample LMNE syringe
6 Rinse output control Selects rinse for needle rinse block or WBC/Baso chamber
7 ABX Lysebio Controls ABX Lysebio entry in/exit from the reagent syringe
8 ABX Cleaner Controls ABX Cleaner entry in/exit from the reagent syringe
9 ABX Eosinofix Controls ABX Eosinofix entry in/exit from the reagent syringe
10 ABX Diluent Controls ABX Diluent entry in/exit from the reagent syringe
11 Diluent ouput control Routes ABX Diluent to the needle rinse block or the heating coil
12 ABX Basolyse II Controls ABX Basolyse II entry in/exit from the reagent syringe
Routes ABX Diluent from the flowcell and the LMNE syringe to
13 Flowcell rinse
the counting syringe
14 Counting syringe Sets counting syringe to atmosphere
15 WBC and RBC/Plt count Opens vacuum count line for WBC and RBC chambers
16 Counting syringe Drains counting syringe
Sets draining syringe #2 to atmosphere (through the Rinse
17 Draining syringe #2
chamber)
18 Draining syringe #2 Drains draining syringe #2
Fills the ABX Diluent tank or sets the ABX Diluent tank to
19 Diluent reservoir
atmosphere
20 Needle Needle cleaning
21 Needle Flushing out of the needle rinsing block
22 Needle Directs ABX Diluent into interior or exterior of needle
23 Needle Needle cleaning
Sets draining syringe #1 to atmosphere (through the Rinse
24 Draining syringe #1
chamber)
WBC/Baso Counting Routes ABX Diluent to the heating coil or sweeps flow for
25
head counting head
Routes ABX Diluent (via the heating coil) to the HGB or RBC
26 Diluent chamber select
chamber
27 Diluent circuit Fills WBC\BAS chamber with ABX Diluent
Opens the path fromthe flowcell output to the LMNE chamber to
28 Flowcell drain
drain it
29 ABX Diluent circuit Entry of ABX Diluent
30 Counting syringe Flushing\Draining of the counting syringe
31 Chambers Drains the rinse chamber
32 Chambers Drains the first dilution chamber
33 Chambers Drains theLMNE chamber
34 Chambers Drains the RBC chamber
35 Chambers Drains the WBC\BAS chamber
Selects and transfers a sample from the first dilution for RBC
36* RBC dilution
counting
Technical Manual
Valves functions
Valve number Subject Functions

Selects and transfers a sample from the first dilution for RBC
37* RBC dilution
counting
Routes ABX Fluocyte to the membrane pump or the LMNE/RET
38** Membrane pump
chamber.
39** Membrane pump Distributes ABX Fluocyte to the LMNE/RET chamber.
*: Instruments with Takasago valves only.

**: Pentra XLR only.
Technical Manual
Hydraulic circuit
3. Hydraulic circuit
3.1. ABX Cleaner circuit
Technical Manual
Hydraulic circuit
3.2. ABX Basolyse II circuit
Technical Manual
Hydraulic circuit
3.3. ABX Eosinofix circuit
Technical Manual
Hydraulic circuit
3.4. ABX Lysebio circuit
Technical Manual
Hydraulic circuit
3.5. ABX Fluocyte circuit (Pentra XLR only)
Technical Manual
Hydraulic circuit
3.6. ABX Diluent circuit
Technical Manual
Hydraulic circuit
3.7. ABX Diluent prime circuit
Technical Manual
Hydraulic circuit
3.8. RBC sample transfer
For instruments with Takasago valves only
Technical Manual
Hydraulic circuit
3.9. Counting circuit
Technical Manual
Hydraulic circuit
3.10. LMNE transfer circuit
Technical Manual
Hydraulic circuit
3.11. LMNE injection circuit
Technical Manual
Pneumatic diagrams
4. Pneumatic diagrams
See pneumatic diagrams on next page.
Technical Manual
1 3
2 1 2.3
2
2
2.3
3 1
70
1 2
2
2.5
3 2.3
3 1
1 2 1 3
2.5 1.6
3
2
3
3
2 1
1 3
2.3
2
2 1
Electric & Electronic Principles
3 - Electric & Electronic Principles
1. Boards ............................................................................................................................ 3
1.1. APD Preamplifier board for Pentra XLR: CBR035A (1201761035) ................................................. 3
1.2. Carriage board: XAA428 (1209103428) .......................................................................................... 3
1.3. LEDs board: XAA429AS (1209109429) .......................................................................................... 3
1.4. Main board for ABX Pentra 80: XAA456 (1209102456) .................................................................. 4
1.5. LMNE amplifier board for ABX Pentra 80 / ABX Pentra XL80: XAA458 (1209109458) ................. 5
1.6. Motor board: XAA459BS (1209109459) ......................................................................................... 6
1.7. Solenoid board: XAA478AS (1209109478) ..................................................................................... 6
1.8. Main board for PXL80 / PXLR: XAA694 (1209102694/1209101694) .............................................. 7
1.9. CIS OD Amplifier board for Pentra XLR: XAA695A (1209101695) .................................................. 8
1.10. Hub board for Pentra XLR or Pentra XL80: XAA705A (1209101705) ........................................... 8
2. Flat cables ...................................................................................................................... 9
3. Connectors .................................................................................................................. 10
4. Fan ................................................................................................................................ 12
5. Synoptics ..................................................................................................................... 12
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
Boards
1. Boards
1.1. APD Preamplifier board for Pentra XLR: CBR035A (1201761035)
1.2. Carriage board: XAA428 (1209103428)
1.3. LEDs board: XAA429AS (1209109429)
Technical Manual
Boards
1.4. Main board for ABX Pentra 80: XAA456 (1209102456)
RBC/PLT coax WBC/BASO coax

LMNE
J23 J24 HGB
Preampli J34 J26
Board photometer
HGB
R148
TP45
R248
Optical Gain Gain TP9 TP7 TP5
RBC/PLT WBC/BASO
60V_LMNE
60V_WBC
60V_RBC
TP1
LMNE
Resistive Gain
Resistive Threshold
TP39 PLT RBC Gain

R134 High voltage supply
Otpical Threshold
TP4 TP19
TP2 TP13 TP12
R159 TP15
TP30
Threshold
R160
R136
TP3 TP56 Threshold

R161
R158
TP24 TP17 TP33 TP16

TP14
R157
TP21 TP58 TP57
TP31
TP18 TP36 TP54 R133 TP27 Threshold
R135
TP44 TP22 Gain Gain TP59

TP23
TP55
Optical
J44
bench fan
U33 U34 U37 U38

HC11
HC11 LMNE HC11 PLT U39 HC11 RBC WBC/BASO
DS1 DS2 Acquisition CPLD DS3 DS4

Sampling
syringe
motor current
U45 U46 U47 U44
Vertical
TP66
carriage
motor current R114
U48
External reset E1
TP65 U49 U50
Carriage
Board J1 R126 J6
J46
U53
Motors J3
Board
J38
LEDS
Board U55 U56
J42
Emergency
J19
posit° assy
U59
U63 U60
U64
Valves
#1 - 6
J16 J17
Valves
J30
Draining #1
R177 R171 R78 R151
#7 - 12 DS5 TP52 DS7 detection

TP47
J29
Valves Draining #2
DS6 TP48
#24 - 30 detection
U70
J18 J14 Counting
J41
U74 DS8
Valves
TP68 TP46 detection
DS9
#31 - 35
J28
Transfer
J37
DS10 detection
TP67
Valves J4
#13 - 19 TP42 TP40 TP41 TP43
J27
J15 J13 DS11 DS12 DS13 DS14

RS232#2
E2
J47
+24V +5V +15V -15V PC panel
TP50
TP51 J5
J33
& 36 - 37* DS15 DS16 J45

J31
RS232#3
Internal
Barcode
*: If equipped with Reagent Diluent level Room Heating room Waste level Power Power supply of barcode reader on J5
Takasago valves Heater detection Heater door detection detection supply Jumper on E2= VCC on J5-8 (by default)
Technical Manual
Boards
1.5. LMNE amplifier board for ABX Pentra 80 / ABX Pentra XL80:
XAA458 (1209109458)
Technical Manual
Boards
1.6. Motor board: XAA459BS (1209109459)
Main board Power supply
J1 J2
DS1
+24V
Motor Reagent
J3
J4
U1 syringe
Home
Reagent syr. motor current
U2 R16
TP1 Motor
Injection
J5
J6
U3
Home syringe
Injection syr. motor current
TP10 R23
TP2
Motor Counting
J7
J8
U4
Home syringe
Counting syr. motor current
U5 R38
TP3 Motor Draining #2
J9
U6 J10 Home syringe
Draining#2 syr. motor current
R50
TP4
Home
J11
Sample horizontal
J12
U8 carriage
Carriage motor current Motor
U7 R59
TP5
Motor Draining #1
J13
J14
U9 syringe
Home
R73
J15
TP6 Home
Rack transfer
J16
U11 Motor
U10
Transfer motor current
Rack transfer & R92
J17
TP7
loading switches
J18
U13 Rack loading

U12 motor
Loading motor current
R110
TP8
J19
U15
U14
TP9 R122
Mixer
J20 J21 J22 J23 motor current
Rack transfer Head locking Home Grabber Motor

solenoïd solenoïd status
Mixer
1.7. Solenoid board: XAA478AS (1209109478)
Technical Manual
Boards
1.8. Main board for PXL80 / PXLR: XAA694 (1209102694/1209101694)

CIS/OD HGB
Amplifier photometer
Board
Laser
safety switch
Laser
system
5V power
supply harness
Optical
bench fan
Sampling
syringe
motor current
Vertical
carriage
motor current
Carriage
Board
Motors
Board
LEDs
Board
Emergency
posit° assy
Valves
#1 - 6
Valves
#7 - 12 Draining #1
detection
Draining #2
Valves detection
#24 - 30
Counting
Valves detection
#31 - 35
Transfer
detection
Valves
#13 - 19
+24V RS232#2
Valves PC panel
#36 - 37 +5V +15V -15V
Shutter
solenoïd
+ Valves RS232#3
Internal
Technical Manual
Boards
1.9. CIS OD Amplifier board for Pentra XLR: XAA695A (1209101695)
1.10. Hub board for Pentra XLR or Pentra XL80: XAA705A (1209101705)
Technical Manual
Flat cables
2. Flat cables
List
Reference Length / number of points From to

DAD075A
350 mm / 14 pts J18 on main board J1 on LV24-30 valve assy board
(1201921075)
DAD107A J16 on main board J1 on LV1-6 valve assy board
480 mm / 14 pts
(1201921107) J15 on main board J1 on LV13-19 valve assy board
DAD109A DAD136A (See “3.Connectors,
560 mm / 14 pts J1 on LV31-35 valve assy board
(1201921109) page 10”)
DAD112A J5 on carriage valves assy
930 mm / 26 pts J1 on main board
(1201921112) board
DAD119A
950 mm / 8 pts J20 on motor board J1 on solenoïd board
(1201921119)
DAD120A
800 mm / 14 pts J23 on LMNE amplifier board J34 on main board
(1201921120)
DAD121A
700 mm / 44 pts J46 on main board J1 on motor board
(1201921121)
DAD122A
650 mm / 14 pts J17 on main board J1 on LV7-12 valve assy board
(1201921122)
DAD123AS Printer connector on internal
1000 mm / 25 pts (DSUB) Printer output on rear panel
(1201921123) PC
DAD124AS RS232 connector on internal
1000 mm / 9 pts (DSUB) RS232 output on rear panel
(1201921124) PC
DAD136A
80 mm / 14 pts M/M/F J14 on main board DAD109A
(1201921136)
Technical Manual
Connectors
3. Connectors
List
Reference From to
CBC008A
J5 on Main board (xaa456b) Tube barcode reader
(1201681008)
XBA322D External reagent waste rear
Waste level detection sensor
(1209114322) connector
XBA342A Extension cable connector
Horizontal carriage motor home
(1209111342) (xba469a)
XBA356A
Frame ground Ground shielding (Pentra XLR)
(1209111356)
XBA387A
J31 on main board (xaa456b) Heater/sensor for reagent heating coil
(1209112387)
XBA389B
J26 on main board (xaa456b) DIL1/HGB chamber
(1209112389)
XBA393A
J44 on main board (xaa456b) Upper fan
(1209111393)
XBA396A
J1 on carriage board (xaa428c) Vertical carriage home infrared cell
(1209111396)
XBA398C
J23 on main board (xaa456b) RBC chamber
(1209113398)
XBA398C
J24 on main board (xaa456b) WBC chamber
(1209113398)
XBA399C
J22 on LMNE amplifier board LMNE flowcell
(1209113399)
Tube piercing needle high switch
XBA427A Tube piercing motor (B3)
J19 on main board (xaa456b)
(1209111427) Tube piercing needle low switch
Tube recognition switches
Rack loading home switch
Rack counting #1 switch
Rack counting #2 switch
Rack output tray nearly full switch
XBA428A Transfer cover open switch
(1209111428) Transfer end check switch
J17 on motor board (xaa459b) Transfer check #1 switch
(schematic not Transfer check #2 switch
available) Tube presence check switch
Tube height position switch
Emergency door status switches
Emergency door solenoïd harness (XBA471A: Solenoïd
molex 230 mm)
XBA431A J37 on main board (xaa456b) LMNE transfer infrared cell
XBA431A J41 on main board (xaa456b) Counting detection infrared cell
XBA431A J29 on main board (xaa456b) Draining #2 infrared cell
XBA431A J30 on main board (xaa456b) Draining #1 infrared cell
XBA432A
J15 on motor board (xaa459b) Rack transfer motor home
(1209111432)
XBA432A
J22 on motor board (xaa459b) Tube mixer µstep motor home
(1209111432)
Technical Manual
Connectors
Reference From to
XBA432A
J23 on motor board (xaa459b) Grabber status infrared cell
(1209111432)
XBA458A
J2 on carriage board (xaa428c) Sample syringe home switch
(1209111458)
XBA459A
J8 on motor board (xaa459b) Counting syringe home switch
(1209111459)
XBA459A
J10 on motor board (xaa459b) Drain syringe #2 Home switch
(1209111459)
XBA460A
J4 on motor board (xaa459b) Reagent syringe home switch
(1209111460)
XBA460A
J6 on motor board (xaa459b) LMNE syringe home switch
(1209111460)
XBA461A
J27 on main board (xaa456b) Chamber heating door security switch
(1209111461)
XBA461A
J14 on motor board (xaa459b) Drain syringe #1 home switch
(1209111461)
XBA462A
J3 on carriage board (xaa428c) Vertical carriage motor (B1)
(1209111462)
XBA462A
J4 on carriage board (xaa428c) Sample syringe motor (B2)
(1209111462)
XBA463A
J18 on motor board (xaa459b) Rack loading motor (B4)
(1209111463)
XBA463A
J16 on motor board (xaa459b) Rack transfer motor (B5)
(1209111463)
XBA464A
J7 on motor board (xaa459b) Counting syringe motor (B9)
(1209111464)
XBA464A
J9 on motor board (xaa459b) Draining syringe #2 motor (B8)
(1209111464)
XBA465A
J19 on motor board (xaa459b) Tube mixer µstep motor (B6)
(1209111465)
XBA465A
J13 on motor board (xaa459b) Drain syringe #1 motor (B12)
(1209111465)
XBA465A
J3 on motor board (xaa459b) Reagent syringe motor (B11)
(1209111465)
XBA465A
J5 on motor board (xaa459b) LMNE syringe motor (B10)
(1209111465)
XBA469A Horizontal carriage motor home harness (XBA432A:
J11 on motor board (xaa459b)
(1209111469) Infrared photocell 600 mm (2 tabs))
XBA470A
J21 on motor board (xaa459b) Mixer head locking solenoïd
(1209111470)
XBA471A
Rack switches harness (xba428a) Emergency door solenoïd
(1209111471)
XBA478A
J12 on motor board (xaa459b) Horizontal carriage motor (B7)
(1209112478)
XBA486A
J38 on main board (xaa456b) LEDs extension cable connector (XBA487A)
(1209111486)
XBA487A
XBA486A J1 on LEDs board (xaa429a)
(1209111487)
XBA488A
J47 on main board (xaa456b) External reagent waste rear connector
(1209111488)
Technical Manual
Connectors
Reference From to
XBA572A
J2 on Main board (xaa694a) Temperature sensor (Pentra XLR)
(1209111572)
XBA645A
DAD136A XBA646A
(1209111645)
LV# 36
XBA646A XBA646A
LV# 37
XBA838A
J4 on CIS OD Amplifier board J100 on ADP Preamplifier board (Pentra XLR)
(1209111838)
XBA839A
J55 on Main board (xaa694a) J5 on CIS OD Amplifier board (Pentra XLR)
(1209111839)
XBA840A
J8 on Main board (xaa694a) Shutter solenoïd, EV39 and EV39 (Pentra XLR)
(1209111840)
XBA843A
J2 on CIS OD Amplifier board Flowcell anode (Pentra XLR)
(1209111843)
XBA844A
Ground Flowcell cathode (Pentra XLR)
(1209111844)
XBA845A
Ground Tube grounding (Pentra XLR)
(1209111845)
XDA605A
J28 on main board (xaa456b) Diluent reservoir
(1209131605)
XDA813B
J33 on main board (xaa456b) Heater/fan/sensor for chamber heating
(1209132813)
Optical bench lamp
DBN006C J45 on the main board
Power supply module
(1202163008) J3 on the PC panel supply board
J2 on the motor board
Technical Manual
Fan
4. Fan
By default, the fan is engaged when the temperature is over 23°, or when the laser interlock sensor is triggered.
The reason it has been set that way is that the ABX Pentra 80 and the ABX Pentra XL80 require that the fan is
always active. Since the ABX Pentra 80 and the ABX Pentra XL80 do not have a laser bench, there is no laser
interlock sensor, and the fan is therefore always engaged. For the Pentra XLR, the fan is engaged only when
the temperature is over 23° or if the laser bench cover is open.
5. Synoptics
See the synoptic diagrams on the next page.
Technical Manual
PC
RS232 RS232
POWER
HOST INTERNAL
SUPPLY
PRINTER COM 3
VGA USB
Analysis Cycle Technology
4 - Analysis Cycle Technology
1. Analysis cycle description (principles) ........................................................................ 2

1.1. DIFF cycle without Takasago valves .............................................................................................. 2
1.2. DIFF cycle with Takasago valves (EV36 & EV37) ............................................................................ 5
1.3. RET cycle (Pentra XLR only) ........................................................................................................... 8
2. Measuring principles .................................................................................................. 12

2.1. Multi distribution sytem (MDSS) ................................................................................................... 12
2.2. CBC measurement principles ....................................................................................................... 14
2.3. DIFF measurement principles ....................................................................................................... 17
2.4. RET measurement principles ........................................................................................................ 21
3. Raw counts .................................................................................................................. 24

3.1. Selection of the raw counts .......................................................................................................... 24
3.2. Description of the raw counts ...................................................................................................... 24
Technical Manual
Analysis cycle description (principles)
1. Analysis cycle description (principles)
1.1. DIFF cycle without Takasago valves
■ Aspiration of the blood sample from the tube

through the cap (53 µL).
■ Translationof the sampling carriage over the
Rinse chamber.
Cleaning of the needles:

■ Internal cleaning: 1 mL of ABX Diluent inside
the piercing needle.
■ External cleaning: 2 mL of ABX Diluent outside
the piercing needle and reject of 3 µL of blood
(not used).

DIL1 chamber (first dilution).
■ Distribution of 0.88 mL of ABX Diluent during
the descent of the needle at the bottom of the
chamber.
■ Distribution of 10 µL of blood when the needle
is at the bottom of the chamber.
■ The sampling needle moves up and distributes

0.80 mL of ABX Diluent through the chamber
inlet into a tangential flow to complete the first
dilution.
■ Bubbling.
Technical Manual
■ Translation
of the sampling carriage over the
WBC/BASO counting chamber.
■ Positioningthe needle point into a tangential
flow of 2 mL of ABX Basolyse II and
synchronised distribution of 10 µL of blood.
■ Bubbling.
Dilution
Blood Volume: 10 µL
ABX Basolyse II Volume: 2000 µL
Dilution Rate: 1/200
■ Translation
LMNE/RET mixing chamber.
■ Positioning the needle point into a tangential
flow of 1 mL of ABX Eosinofix and synchronised
distribution of 25 µL of blood.
■ Bubbling.
Dilution
ABX Eosinofix Volume: 1000 µL
ABX Diluent Volume: 1000 µL
Final Dilution Rate: 1/80
■ Translation
Rinse chamber.
Rinsing of the needles:

■ Internal
rinsing: 0.8 mL of ABX Diluent inside
the sampling needle.
■ External
rinsing: 0.5 mL of ABX Diluent outside
■ Internal
■ External
WBC and LMNE counting:

■ Distribution
of 1 mL of ABX Diluent into the
LMNE chamber.
■ Dilution
transfer trough the LMNE flowcell and
counting during 12 seconds.
■ WBC/BASO counting.
Technical Manual

DIL1 chamber.
■ Sampling of 42.5 µL of the first dilution.

Rinse chamber.
■ Rinsing of the exterior of the sampling needle
with 0.4 mL of ABX Diluent.
HGB:
■ Distribution of 0.4 mL of ABX Diluent, then
distribution of 0.36 mL of ABX Lysebio into the
DIL1 chamber during bubbling.
■ RBC/PLT counting and HGB measurement.
■ WBC/BASO chamber rinsing: Draining and
filling with 1 mL of ABX Cleaner and 1.5 mL of
ABX Diluent.
■ Chambers cleaning and HGB blank.

■ Draining and filling of the DIL1 chamber with
2.7 mL of ABX Diluent.
■ Measurement of the HGB blank.

■ Flowcell rinsing (about 1.6 mL of ABX Diluent).
■ Draining and filling of the RBC chamber with
Technical Manual
1.2. DIFF cycle with Takasago valves (EV36 & EV37)
■ Aspirationof the blood sample from the tube

■ Translation
Rinse chamber.

■ Internalcleaning: 1 mL of ABX Diluent inside
■ Internalcleaning: 1 mL of ABX Diluent inside
(not used).
■ Translation
■ Distribution
of 0.88 mL of ABX Diluent during
chamber.

dilution.
■ Bubbling.
Technical Manual
■ Translation
WBC/BASO counting chamber.
flow of 2 mL of ABX Basolyse II and
synchronised distribution of 10 µL of blood.
■ Bubbling.
Dilution
ABX Basolyse II Volume: 2000 µL
Dilution Rate: 1/200
■ Translation
LMNE/RET mixing chamber.
flow of 1 mL of ABX Eosinofix and synchronised
distribution of 25 µL of blood.
■ Bubbling.
Dilution
ABX Eosinofix Volume: 1000 µL
ABX Diluent Volume: 1000 µL

Rinse chamber.

■ Internalrinsing: 0.8 mL of ABX Diluent inside
■ External rinsing: 0.5 mL of ABX Diluent outside
■ Internalrinsing: 0.5 mL of ABX Diluent inside
■ External rinsing: 0.3 mL of ABX Diluent outside
WBC and LMNE counting:

■1 mL of ABX Diluent into the LMNE chamber.
■ Dilution transfer trough the LMNE flowcell and
counting during 12 seconds.
■ WBC/BASO counting.
Technical Manual
■ EV36 and 37 commute (ON).

■ Aspirationof a part of the first dilution through
EV36 & 37 by the mean of the ABX Diluent
reagent syringe (the length beetwen EV36 and
EV37 gives the exact volume for the RBC
sample).
■ EV 36 and 37 commute (OFF).

■ Thesample (42.5 µL) is pushed into the RBC
chamber with a flow of 2.5 mL of ABX Diluent.
■ Bubbling.
Dilution
Initial Blood Volume: 10 µL (1/200)
Reagent Volume (RBC chamber): 2500 µL
HGB:
■ Distribution of 0.4 mL of ABX Diluent, then
distribution of 0.36 mL of ABX Lysebio into the
DIL1 chamber during bubbling.
■ RBC/PLT counting and HGB measurement.
■ WBC/BASO chamber rinsing: Draining and
filling with 1 mL of ABX Cleaner and 1.5 mL of
ABX Diluent.
■ Chambers cleaning and HGB blank.

■ Drainingand filling of the DIL1 chamber with
■ Measurement of HGB blank.

■ Flowcell rinsing (about 1.6 mL of ABX Diluent).
■ Drainingand filling of the RBC chamber with
Technical Manual
1.3. RET cycle (Pentra XLR only)
■ Aspiration of the blood sample from the tube

Rinse chamber.

(not used).

■ Distribution of 0.88 mL of ABX Diluent during
chamber.

dilution.
■ Bubbling.
Technical Manual
■ Distribution of 2 mL of ABX Diluent in the WBC/

BASO chamber.
■ Bubbling.

■ External
■ Internal
■ Externalrinsing: 0.3 mL of ABX Diluent outside
the sampling needle and reject of 22 µL of
blood (not used).
■ Distribution
of 2.5 mL of ABX Fluocyte in the
LMNE/RET chamber.
■ EV36 and 37 commute (ON).

■ Aspirationof a part of the first dilution through
EV36 & 37 by the mean of the ABX Diluent
reagent syringe (the length beetwen EV36 and
EV37 gives the exact volume for the RBC
sample).
■ EV 36 and 37 commute (OFF).

■ The sample is pushed into the RBC chamber
with a flow of 2.5 mL of ABX Diluent.
■ Bubbling.
Dilution
Initial Blood Volume: 10 µL (1/200)
Reagent Volume (RBC chamber): 2500 µL
Technical Manual
■ RBC counting.
■ Translation
DIL1 chamber.
■ Sampling of 28 µL of the first dilution.
■ Translation
LMNE/RET chamber.
■ Distribution of the 28 µL of first dilution.
■ Bubbling.
Dilution
Initial Blood Volume from Dil1: 28 µL (1/200)
ABX Fluocyte Volume: 2500 µL
Dilution rate: 1/89
Temperature: 35°C
Incubation time: 50 seconds
■ Translation
Rinse chamber.

■ Internal
Technical Manual
■ Drainingand filling of the DIL1 chamber with

■ Drainingand filling of the RBC chamber with
■ Drainingand filling of WBC/BASO chamber
with 1 mL of ABX Cleaner and 1.7 mL of ABX
Diluent.
■ End of the RET sample incubation.
Dilution
■ Final Dilution Rate: 1/15000
■ Dilution
transfer trough the LMNE/RET flowcell
and counting during 18 seconds.
■ Drainingand filling of the LMNE/RET chamber

with 1 mL of ABX Diluent.
Technical Manual
Measuring principles
2. Measuring principles
2.1. Multi distribution sytem (MDSS)
2.1.1. CBC mode

In CBC mode, 35 µL of whole blood is aspirated
then delivered with reagents into the chambers
as follows: Diluent
■ one specimen for the first RBC/PLT dilution and
the HGB measurement. Air
■ another specimen for the WBC/BASO count. 12 µL discarded
10 µL for WBC/BASO count
10 µL for RBC/PLT dilution
3 µL discarded
2.1.2. DIFF Mode

In DIFF mode, 53 µL of whole blood is aspirated,
then delivered with reagents into the chambers
as follows: Diluent
■ one specimen for the first RBC/PLT dilution and
the HGB measurement. Air
■ another specimen for the WBC/BASO count.
5 µL discarded
■ the last specimen for the LMNE matrix.
25 µL for the LMNE matrix
10 µL for WBC/BASO count
3 µL discarded
Technical Manual
2.1.3. RET mode (Pentra XLR only)

In RET mode, 35 µL of whole blood is aspirated
then delivered with reagents in the chambers for
the first RBC/PLT dilution. Diluent
Air
22 µL discarded
3 µL discarded
2.1.4. Specimen distribution

Specimen distribution in the chambers is carried
out in a tangential flow of reagent which allows
perfect mixing of the dilution and avoids any
viscosity problems (this multi distribution in a Reagent
reagent flow is a HORIBA Medical patent). input
Technical Manual
2.2. CBC measurement principles
2.2.1. RBC/PLT
Measurement of impedance variation generated
by the passage of cells through a calibrated
micro aperture.
The blood specimen is diluted in an electrolytic

(current conductor) diluent and pulled through
the calibrated micro-aperture. Two electrodes
are placed on either side of the aperture. Electric
current passes through the electrodes
continuously.
When a cell passes through the aperture, the

electric resistance between the two electrodes
increases proportionately to the cell volume.
The generated electrical pulses have a very low

voltage which the amplification circuit increases
so that the electronic system can analyze them
and eliminate the background noise.
Results
Number of cells counted per volume unit x
calibration coefficient
Histograms
RBC: Distribution curves on 256 counting
channels from 30 fL to 300 fL.
PLT: Distribution curves on 256 channels from

2 fL to a mobile threshold. This threshold moves
according to the microcyte population present in
the analysis area.
Technical Manual
RBC/PLT Dilutions
Technical characteristics of the RED BLOOD CELL and PLATELET counts

Initial blood volume: 10 µL Method: Impedance
Vol. ABX Diluent: 2500 µL Aperture diameter: 50 µm
Final dilution rate**: 1/10000 Count vacuum: 200 mbar
Temperature of reaction: 35°C Count period: 2 X 6 seconds
**: Two successive dilutions are carried out: Primary Dilution for RBC and PLT:
Blood: 10 µL
Vol. ABX Diluent: 1700 µL Dilution: 1/170
Secondary Dilution RBC and PLT (from the primary dilution)

Dilution: 42.5 µL
Vol. ABX Diluent: 2500 µL Dilution: 1/58.8
Final dilution: 1/170 x 1/58.8 = 1/10000
2.2.2. HGB Measurement

ABX Lysebio is a reagent used for erythrocyte lysis and cyanide-free determination of hemoglobin. By addition
of the agent of lysis, the hemoglobin is released. All the heme iron is oxidized and stabilized. Oxidation resulting
complexes are quantified by spectrophotometry at a wave length of 550 nm.
Technical characteristics for the HGB MEASUREMENT

Blood volume: 10 µL Method: Photometry
Vol. ABX Diluent: 1700 µL Wavelength: 550 nm
Vol. ABX Lysebio: 400 µL
Complement ABX Diluent: 400 µL
Final dilution rate**: 1/250
Temperature of reaction: 35°C
Results
Final HGB result represents: absorbance value obtained x coefficient of calibration.
2.2.3. HCT Measurement

The height of the pulses generated by the passage of a cell through the micro-aperture is directly proportional
to the volume of the analyzed RBC.
The hematocrit is measured as a function of the numeric integration of the MCV.
Technical Manual
2.2.4. Red Blood Cells Distribution Parameters Calculation

The Red Blood Cells distribution width parameters (RDW-CV and RDW-SD) are indexes of the distribution of
red blood cells volume. They allow the quantification of anisocytosis and contribute to the characterization of
erythrocyte morphological abnormalities.
The RDW-CV (%) expresses the Coefficient Variation of red cells volume distribution calculated from the
Standard Deviation and Mean Corpuscular Volume.
The RDW-SD (fL) expresses the Standard Deviation of red cells volume from the red blood cell distribution curve
and is independent of Mean Corpuscular Volume.
2.2.5. MCV, MCH, MCHC calculation

■ The MCV (Mean Cell Volume) is calculated directly from the RBC histogram.
■ The MCH (Mean Cell Hemoglobin) is calculated from the HGB value and the RBC count.
The mean hemoglobin weight in each RBC is given by the formula:
MCH (pg) = HGB / RBC x 10
■ The
MCHC (Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin Contained) is calculated according to the HGB and HCT values.
Mean HGB concentration in the total volume of RBC is given by the formula:
MCHC (g/dL) = HGB / HCT x 100
2.2.6. MPV Measurement

The MPV (Mean Platelet Volume) is directly derived from the analysis of the platelet distribution curve.
2.2.7. PCT Calculation

The thrombocrit is calculated according to the formula:
PCT% = PLT (103/µL) x MPV (µm3) / 10 000
2.2.8. PDW calculation
The PDW (Platelet Distribution Width) is

calculated from the PLT histogram.
The X-axis of the PLT histogram corresponds to

the volume of platelets. The first 15% of this
axis is referred to as the S1 zone, and the last
15% is referred to as the S2 zone. The PDW
corresponds to the width of the curve between
S1 and S2.
Technical Manual
2.3. DIFF measurement principles
2.3.1. General principles

The WBC count is carried out twice by two different sensors:
■ In the WBC/BASO chamber at the same time as the BAS count,
■ In the optical chamber during the acquisition of the LMNE matrix.
The reference count is the one obtained in the WBC/BASO chamber.
2.3.2. WBC/BASO Count
Detection principle is the same as for RBC.

Differentiation between BAS and other
leukocytes is obtained by means of the ABX
Basolyse II specific lysing action.
All the WBC are counted between the electrical
thresholds <0> and <BA3>. The basophils are
located between thresholds <BA2> and
<BA3>.
Technical characteristics of the WBC/BASO counts

Initial blood volume: 10 µL (CBC or CBC/DIFF) Method: Impedance
Vol. ABX Basolyse II: 2000 µL Aperture diameter: 80 µm
Final dilution rate**: 1/200 Count vacuum: 200 mbar
Temperature of reaction: 35°C Count period: 2 X 6 seconds
Results
WBC: The number of cells counted per volume during a specified period of time X the WBC coefficient of
calibration.
BAS: The proportion of BAS from total WBC (Basophils and WBC nuclei) counted per volume during a specified
period of time X the WBC calibration coefficient.
Technical Manual
2.3.3. LMNE Matrix
The WBC and Differential count are based on

three essential principles:
■ TheDouble Hydrodynamic Sleeving System
"DHSS" (HORIBA Medical patent).
■ The volume measurement (impedance
changes).
■ The measurement of transmitted light with 0°
angle, which permits a response according to
the internal structure of each cell and its
absorbance by means of incident light
diffusion.
The instrument delivers 25 µL of whole blood to

the LMNE/RET chamber in a flow of ABX
Eosinofix. This reagent lyses the RBC,
stabilizes the WBC in their native form and
stains the eosinophil nuclei with a specific
coloration.
The solution is then stabilized with ABX Diluent

and transferred to the measuring chamber.
Each cell is measured both in absorbance
(cytochemistry) and resistivity (volume).
Technical characteristics of the WBC counts during the acquisition of the matrix
Impedance with
Initial blood volume: 25 µL Method:
hydrofocus
Vol. ABX Eosinofix: 1000 µL Aperture diameter: 60 µm
Vol. ABX Diluent: 1000 µL Flow diameter: 42 µm
Final dilution rate: 1/80 Injection duration 12 seconds
Temperature of
35°C Volume injected 72 µL
reaction:
Incubation duration: 12 seconds
Technical Manual
No cell in the flowcell Baseline
Poorly-stained (agranular)
Low absorbance
cell in the flowcell
Hyper segmented with

complex granularity and High absorbance
staining
Results
From these measurements, a matrix is drawn up with volumes on the X-axis and optical transmission on the Y-
axis. The study of the matrix image permits the clear differentiation of 4 out of 5 leukocyte populations. As a
matter of fact, the basophil population is very small compared to the others.
■ LYMPHOCYTES: The lymphocytes being small with regular shapes, are positioned in the lower part of both
the optical axis and volume axis. Normal lymphocyte populations are generally observed with a good volume
homogeneity. The far left side of the lymphocyte zone should normally be empty, however if small
lymphocytes are present, small populations may exist in this area. The presence of platelet aggregates is
detected by a distribution pattern which moves from the origin of the matrix (background zone) into the
lymphocyte zone. The NRBCs with their cytoplasmic membranes lysed like the erythrocytes, will have their
nuclei situated to the far left side of the lymphocyte zone.
■ MONOCYTES: The monocytes, being cells with large kidney shaped nuclei and a large non-granular
cytoplasm, will neither be scattered nor absorb a large amount of light. They will therefore be positioned in the
lower part of the optical axis but clearly to the right of the volume axis.
Technical Manual
■ NEUTROPHILS: The neutrophils, with their cytoplasmic granules and their generally segmented nuclei, will
scatter light depending on their morphological complexity. A hypersegmented neutrophil will give an
increased optical response with respect to a young neutrophil population which will be in the upper position
of the optical axis depending on the presence of segmentation and/or granules.
■ EOSINOPHILS: With reagent action on cytoplasmic membranes, the leukocytes keep their native size and
only eosinophils are colored for optical separation. Eosinophils will be situated in the upper part of the optical
Y-axis due to their strong absorbance qualities and their size, which is nearly equivalent to large neutrophils.
■ Additional parameters: LIC (Large Immature Cells) and ALY (Atypical Lymphocytes) complete the panel
available on the matrix.
The immature granulocytic cells are detected by their larger volumes and by the presence of granules which
increase the intensity of the scattered light. Therefore, cells such as metamyelocytes will be found clearly to
the right of the neutrophils and nearly at the same level. Myelocytes and promyelocytes will be found in
saturation position on the far right of the matrix. These last three populations will be counted as LIC (Large
Immature Cells) and their given results are included in the neutrophil value. The blast cells will be found
generally to the right of the monocytes, and, as such, will increase the LIC count. Small blasts will be found
between the normal lymphocytes and monocytes. Platelets and debris from erythrocyte lysis represent the
background noise population located in the lower left area of the matrix. Most of the population partition
thresholds are fixed and give the limits of the morphological normality of leukocytes. Changes in the
morphology of a population will be expressed on the matrix by a shifting of the corresponding population.
A Blast alarm is generated from increased counts within the LIC area. This is correlated with Blast detection
on the Basophil curve.
Large lymphocytes are detected in the ALY (Atypical Lymphocytes) zone where reactive lymphoid forms,
stimulated lymphocytes and plasmocytes are also to be found.
Technical Manual
2.4. RET measurement principles
2.4.1. Technology
■ The instrument samples 35 µL of blood and injects 10 µL of it in the DIL1 chamber. It then mixes it with 1.7 mL
of ABX Diluent.
■ Then the instrument samples 28 µL of diluted blood and mixes it with 2.5 mL of ABX Fluocyte.
This reagent contains a fluorescent stain which is specific to nucleic acids: thiazol orange (Thiazol orange is
a patented product from Becton Dickinson San Jose, CA, USA).
■ The dilution is warmed at 35°C for 50 seconds. The stain molecules enter through the cell membrane and fix
the ribonucleic acid molecules.
■ Thisbinding increases the fluorescence (enhancement: ~3000x). After 50 seconds, the solution is transferred
to the laser optical bench to be measured.
■ The laser optical bench simultaneously measures the fluorescence of the cells passing through the measuring
point into the flowcell, and volume by impedance.
A cell passing through the flowcell gives two types of information:

■ The size of the cell measured by resistivity (Cell Impedance Signal),
■ The fluorescence signal (Orthogonal Fluorescence Light).
OFL: The fluorescence is collected using:

- a lens focused on the optical flowcell and located at 90° from the laser beam,
- an avalanche photodiode,
- a notch filter that suppresses the laser wavelength (488 nm) to prevent the APD from being affected by the
light.
Technical Manual
2.4.2. RET Matrix
F4 ■ The reticulocyte matrix is generated from 2

measurements: resistivity volume (CIS) and
orthogonal fluorescence (OFL) of cells
according to the X and Y axes respectively.
F3 ■ Mature red blood cells without RNA show
little or no fluorescent signal. They are
located at the bottom of the matrix, and
horizontally distributed according to their
F2 MCV and RDW.
■ Reticulocytes are separated from the red
blood cells by their fluorescence which is
proportional to the RNA content and their
immaturity. The most fluorescent elements,
F1
which are saturated at the top of the matrix,
are the most immature. Erythroblasts may
also be found in this area.
R1 R2 R3 R4
2.4.3. Parameters and Results

■ RET%: Percentage of counted reticulocytes
■ RET#: Absolute value of reticulocytes in relation to the number of RBC counted in the RBC channel
(RBC/PLT chamber).
RET# = (RET% x RBC#) / 100
■ RBC#: Absolute value of RBC counted in the RBC channel with the usual method (resistivity).
■ RETL: Percentage of reticulocytes having a low fluorescence in relation to the total number of reticulocytes.
RETL are located between F1 and F2 on the RET matrix.
RETL = (RETL# x 100) / RET#
■ RETM: Percentage of reticulocytes having a medium fluorescence in relation to the total number of
reticulocytes.
RETM are located between F2 and F3 on the RET matrix.
RETM = (RETM# x 100) / RET#
■ RETH: Percentage of reticulocytes having a high fluorescence in relation to the total number of reticulocytes.
RETH are located between F3 and F4 on the RET matrix.
RETH = (RETH# x 100) / RET#
■ RETL, RETM and RETH correspond to LFR, MFR & HFR (Bibliography.3, 4 & 5).
■ MFI: Mean Fluorescence Index, expressed in %.
MFI = [Channel of mean fluorescence - F1 Threshold] / ([F4 Threshold - F1 Threshold] x 100)
■ MRV: Mean Reticulocyte Volume.
- MCV calculation on the RBC channel.
- Search for the mean volume (in #channel) of the RBC matrix [CMG].
- Search for the mean volume (in #channel) of the reticulocytes [CMR].
MRV = MCV x (CMR / CMG)
■ IRF (Immature Reticulocyte Fraction):
IRF = (RETH# + RETM#) / RET#
■ CRC (Corrected Reticulocyte count):
CRC = RET% x (patient HCT / normal HCT)
CRC compensates for the increase in "Stress reticulocytes", in anemic patients.
Normal HCT = Mean of the HCT normality limits.
Technical Manual
■ RHCc (Reticulocyte Hemoglobin Cellular content):

Parameter calculated from the MRV.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1- Koepke JF, Koepke JA. Reticulocytes. Clinical lab. Haemat. (1986) 8:169-179.
2- Davis BH. Immature Reticulocyte Fraction (IRF): By any name, a useful clinical parameter of erythropoietic
activity. Laboratory Hematology (1996) 2:2-8
3- Davis BH, Bigelow NC. Flow cytometric reticulocyte quantification using thazole orange provides clinically
useful reticulocyte maturity index. Arch. Pathol. Lab. Med (1989) 113:684-689
4- Davis BH, Bigelow NC, Ball ED, Mills L, Cornwell G. Utility of flow cytometric reticulocytes quantification as
a predictor of engraftment in autologous bone marrow transplantation. Am J Hematol (1989) 32:81-87.
5- B.H. DAVIS, M. DICORATO, N.C. BIGELOW, M.H. LANGWEILER; Proposal for standardization of flow
cytometric reticulocytes maturity index measurements. Cytometry 14:318 1993
6- B.H. DAVIS ET AL. Flow Cytometric Reticulocyte Analysis Multiinstitutional Interlaboratory Correlation Study.
Am. J. Clin. Pathol. oct. 1994, vol. 102: 468-477
7- G.F. RIEDLER, R. ZINGG; Tabulae Haematologicae, Rocom, 23-30.
8- Clin. Lab. Haem. 1999, 21, 3-10 JX CORBERAND, C SEGONDS, A M FONTANILLES, JP CAMBUS, G
FILLOLA, P LAHARRAGUE. Evaluation of the PENTRA 120 Haemaotogy Analyser in a university hospital setting
9- Eur J Clin Chem Clin Biochem 1997; 35(2): 105-111 Clinical Performance of Leukocyte Differential on the
HORIBA ABX Pentra 120 Haematological Analyzer Giuseppe Lippi, Marco Nicoli, Nereo Modena and
Giancesare Guidi.
10- Hematol Cell Ther (1999) 41: 47-50 Evaluation of the monocyte counting by the Pentra 120. Comparison
with the manual method and fluoro-flow cytometry. M. Morillon, J. Maslin, J.J. De Pina, F.J. Louis and G. Martet
11- Clin Chem Lab Med 2000; 38(3):245-249 Determination of reticulocytes: Three methods compared,
Rüdiger Siekmeier, Alexa Bierlich and Werner Jaroß
12- Journal of hematology ISSN 0390-6078 Assessment of hematologic progenitor engraftment by complete
reticulocyte maturation parameters after autologus and allogeneic hematopoietic stem cell transplantation.
Antonio Torres, Joaquin Sánchez, Didier Lakomsky, Josefina Serrano, Miguel A. Alvarez, Carmen Martin,
Carmen Valls, Lourdes Nevado, Antonia Rodriguez, Javier Casaño, Francisco Martinez, Pedro Gómez.
13- Laboratory Hematology 7:75-80 Comparison of the Automated Reticulocyte Counts and Immature
Reticulocyte Fraction Measurements Obtained With the HORIBA ABX PENTRA 120 Retic Blood Analyzer and
the Sysmex XE-2100 Automated Hematology Analyzer. CAROL BRIGGS, DONA GRANT, SAMUEL J. MACHIN
14- American Journal of clinical pathology. Automated Reticulocyte Counting and Immature Reticulocyte
Fraction Measurement. Comparison of HORIBA ABX PENTRA 120 Retic, Sysmex R-2000, Flow Cytometry, and
Manual counts. Francis Lacombe, MD, PhD, Laurent Lacoste, Jean Philippe Vial, MD, Alex Briais, Josy Reiffers,
MD, Michel R. Boisseau, MD, and Philippe Bernard, MD.
Technical Manual
Raw counts
3. Raw counts
3.1. Selection of the raw counts
The raw counts are available on printouts only.

■ ABX Pentra 80: Go to "Settings/System/Printer" and select "raw".
■ ABX Pentra XL80 / Pentra XLR: Go to "Settings/System/Printer" and select "raw". Go to the Results menu
then press "Print/Send", and select "Print the run and raws in full page for selected rows".
3.2. Description of the raw counts
The raw counts are printed at the bottom of the Report printout.
■ WBC1 / WBC2: Number of WBCs counted in WBC/BASO chamber during the first and second count.
■ RBC1 / RBC2: Number of RBCs counted in the RBC/PLT chamber during the first and second count.
■ HCT1 / HCT2: First and second HCT measurements.
■ PLT1 / PLT2: Number of PLT counted in RBC/PLT chamber during the first and second count.
■ HGBB: Measurement of the HGB blank.
■ HGBM: HGB measurement.
■ LYM / MON / NEU / EOS: Number of cells located in their respective population areas.
■ NO / LL / RM / LN / FLN / FMN / FNE / RN: Number of cells located in their respective flag areas.
■ ALY / C127: Number of cells located in their respective areas.
■ LIC: Number of cell located on RN + RM + C127
C127
EOS
NO
FNE
RN
LN NEU
N
FM
FLN
MON RM
LL LYM
ALY
■ WBC: WBCs used for for the LMNE and BASO balance adjustments.
Technical Manual
Raw counts
■ RA#: Number of cells counted.

■ DIFF #: number of impact in LYM + MON + NEU + EOS population areas
■ CO%: Correlation percentage: % of cells crossing the flowcell in the correct time (transfer time, between the
aperture and the optical measurement).
Technical Manual
Raw counts
Technical Manual
Software Versions
5 - Software Versions
1. Service software overview ........................................................................................... 2
2. Windows Explorer Access ............................................................................................ 3
3. Software releases ......................................................................................................... 3
Technical Manual
Software Versions
Service software overview
1. Service software overview
Gain Adjustment
LMNE Adjustment
Aperture Current
Pulse Adjustment
Laser Adjustment
RET Adjustment
Autoclean Technical Measurement
Thermic adjustment
M.D.S.S. adjustment
Liquid sensor adjustment
Vacuum control
Sampler adjust.
Bubbling
Gains
LMNE Calibration
Technician Menu Cycles
Calibration Coefficients
Blank Values
System Tools
Burn in cycle
Barcode Setup
Others
Initialization
Service Miniclean Check Motors
Check Valves
Check Sensors
Sampler Test
Holder Adjustment
Rack Adjustment
Mechanical
Drain Chambers
Prime Cycles
Super User Menu Unprime Cycle
Clean Cycles
Hydraulic
Cycles Counter
Run Park Syringes Position
Run Maintenance Carriage Pos.
Calibration Coefficients
Concentrated Cleaning Others
Technical Manual
Software Versions
Windows Explorer Access
2. Windows Explorer Access

Go to Menu > Service > Technician Menu > Others > System Tools and press Launch Windows Explorer.
3. Software releases
First release of technical manual: V1.0.1
Second release of the manual:

■ ABX Pentra 80 history:
- RAH919A technical note: V1.01 for ABX Pentra 80 with version V1.0.0
- RAH921A technical note: V1.01 for ABX Pentra 80 with version < V1.0.0
- RAH938C technical note: V1.1.2
- RAH990D technical note: V1.3.2
■ ABX Pentra XL80 history:
- RAN002B Technical note: V1.1.1
Third release of the manual:

- RAH990E technical note: V1.4.0
- RAN132A technical note: V1.5.0
- RAN228B technical note: V1.7.1
- RAN002C technical note: V1.3.0
Fourth release of the manual:

- RAN228D technical note: V1.10.0
- RAN228E technical note: V1.11.0
- RAN228F technical note: V1.12.0
- RAN229F technical note: V1.11.0
- RAN229G technical note: V1.11.0
■ PentraXLR history:
Fifth release of the manual:

■ PentraXLR history:
Technical Manual
Software Versions
Software releases
Sixth release of the manual:

- RAN229K technical note: V2.2.0
- RAN229L technical note: V2.2.1
- RAN229M technical note: V2.3.0
■ Pentra XLR history:
- RAN671C technical note: V2.2.0
- RAN671D technical note: V2.2.1
- RAN671E technical note: V2.3.0
Seventh release of the manual:

- RAN229N technical note: V2.4.0
■ Pentra XLR history:
- RAN671G technical note: V2.4.0
Technical Manual
Alarms & Errors
6 - Alarms & Errors
1. Analyzer error messages .............................................................................................. 2
2. Transfer error messages .............................................................................................. 3
3. STAT mode error messages ........................................................................................ 4
4. Environment error messages ....................................................................................... 4
5. User error messages .................................................................................................... 5
6. Expiration date error messages .................................................................................. 5
7. Analyzer internal error types messages ..................................................................... 6
Technical Manual
Alarms & Errors
Analyzer error messages
1. Analyzer error messages

Alarms Error type Help message
Carriage Motor home switch Run an Autoclean
Carriage motor failure
always detected Check motor in Service Menu
Carriage mechanism not reaching Carriage Motor Mechanism Run an Autoclean
home initialization failed Check motor in Service Menu
Counting Syringe Motor home Run an Autoclean
Counting syringe motor failure
switch always detected Check motor in Service Menu
Counting syringe mechanism not Counting Syringe Motor Run an Autoclean
reaching home Mechanism initialization failed Check motor in Service Menu
Diluter Syringe Motor home switch Run an Autoclean
Diluter syringe motor failure
always detected Check motor in Service Menu
Diluter syringe mechanism not Diluter Syringe Motor Mechanism Run an Autoclean
reaching home initialization failed Check motor in Service Menu
DRAIN 1 Syringe Motor home Run an Autoclean
DRAIN 1 syringe motor failure
DRAIN 1 syringe mechanism not DRAIN 1 Syringe Motor Run an Autoclean
DRAIN 2 Syringe Motor home Run an Autoclean
DRAIN 2 syringe motor failure
DRAIN 2 syringe mechanism not DRAIN 2 Syringe Motor Run an Autoclean
Drain sensor [sensor number (1, 2
Drain Sensor Run an Autoclean
or 3)] time out
Injection Syringe Motor home Run an Autoclean
Injection syringe motor failure
Injection syringe mechanism not Injection Syringe Motor Run an Autoclean
LMNE transfer sensor time out LMNE transfer sensor Run an Autoclean
Needle Motor home switch always Run an Autoclean
Needle motor failure
detected Check motor in Service Menu
Needle mechanism not reaching Needle Motor Mechanism Run an Autoclean
Run an Autoclean
Piercing UP or DOWN bad position Piercing Syringe Motor
Check motor in Service Menu
Reagent temperature out of range.
Reagent Temperature Run an initialization
Value Min. & Max.
Reagent Temperature sensor not
Reagent Temperature sensor Run an initialization
connected
Reagent Temperature sensor
Reagent Temperature sensor Run an initialization
failure
Sampling Syringe Motor home Run an Autoclean
Sampling syringe motor failure
Sampling syringe mechanism not Sampling Syringe Motor Run an Autoclean
Thermostated Compartment
Temperature sensor not Run an initialization
Temperature
connected
Thermostated Compartment Thermostated Compartment
Run an initialization
Temperature sensor failure Temperature
Technical Manual
Alarms & Errors
Transfer error messages
Alarms Error type Help message

temperature out of range. Value Run an initialization
Temperature
Min. & Max.
The LMNE optical bench lamp is
Lamp voltage is out of order Replace the lamp
defective
Optical bench temperature sensor Optical bench temperature (Pentra
not connected XLR only)
Optical bench temperature sensor Optical bench temperature (Pentra
failure XLR only)
2. Transfer error messages

Alarm Error type Help message
Loading motor mechanism not Sampler Loading Motor Run an initialization
Sampler Loading Motor home Run an initialization
Loading motor failure
Stop rack loading switch not Run an initialization
Sampler Loading Motor
Stop rack loading switch detected Sampler Loading Motor
Check motor in Service Menu
Sampler Transfer mechanism not Sampler Transfer Motor Run an initialization
Sampler Transfer Motor home Run an initialization
Sampler Transfer motor failure
sensor always detected Check motor in Service Menu
Stop rack Transfer switch not Sampler Transfer Motor End Run an initialization
detected transfer rack switch not detected Check switch in Service Menu
Sampler Transfer Motor End
Stop rack Transfer switch detected transfer rack switch always
Check switch in Service Menu
detected
Mixer mechanism not reaching Mixer Motor Mechanism Run an initialization
Mixer Motor home sensor always Run an initialization
Mixer motor failure
Mixer Motor Grabers sensor Run an initialization
Mixer Bad grabber position
position not detected Check motor in Service Menu
Rack in the wrong side in loading Set rack in the right side position
Rack in wrong side position
area and restart automatic cycle
No rack No Rack in loading area No message
Unload racks and restart automatic
Unloading area full Unloading area full
cycle
Run an initialization.
Open left front cover and remove
Tube too high. tube may not be
Tube too high in rack rack from loading area.
correctly inserted in rack
Close left front cover and restart
automatic cycle
Bad rack transfer movement (left) Movement control Run an initialization
Technical Manual
Alarms & Errors
STAT mode error messages

Bad rack transfer movement (right) Movement control Run an initialization
Undesirable Rack Movement
Movement control Run an initialization
Detected
Close front covers
Front cover open Front cover open
3. STAT mode error messages

Tube holder mechanism failure Door not open No message
4. Environment error messages

%d Incoherent(s) Result(s) for %s Incoherent Results Run an initialization
Communication With Analyzer Cut
System Run an initialization
Off
Communication With Analyzer
System Run an initialization
Failed
End Sampler Transfer Sensor Error Sensor state Run an initialization
Error on raw results sending Result failed Run an initialization
Holder Sensor 1 in Wrong Position Sensor state Run an initialization
Loader Left Sensor Error Sensor state Run an initialization
Loader Right Sensor Error Sensor state Run an initialization
Lower Piercing Sensor in Wrong
Sensor state Run an initialization
Position
Mismatch Between the First and
Second Barcode Tube Read on Barcode Run an initialization
Rack %d Pos. %d
Incorrect level of diluent into Check diluent level and run a prime
No diluent in analyzer reservoir
reservoir diluent cycle
Printer alarm Printer problem Check printer
Printer module closed Software No message
Ckeck Quality Control data in QC
QC Failed QC Failed
screen
Rack Moving Left Sensor Error Sensor state Run an initialization
Rack Moving Right Sensor Error Sensor state Run an initialization
Rack not identified No read of Rack Barcode Label Check barcode label
Technical Manual
Alarms & Errors
User error messages

Reagent level too low for daily
Out of Reagent Check reagent
workload
Reagent level too low to run a Check reagent and restart
Out of Reagent
analasys automatic cycle
Check reagent and restart
Reagent level too low to run a rack Out of Reagent
automatic cycle
Result not stored Software Run an autoclean
RS232 alarm RS232 external problem Check host connection
Sample ID %d already in progress Software No message
LIS communication module closed Software No message
Tube Detection Sensor in Wrong
Position
Tube Detection Sensor in Wrong
Position
Two racks with same ID %d in
Barcode No message
transfer rail
Unable to launch print module Software No message
Unable to launch SIL
Software No message
communication module
Unloader Sensor in Wrong
Position
Upper Piercing Sensor in Wrong
Position
Empty waste container and restart
Waste container full Waste Container Full
automatic cycle
XB failed XB failed Ckeck XB in XB screen
5. User error messages

Instrument stopped by user Instrument stopped by user Run an AutoClean
Instrument stopped by user at the Instrument stopped by user at the
end of analysis end of analysis
Instrument stopped by user at the Instrument stopped by user at the
end of rack end of rack
6. Expiration date error messages

Change reagent and restart
Reagent(s) %s expired Reagent expired
automatic cycle
Check QC epiration date and use
QC Lot Nb\Barcode %s expirated Control blood expired
another QC Lot
Technical Manual
Alarms & Errors
Analyzer internal error types messages
7. Analyzer internal error types messages

Com error on slave %d Communication error with slave Run an initialization
Error management failed Unknown cycle Run an initialization
Error on cycle %d Run an initialization
Error on start internal chrono. Run an initialization
HGB Blank Error Management Hgb blank cycle incorrect Run an Autoclean
Home Motor %d error Run an initialization
Incorrect pos.motor carriage (%d)
Carriage motor bad position Run an initialization
Min : %d Max : %d
Incorrect pos.motor counting (%d)
Min : %d Max : %d (Incorrect
Pressure motor bad position Run an initialization
pos.motor PRESSURE (%d) Min :
%d Max : %d)
Incorrect pos.motor diluter (%d)
Diluter motor bad position Run an initialization
Min : %d Max : %d
Incorrect pos.motor drain 1 (%d)
Min : %d Max : %d) (Incorrect
Flush motor bad position Run an initialization
pos.motor FLUSH (%d) Min : %d
Max : %d)
Incorrect pos.motor drain 2 (%d)
DRAINING_2 motor bad position Run an initialization
Min : %d Max : %d
Incorrect pos.motor injector (%d)
Injector motor bad position Run an initialization
Min : %d Max : %d
Incorrect pos.motor loading (%d)
Loader motor bad position Run an initialization
Min : %d Max : %d
Incorrect pos.motor mixer (%d)
Mixer motor bad position Run an initialization
Min : %d Max : %d
Incorrect pos.motor needle (%d)
Needle motor bad position Run an initialization
Min : %d Max : %d
Incorrect pos.motor sampling
Sampling motor bad position Run an initialization
(%d) Min : %d Max : %d
Incorrect pos.motor tranfer (%d)
Translation motor bad position Run an initialization
Min : %d Max : %d
Barcode internal connection
Internal Barcode Error Run an initialization
problem
System stop due to
Internal synchronization failed Run an Autoclean
synchronization problem
Motor %d is busy Run an initialization
Run a new cycle while analyzer is
Analyzer already in cycle Run an Autoclean
busy
Valve already activated Run an initialization
Technical Manual
Maintenance
07 - Maintenance
1. Maintenance .................................................................................................................. 2
2. Prevention against the electrostatic discharges ....................................................... 3
3. Maintenance tables and kits ........................................................................................ 6
4. Maintenance kits ........................................................................................................... 7
5. Maintenance procedures ............................................................................................. 9

Technical Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance
1. Maintenance
1.1. Introduction
Instrument maintenance by the customer has to be carried out according to the

recommended frequency table and after having attended a HORIBA MEDICAL approved
customer training course.
The system warranty may be affected if damage occurs after a non trained technician
intervenes or if replaced spare parts and consumables are not of a HORIBA MEDICAL
approved origin.
1.2. Daily customer maintenance
No special adjustment or maintenance has to be done on your equipment if the recommended startup
and shutdown procedures are explicitly respected.
Refer to the user manual for more details on the daily rinsing and cleaning of the system.
1.3. Weekly customer maintenance
An overall check for cleanliness of the system is recommended every week.

Any traces of blood or reagent have to be wiped off as soon as possible using a soft cloth and distilled
water.
Never use solvents or abrasive cleaning material to clean the system.
Technical Manual
Maintenance
Prevention against the electrostatic discharges
2. Prevention against the electrostatic

discharges
■ The electronic boards are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges.
■ The damages are not always immediately visible, but can appear in time.
In order to prevent those risks, the use of an antistatic kit is MANDATORY.
2.1. The antistatic kit: MZZ015A (1207921015)
■ An antistatic ground mat is one of a number of antistatic devices designed to help eliminate static
electricity. It has a conductive material embedded within the mat which collects the static. The mat
would need to be grounded (earthed). This is usually accomplished by plugging it into the grounded
line in an electrical outlet. It is important to discharge at a slow rate, therefore a resistor should be used
in earthing the mat. This ground mat allows you to connect an antistatic wrist strap.
■ The antistatic kit is composed of:
- An antistatic mat with 2 female snaps:
Technical Manual
Maintenance
- A wrist strap:
- A ground cord (for the wrist strap):
- A crocodile clip:
- A second ground cord (for the crocodile

clip)
Technical Manual
Maintenance
2.2. How to use the antistatic kit
■ Connect the second ground cord to a snap

of the antistatic mat and install the crocodile
clip on its other end.
■ Connect the crocodile clip to the earth

outlet.
■ Install
the wrist strap on the first ground
cord and connect the first ground cord to
the second snap of the antistatic mat.
■ Put the bracelet around your wrist.
■ The antistatic kit is ready for use:
To ensure a good contact, ensure that the wrist strap is correctly tightened around your wrist.
Technical Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tables and kits
3. Maintenance tables and kits
3.1. Maintenance table
The instrument maintenance is divided into three different maintenance kits. The maintenance schedule depends on the
number of cycles per day. Follow the table to know the part number of the kits that need to be used.
Cycles per day <30 30 to 120 >120

Maintenance each 1 y. 2 y. 6 m. 1 y. 18 m. 2 y. 6 m. 1 y.
XEC236AS (1219179236): Procedure: RAS325
Needle O-ring + Rinsing block parts X X X X X X X X
Reagent syringe O-ring X X X X X X X X
Draining and Counting syringes O-rings X X X X X X X X
Cycles per day <30 30 to 120 >120

Maintenance each 1 y. 2 y. 6 m. 1 y. 18 m. 2 y. 6 m. 1 y.
XEA486FS (1209159486): Procedure: RAS326
Sampling syringe X X X X X X
5DIFF syringe X X X X X X
Draining syringe X X X X X X
Optical bench lamp X X X X X X
Diluent tank joint X X X X X X
Counting heads coaxial cables O-rings X X X X X X
Counting heads aperture O-rings X X X X X X
XEC282AS (1209179282) / XEC196BS (1209178196): Procedure: RAS327
Piercing needle replacement X X X
Reagent pistons replacement X X X
Counting and draining syringe pistons
X X X
replacement
LMNE/RET flowcell coaxial replacement X X X
Technical Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance kits
4. Maintenance kits
4.1. 6 month maintenance kit
XEC236AS (1219179236)
P/N Designation Qty

FAA013A (1202401013) O-ring 1.80x1.20 Nitrile (Rinsing block) 1
FAA055A (1202401055) O-ring 1.07x1.27 Fluocarbon (Rinsing block) 1
FAA057A (1202401057) O-ring 5x1 Nitrile (Rinsing block) 1
FAA073A (1202401073) O-ring 4.65x2.62 Silicon (Reagent syringe) 1
XDA621A (1209131621) O-ring 30.80x3.60 + washer (counting + draining syringe 1 & 2) 3
XDA622A (1209131622) O-ring 15.54x2.62 + washer (Reagent syringe) 4
XEA019A (1209151019) Silicon grease 1
GBG292A (1203201292) Piercing needle rinsing block 1
GBG296A (1203201296) Needle guide 1
GBG297A (1203201297) Needle rinsing block 1
4.2. Yearly maintenance kit
XEA486FS (1209159486)
P/N Designation Qty

DAJ007A (1201941007) Optical bench lamp 1
FAA040A (1202401040) O-ring 12.1x2.7 5DIFF syringe 1
FAA046A (1202401046) O-ring 2.75x1.6 Coaxial cable 2
FAA064A (1202401064) O-ring 14.2x1.52 Sampling syringe 2
FAA066A (1202401066) O-ring 13.1x1.6 Draining chambers 4
FAA067A (1202401067) O-ring 2.4x1.9 5DIFF syringe 4
GBG275A (1203201275) Counting head 0.5 joint 4
XEA286AS (1209159286) Waste chamber washer + joint 1
JAJ007A (1207301007) Polyeth. Tape 1.5 m
GBL0073 (1203500073) Jaws springs 2
KAL017A (1207521017) Pin 3x12 4
Technical Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance kits
4.3. 2 year maintenance kits
ABX Pentra 80/ABX Pentra XL80: XEC282AS (1209179282)
P/N Designation Qty

XBA399C (1209113399) Coax LMNE flowcell P60/P80 1
GBC030A (1202801030) Reagent syringe Piston 4
GBG260A (1203201260) Piston D=31 Spacer 3
GBG274A (1203201274) Piston D=31 3
KAA010A (1207401010) CHC M3x25 Screws 9
KAJ039A (1207511039) M3 inox washer 9
GBL0651 (1203500651) Percutor 1
Pentra XLR: XEC196BS (1209178196)
P/N Designation Qty

XBA843A (1209111843) Coax CIS optical flowcell PXL Ret. 1
GBG274A (1203201274) Piston D=31 3
GBL0651 (1203500651) Percutor 1
Technical Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance procedures
5. Maintenance procedures
Maintenance and adjustments required for this instrument are divided into procedures
according to the concerned assemblies. This should make any update easier as all
interventions can be done with the corresponding procedure on its own.
Each procedure has to be read entirely before starting intervention.
Procedures must be performed on a clean instrument.

If the instrument is suspected not to be perfectly clean, perform a concentrated cleaning
procedure.
Disposable gloves should be worn.
5.1. Required tools and products
Tools/Product Designation P/n

RBC/PLT Latex 1300019538
Silicon grease LAM004A (1207681004)
Vactra oil 100 mL XEA821A (1209151821)
Distilled water
Ethanol or essence C
Liquid soap
Voltmeter MAM001AS (1207899001)
Thermometer MAM009AS (1207899009)
Barflex
Clamps
Cutting pliers
Dynamometric screwdriver A300 XEA585AS (1209159585)
Flat screwdriver
Cruciform screwdriver
Hexagonal keys
Torx keys
Gauge set MAJ004A (1207881004)
Pair of scisors
Scalpel
Felt pen
Syringe 5 mL
Empty sample tubes
Micropipette tip
Soft tissue
Technical Manual
Maintenance
5.2. Procedure list
P/n and tittle Concerns

Unpacking - Working conditions - Instrument installation
- First start of the instrument
Rinsing block - Reagent syringe - Draining syringe 1&2 -
Counting syringe - Filter
Sampling syringe O-ring - 5DIFF syringe O-ring - Draining
RAS326E: Yearly maintenance chambers O-ring - Optical bench lamp - Diluent reservoir
- Counting chambers
Sampling needle & guide replacement - Draining syringe
RAS327F: 2 year maintenance 1&2 - Counting syringe - Reagent syringe - Optical bench
coax
RAS328D: Decontamination & rinse Instrument decontamination & Rinse
RAS329D: Chambers adjustment Chambers assembly position check & adjustment
RAS330E: Needle adjustment Check & adjustment of the MDSS
Hgb blank adjustment - RBC/Plt gain adjustment - WBC/
RAS331E: Mother Board Adjustment (ABX
Baso gain adjustment - Drain sensors adjustment - Motor
Pentra 80 / ABX Pentra XL80)
current adjustment - Thresholds adjustment
RAS332D: Motor board adjustment Motor board currents check & adjustment
Reagent heating coil & thermostatic compartment
temperature adjustment
Draining syringe vacuum check - Counting syringe
vacuum check - Counting syringe vacuum adjustment
RAS335D: Bubbling adjustment Bubbling adjustment
RAS336F: LMNE flowcell adjustment (ABX
LMNE flowcell position adjustment
RAS337D: LMNE balance adjustment (ABX
LMNE balance calibration & forced calibration
Tube holder assembly replacement - Tube holder
adjustments - Needle adjustment - Compatible tube list
RAS339D: Power supply replacement Dismantling & replacement of the power supply
Check up & control of instrument accuracy: Reapetability,
Calibration, Control
RAS341E: Optical bench dismantling &
Optical bench dismantling, replacement & control
replacement
RAS342D: Front panel & covers dismantling Dismantling of all instrument’s panels & covers
RAS343D: Internal barcode reader
Adjustment of internal barcode
adjustment
RAS344G: External barcode reader
Adjustment of external barcode
configuration
RAS345D: Heater assy replacement Replacement of the reagent heating system
RAS346D: Mixer replacement Replacement of the mixer
Loading mechanism check & adjustment - Mixer
RAS347D: Automatic sampler adjustment mechanism check & adjustment - Transfer mechanism
check & adjustment
RAS348D: Internal PC replacement Replacement of the computer
RAS349D: PC Hard Disk replacement Replacement of computer hard disk
Technical Manual
Maintenance

RAS351D: PC floppy disk reader
Replacement of the computer’s floppy disk drive
replacement
RAS352D: PC CD-ROM drive replacement Replacement of the computer’s CD-ROM drive
RAS353D: PC touch screen replacement Replacement of the computer’s touch screen
RAS354F: Instrument mother board
Replacement of the instrument’s main board
replacement
RAS355D: Motor board replacement Replacement of the motor board
RAS356F: Sensors check & adjustment Check & adjustment of the instrument’s switches
RAS357E: Save and restore settings Save & restore analyser & workstation settings
RAS514B: Mixer assembly spring
Replacement of the mixer springs
replacement
RAS516B: Takasago valve assembly
Dismantling of the Takasago valve assembly
dismantling
RAS519B: Rack needle height adjustment Adjustment of the rack needle height
Retic optical bench replacement - Flowcell replacement -
RAS735D: RET optical bench (Pentra XLR) Replacement of the APD board - Replacement of the
amplifier board - Retic optical bench adjustment
RAS736C: Hub board replacement Replacement of the hub board
Installation of the software version - Update of the
software version
5.3. Training department procedure list

Unpacking - Working conditions - Instrument installation
- First start of the instrument
RAS342D: Front panel & covers
Dismantling of all instrument’s panels & covers
dismantling
Rinsing block - Reagent syringe - Draining syringe 1&2 -
Counting syringe - Filter
Sampling syringe O-ring - 5DIFF syringe O-ring -
RAS326E: Yearly maintenance Draining chambers O-ring - Optical bench lamp - Diluent
reservoir - Counting chambers
Sampling needle & guide replacement - Draining syringe
RAS327F: 2 year maintenance 1&2 - Counting syringe - Reagent syringe- Optical
bench coax
Draining syringe vacuum check - Counting syringe
vacuum check - Counting syringe vacuum adjustment
RAS335D: Bubbling adjustment Bubbling adjustment
Reagent heating coil & thermostatic compartment
temperature adjustment
RAS329D: Chambers adjustment Chambers assembly position check & adjustment
RAS330E: Needle adjustment Check & adjustment of the MDSS
Hgb blank adjustment - RBC/Plt gain adjustment -
WBC/Baso gain adjustment - Drain sensors adjustment
(ABX Pentra 80 / ABX Pentra XL80)
- Motor current adjustment - Thresholds adjustment
Technical Manual
Maintenance

LMNE flowcell position adjustment
LMNE balance calibration & forced calibration
Retic optical bench replacement - Flowcell replacement
RAS735D: RET optical bench (Pentra
- Replacement of the APD board - Replacement of the
XLR)
amplifier board - Retic optical bench adjustment
RAS346D: Mixer replacement Replacement of the mixer
RAS514B: Mixer assembly spring
Replacement of the mixer springs
replacement
Loading mechanism check & adjustment - Mixer
RAS347D: Automatic sampler adjustment mechanism check & adjustment - Transfer mechanism
check & adjustment
RAS356F: Sensors check & adjustment Check & adjustment of the instrument’s switches
RAS343D: Internal barcode reader
Adjustment of internal barcode
adjustment
Tube holder assembly replacement - Tube holder
adjustments - Needle adjustment - Compatible tube list
RAS355D: Motor board replacement Motor board currents check & adjustment
RAS736C: Hub board replacement Replacement of the hub board
RAS348D: Internal PC replacement Replacement of the computer
RAS349D: PC Hard Disk replacement Replacement of computer’s hard disk
RAS351D: PC floppy disk reader
Replacement of the computer’s floppy disk drive
replacement
RAS352D: PC CD-ROM drive
Replacement of the computer’s CD-ROM drive
replacement
RAS353D: PC touch screen replacement Replacement of the computer’s touch screen
RAS357E: Save and restore settings Save & restore analyser & workstation settings
RAS339D: Power supply replacement Dismantling & replacement of the power supply
RAS341E: Optical bench dismantling &
Optical bench dismantling, replacement & control
replacement
RAS344G: External barcode reader
Adjustment of external barcode
configuration
RAS345D: Heater assy replacement Replacement of the reagent heating system
RAS354F: Instrument mother board
Replacement of the instrument’s main board
replacement
Check up & control of instrument accuracy:
Reapetability, Calibration, Control
RAS328D: Decontamination & rinse Instrument decontamination & Rinse
RAS516B: Takasago valve assembly
Dismantling of the Takasago valve assembly
dismantling
Installation of the software version - Update of the
software version
Technical Manual
RAS324G
Installation
■ Concerns
■ Working conditions
■ Instrument installation
■ First start of the instrument
■ Required tools
■ None
■ Required products
■ None
■ Intervention time
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request
■ Specific kit or consumables

■ Installation kit: XEA785F (1209156785)
Disposable gloves, eye protection and lab coat

must be worn by the operator.
Local or national regulations must be applied in all
the operations.
Installation
1. Instrument Installation
1.1. Unpacking
■ Unpack the instrument carefully.

■ After unpacking check that all of the parts from the package list are present.
Package list
Part Number Qty Designation

XEA785F (1209156785) 1 Installation kit Pentra 80
XBA453D (1209114453) 1 Barcode reader
GBD072A (1202901072) 4 Lifting handles
GBL0280 (1203500280) 10 Rack 10 vials 13x82
CBK044A 1 Computer Mouse
GBL0250 (1203500250) 1 Keyboard drawer
7005056 (1210000293) 1 Cardboard Box
7001020 1 20 L container with LAU015A sticker
HAN524A 1 Mouse pad (only for Pentra XL80)
Installation kit XEA785F (1209156785)

DBE027A (1202101027) 2 Wire guide
DBH001A (1202121001) 3 Tyrap LA=2.4 L=92
DBH002A (1202121002) 3 Tyrap LA=3.6 L=140
DBK003A (1202141003) 1 Flat cable adhesive support
DBK009A (1202141009) 1 Adhesive support D=9 mm
EAB021A (1202211021) 1 "Y" connector Diam.=3 mm
EAB026A (1202211026) 1 "Y" connector Diam.=2.5 mm
EAB033A (1202211033) 1 "T" connector ø1.6 mm T410-6
EAB035A (1202211035) 1 "T" connector ø2.3 mm T220-6
EAC010A (1202221010) 2 Female luer connector I=3
EAC019A (1202221019) 1 Male luer connector I=3
EAE005A (1202241005) 2m Tygon tube ø1.02 mm (0.040’’)
EAE028A (1202241028) 2m Cristal tube 4x6
EAE034A (1202241034 ) 2m Tygon tube ø2.54 mm (0.100’’)
EBB059AS (1202369059) 1 Filter support Swinnex 25 mm
FAA013A (1202401013) 1 O-ring 1.8x1.2
FAA055A (1202401055) 1 O-ring 1.07x1.27 fluocarbon
FAA057A (1202401057) 1 O-ring 5x1
Technical Manual
RAS324G - 2 RAA022
Installation

FBH018A (1202581018) 1 Housse Pentra 80
FBL001A (1202591001) 1 Rubber cap 2 holes
GAK302A (1202711302) 4 Bottle cap
GBG282A (1203201282) 1 Key for cover
GBG145A (1203201145) 3 Reagent straw stopper ø20
GBG155A (1203201155) 1 Capsule ø25
JAA011A (1207241011) 1 Box 33x25x08
GBG245A (1203201245) 3 Reagent straw stopper ø28
MAB002A (1207821002) 1 Hexagonal bent key 2.5 mm
MAB003A (1207821003) 1 Hexagonal bent key 1.5 mm
MAB018A (1207821018) 1 Hexagonal bent key 3 mm
MAB090A (1207821090) 1 Torx bent key T10
XDB136A (1209141136) 1 3V liquid valve (without coil)
XDA621A (1209131621) 1 O-ring 30.8x3.8 + Washer
XDB199A (1209141199) 1 Diluent input tubing P60
XEA018A (1209151018) 1 Diluent straw Lg=360 mm
XEA019A (1209151019) 1 Grease
XBA322D (1209114322) 1 Waste straw
HAX0246 (1207230246) 1 Rack label Type A - 1 to 20
HAX0247 (1207230247) 1 Rack label Type B - 1 to 20
DAJ007A (1201941007) 1 Lamp 20 W 9.5 V
MAB001A (1207821001) 1 Hexagonal bent key 2 mm
HAN516C (1207043516) 2 Touch screen pen
1.2. Transport and installation
■ Install
the instrument lifting handles in the
appropriate location.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS324G - 3
Installation
Make sure that the lifting handles are correctly secured.
■ Lift the instrument using the four handles up on to the installation bench.
■ Open the thermic panel (righthand side of the instrument).
■ Remove the plastic rails retaining the carriage.
■ Remove the left panel door then the upper cover to access the optical bench.
For ABX Pentra 80 / ABX Pentra XL80

■ For transportation, the optical bench is fixed on
the frame with holding plates. They have to be
removed before starting the instrument and fixed
as shown on the diagram (ABX Pentra 80 and
ABX Pentra XL80).
Technical Manual
RAS324G - 4 RAA022
Installation
For Pentra XLR

■ For transportation, the optical bench is blocked
by a foam protection. Remove the foam
protection before starting the instrument.
■ Be careful not to damage the wirings when
removing the foam.
1.3. Electrical & Computer connections
■ Check that the power supply module voltage of the instrument corresponds to the nominal voltage supply of
the laboratory and the country.
■ Connect the power supply cable.
■ Connect the printer.
Connections until the CCC039A (1201841039)
computer reference

2 - Printer connection
3 - Ethernet connection (classified as Safety
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS324G - 5
Installation
Connections since the 1300013733 computer

reference

2 - Ethernet connection ((classified as Safety
3- 4 USB connections
Power requirements:
- Analyzer: 250 W
- Laser printer: 350 W
If the printer is connected with a cable that was not supplied by HORIBA Medical, make sure this
cable is shielded.
Technical Manual
RAS324G - 6 RAA022
Installation
Keyboard
Mouse
■ Connectthe computer’s devices: mouse, Front

keyboard, barcode reader.
In the case of a USB mouse or a USB keyboard,

connection should be made at the back of the
instrument.
Note that the picture indicates the connections

since the 1300022569 PC assembly. 1- Power 2 - COM 2 (laboratory link)
3 - COM 1 (to motherboard) 4 - 4 USB boards
5 - LAN
1- USB port
■ Route the computer’s wiring under the frame of

the ABX Pentra 80.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS324G - 7
Installation
A ferrit has been installed in factory on the network wire (2 turns) close to the connector on the
ABX Pentra XL80 and the Pentra XLR.
■ Install a common ferrit DZZ039A (1202191039)

on the keyboard and mouse wires (2 turns). This
ferrit is included in the box with the mouse.
This is not necessary for USB mouses and USB

keyboards.
1.4. Reagents installation
■ Use the "Luer" connectors, straws and stoppers supplied within the installation kit to connect integrated
reagents, diluent and wastes.
Technical Manual
RAS324G - 8 RAA022
Installation
1 2
■ Bottles and container locations:
1 - ABX Cleaner
2 - ABX Basolyse II
3 4 5
3 - ABX Eosinofix
4 - ABX Lysebio
5 - ABX Fluocyte (Pentra XLR only)
6 - Waste container
7 - ABX Diluent
6 7
Risk of erroneous results if the diluent container is installed more than 80 cm (31.5 in.) below the
instrument.
Diluent input tubing: Cristal 3.2 x 6.4 / 2 meters (80 in.) maximum
Waste output tubing: Cristal 4x6 / 2 meters (80 in.) maximum
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS324G - 9
Installation
2. First start of the instrument

■ Start the instrument (the ON/OFF Switch is located on the right-hand side of the instrument).
■ Wait for the computer’s initialization. When the login window is displayed: Log in as "administrator", password
"XXXXX" (Be careful as to what type of keyboard is used: Qwerty or Azerty).
■ When the instrument is started, it initializes its mechanical components. Wait until the end of the initialization.
2.1. Racks
The racks are identified by means of barcode labels. Prepare two or three racks to use during the installation.
These labels have to be placed on the racks as follows:
Barcode of rack Type of rack

(Number & Type)
■ Front side:
■ Rear side:
Please refer to RAS519B: Rack needle height adjustment to check.
2.2. Check the keyboard setup
■ Check the type of the keyboard used (Qwerty or Azerty). From "Settings > System > Local Settings", press
"Edit" and then press "Change Input Locales" (ABX Pentra 80) or "Keyboard Settings" (ABX Pentra XL80
and Pentra XLR).
Technical Manual
RAS324G - 10 RAA022
Installation
2.3. Check Date/Time
■ Check and adjust (if necessary) the date and time. From "Settings > System > Local Settings", press "Edit"
and then press "Change Date / Time".
■ Adjust Date & Time then press Validate to save changes.
2.4. Check the printer configuration
■ Check that the printer used by the system is correctly defined.

■ Go to "Settings > System > Printer", press "Edit" and then press "Printer Properties".
■ Check the name of the printer used in the "Name" field of the "Print" window. If necessary, select the
appropriate printer and then press "Validate".
■ Set the paper size according to the used paper sheets (default is Letter 8.5’’ X 11’’).
2.5. Prime reagents
■ Prime reagents using the barcode reader to enter the lot number and to update the expiry date automatically.
Go to the "Status" menu to do so.
■ Run a priming cycle of all reagents to be sure that they all are correctly primed by going to "Service >
Super User Menu > Hydraulic System > Prime cycles" and pressing "ALL REAGENTS".
2.6. Mechanical check
■ Make sure that all the panels are fitted on the instrument.
■ Go to "Service > Super User Menu > Mechanical System > Check Sensors" and make sure that all the
sensors are green.
■ Check that the racks are properly transfered to the reception tray from "Service > Technician Menu > Gains
> Sampler adjust", and then press "Check Rack Transfer Moving".
■ Check that the MDSS is correctly adjusted from

"Service > Technician Menu > Gains >
M.D.S.S. Adjustment" and press "Check
Needle Position". The needle must look similar
to the image when you look at it through the
chamber inlets:
■ Close the thermal door (righthand side of the instrument)

■ Check the HGB blank value from "Service > Technician Menu > Measurement > Gain Adjustment", press
"HGB Blank Adjustment". If necessary, adjust the HGB blank voltage to 4.7 V ± 0.02 V between ground and
TP1 with the R248 potentiometer on the main board.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS324G - 11
Installation
2.7. Startup
■ Run a Startup cycle.

■ Run a Startup RET cycle (Pentra XLR only).
2.8. Check up after intervention
■ Perform the "Check up after intervention" procedure (Refer to RAS340D: Check up after intervention).
2.9. Configuration save and print
■ After
the installation is completed, save (either on the floppy disk provided with the system or on a USB key)
and print the instrument configuration by following procedure RAS357E: Save and restore settings.
2.10. Children type activation
This step has to be performed on ABX Pentra XL80 and Pentra XLR from software version V2.2.0.
■ Go to Services > Technician Adjustments > Others > Blank Values / Type.
■ Select or deselect Child type management depending on the client’s needs.

■ Press Accept Values.
2.11. Online help
■ Verify
that the online help is installed on the instrument in the appropriate language. If not, install it using the
"Documentation CD-ROM" supplied with the instrument.
Technical Manual
RAS324G - 12 RAA022
RAS325F
6 month maintenance
■ Concerns
■ Rinsing block
■ Reagent syringe
■ Draining syringe 1
■ Draining syringe 2
■ Counting syringe
■ Instrument & Filter cleaning
■ Axis lubricating
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Dynamometric screwdrivers A302, A301, A300
■ Cutting pliers
■ Flat screwdriver
■ Cruciform screwdrivers
■ Torx keys
■ ABX Minoclair
■ Ethanolor essence C
■ XEA821A (1209151821): Vactra oil 100 mL
■2 hours
■ Frequency
■ See maintenance table

■6 month maintenance kit: XEC236AS (1219179236)

the operations.
6 month maintenance
6 Month maintenance kit

XEC236AS (1219179236)
P/N Designation Qty

FAA013A (1202401013) O-ring 1.80x1.20 Nitrile (Rinsing block) 1
FAA055A (1202401055) O-ring 1.07x1.27 Fluocarbon (Rinsing block) 1
FAA057A (1202401057) O-ring 5x1 Nitrile (Rinsing block) 1
FAA073A (1202401073) O-ring 4.65x2.62 Silicon (Reagent syringe) 1
XDA621A (1209131621) O-ring 30.80x3.60 + washer (counting + draining syringe 1 & 2) 3
XDA622A (1209131622) O-ring 15.54x2.62 + washer (Reagent syringe) 4
XEA019A (1209151019) Silicon grease 1
GBG292A (1203201292) Piercing needle rinsing block 1
GBG296A (1203201296) Needle guide 1
GBG297A (1203201297) Needle rinsing block 1
This procedure must be performed on a clean instrument.

Please refer to the "RAS328D: Decontamination & rinse" procedure before starting this procedure.
Technical Manual
RAS325F - 2 RAA022
6 month maintenance
1. Rinsing block
O-ring replacement
1 x FAA013A (1202401013), 1 x FAA055A (1202401055), 1 x FAA057A (1202401057), 1 x GBG296A
(1203201296), 1 x GBG297A (1203201297), 1 x GBG292A (1203201292)
■ Switchthe instrument off and disconnect the

power supply cable.
■ Open the right-hand side door.
■ Move the carriage to access the rinsing block.
■ Remove the 2 rinsing block screws and lift the
locker to free the needle and remove the rinsing
block.
GBG296A
FAA055A (1203201296)
(1202401055)
GBG297A
(1203201297)
■ Use a small amount of silicon grease on the

FAA057A (1202401057) o-ring, and replace the FAA013A
O-rings on the rinsing block. (1202401013)
■ Reassemble in reverse order.
GBG292A
(1203201292)
FAA057A
(1202401057)
Use a dynamometric screwdriver to tighten the syringe:

Tightenning torques: 120 mN.m / 17 Ozf.in
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS325F - 3
6 month maintenance
2. Reagent syringes
O-ring replacement
1 x FAA073A (1202401073) & 4 x XDA622A (1209131622)
■ Switch the instrument off, disconnect the

power supply cable and remove the covers
(Refer to RAS342D: Front panel & covers
dismantling).
■ Disconnect the following tubes:
- valve 7 inlet 3,
- valve 8 inlet 3,
- valve 9 inlet 3,
- valve 10 inlet 3,
- valve 12 inlet 3.
■ Unscrew the 2 fixation screws and carefully
remove the reagent syringes.
■ Push the piston several times over the waste
container to drain the syringes.
1
■ On a piece of absorbant paper open the
reagents syringe (9 x CHC M3x12 screws, 2 x
FX M3x12 screws).
2
■ Replaceall O-rings and washers with the new
ones supplied in the 6 month maintenance kit.
■ Use one drop of silicon grease between two
fingers to lubricate the O-rings.
■ Reassemble in reverse order:
8
- 1 - Reagent syringe body GBG033A
(1203201033) 3
- 2 - XDA622A (1209131622) x4
- 3 - Piston GBC030A (1202801030) x4
- 4 - FX M3x12 screws x2
- 5 - CHC M3x12 screws x9
- 6 - Reagent syringe bottom plate 7
- 7 - Hgb lyse reagent piston GBC031A
(1202801031) 4
- 8 - O-ring FAA073A (1202401073) 6
Technical Manual
RAS325F - 4 RAA022
6 month maintenance
Use a dynamometric screwdriver to tighten the syringe.

Tightenning torques:
- 9 x CHC M3x12: 400 mN.m (56.8 Ozf.in)
- 2 x FX M3x12: 400 mN.m (56.8 Ozf.in)
The thickness of the washer matches each O-ring thickness:
XDA622A (1209131622) = O-ring FAA063A (1202401063) + Washer GBG149A (1203201149).
For this reason, keep the O-ring and the washer together.
The lyse piston O-ring (small one) has no washer.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS325F - 5
6 month maintenance
3. Draining & counting syringes
On Pentra XLR, the Draining syringe 2 and the counting syringe are located in a lower position, as
shown on the pictures below:
ABX Pentra 80 / ABX Pentra XL80 Pentra XLR
3.1. O-ring replacement on draining syringe 1
■ Switch the instrument off, disconnect the power supply cable then remove the covers (Refer to RAS342D:
Front panel & covers dismantling).
■ Disconnect the electrical connectors on the

syringe, then untighten the 4 CHC M4x16
syringe screws to release the silent blocks.
■ Put a piece of absorbant paper under the
syringe and disconnect all the tubes from the
syringe.
■ Remove the syringe.
■ Drain the syringe by pushing the piston up and down several times.
■ Open the syringe:
- 4 x CHC M4x16 screws on the old model
- Rotation of the syringe body on the new model.
Technical Manual
RAS325F - 6 RAA022
6 month maintenance
Molded Syringe (New model) Machined Syringe (Old model)
Open
Close
■ Replace the O-ring with the new one supplied in 60 Vthe 6 month maintenance kit.
■ Use one drop of silicon grease between 2 fingers to lubricate the O-ring and the piston.
Molded Syringe Machined Syringe

(New model) (Old model)
1-Motor
assembly
2-O-ring
■ Make sure that the washer (4) is present on the (FAA017A) -
old model, then reassemble in reverse order.
3-Anti-extrusion
ring (GBG219A)
4-Washer
(GBG148A)
5-Syringe body
6-CHC M4x16
screws (x4)
The chamber body of the new syringe is directly screwed to the motor block. When the body is
reinstalled on the motor block, it has to be rotated until the mark on the body is located between the
two marks of the motor block.
O-ring FAA017A (1202401017) + Washer GBG148A (1203201148) = XDA621A (1209131621).
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS325F - 7
6 month maintenance
3.2. O’ ring replacement on draining syringe 2
■ Switch the instrument off, disconnect the power supply cable and remove the covers (Refer to RAS342D:

syringe, then untighten the 4 CHC M4x16
■ Follow the same procedure as for draining syringe 1 to replace the O-ring.
3.3. O-ring replacement on counting syringe
■ Switch the instrument off, disconnect the power supply cable and remove the covers (Refer to RAS342D:

syringe then untighten the 4 CHC M4x16
■ Follow the same procedure as for draining syringe 1 to replace the O-ring.
Technical Manual
RAS325F - 8 RAA022
6 month maintenance
4. Axes lubrication
Vertical carriage axes:

■ Clean the 2 axes with ethanol or essence C.
■ Apply a thin film of oil XEA821A (1209151821)
on the axes.
Horizontal carriage axes:

on the axes.
Rack transfer front/rear axes:

on the axes.
Rack transfer left/right axes:

■ Clean the axes with ethanol or essence C.
on the axes.
■ Place a drop of oil on the carriage finger and on

the rack translation mechanism.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS325F - 9
6 month maintenance
5. Instrument cleaning.
5.1. Concerned assemblies
■ Thermostated compartment
■ Outer surfaces of the instrument (perpex, covers, reagent locations, etc.)
■ Waste connector plug
■ Liquid valve push button
■ Assemblies close to the needle
■ Tube holder assembly
■ Overflow trays
5.2. Procedure
■ Dilute the 9° Cl bleach to 1 part of bleach for 4 parts of deionized water (1/5).
■ Instrument environment must be cleaned.
■ No sponge nor cloth must be used. Only use absorbant paper, and throw it away after use in contamination
bins. For small or sensitive assemblies, use delicate absorbant paper.
■ All assemblies suspected to have been in contact with biohazardous material must be disinfected with diluted
bleach (the stainless steel must be bleached below 30°C).
■ Blood stains or salt marks must be cleaned with spray detergent first.
5.3. Filter
■ Clean the pieces of cap rubber from the

filter under the Rinse chamber.
■ Reinstall all the assemblies and set the instrument back to its initial configuration.
Technical Manual
RAS325F - 10 RAA022
6 month maintenance
6. Check up after intervention

■ Before reassembling the covers, start the instrument and check that there is no leak.
■ Reassemble the covers then perform the "Check up after intervention" procedure (Refer to RAS340D: Check
up after intervention).
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS325F - 11
6 month maintenance
Technical Manual
RAS325F - 12 RAA022
RAS326E
Yearly maintenance
■ Concerns
■ Sampling syringe, 5DIFF syringe: O-ring

replacement
■ Draining chambers: O-ring replacement
■ Optical bench: Lamp replacement
■ Diluent reservoir
■ Counting chambers
■ Mixer assembly: spring replacement
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Dynamometric screwdriver A302, A301, A300
■ Cutting pliers
■ Cruciform screwdriver
■ Tork keys
■ ABX Minoclair
■ RBC/Plt Latex
■ Acetone
■2 hours
■ Frequency

■ Yearly maintenance kit: XEA486FS (ABX Pentra 80 /
ABX Pentra XL80)
■ 6 month maintenance kit: XEC236AS

the operations.
Yearly maintenance
1. Yearly maintenance kit XEA486FS
P/N Designation Qty

DAJ007A Optical bench lamp 1
FAA040A O-ring 12.1x2.7 5DIFF syringe 1
FAA046A O-ring 2.75x1.6 Coaxial cable 2
FAA064A O-ring 14.2x1.52 Sampling syringe 2
FAA066A O-ring 13.1x1.6 Draining chambers 4
FAA067A O-ring 2.4x1.9 5DIFF syringe 4
GBG275A Counting head 0.5 joint 4
XEA286AS Waste chamber washer + joint 1
JAJ007A Polyeth. Tape 1.5 m
GBL0073 Jaws springs 2
KAL017A Pin 3x12 4

Please follow the "RAS328D: Decontamination & rinse" procedure before starting this procedure.
Technical Manual
RAS326E - 2 RAA022
Yearly maintenance
2. Sampling syringe O-ring replacement

(2xFAA064A)
■ Switchthe instrument off, disconnect the

power supply cable and open the right-hand
side door.
■ Move the carriage to access the sampling
syringe.
■ Disconnect the tubes from the sampling
syringe and unscrew the 2 fixation screws.
■ Openthe syringe by unscrewing the 3 FX

M3x12 screws.
■ Replace both O-ring joints. Use one drop of
silicon grease between 2 fingers to lubricate the
O-rings.

Tightenning torques: 400 mN.m (56.8 Ozf.in)
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS326E - 3
Yearly maintenance
3. 5DIFF syringe O-ring replacement

(FAA040A & 4 x FAA067A)
■ Open the left-hand side panel to access the

5DIFF syringe.
■ Gentlydisconnect the tubes from the 5DIFF
syringe and unscrew the 2 fixation screws.
■ Open the syringe:

- 2 x FX M3x12
- 4 x CHC M3x12 screws
■ Replace all the O-rings. Use one drop of silicon
grease between 2 fingers to lubricate the O-
rings.

Tightenning torques: 400 mN.m (56.8 Ozf.in)
Technical Manual
RAS326E - 4 RAA022
Yearly maintenance
4. Optical bench lamp (DAJ007A) replacement

■ Please refer to RAS341E: Optical bench dismantling & replacement (ABX Pentra 80 / ABX Pentra XL80) or
RAS735D: RET optical bench (Pentra XLR).
5. Optical bench lamp 6.7 V voltage check

■ Run a "Rinse cytometer" cycle to get rid of any air bubbles that may be stuck to the inner optical surfaces
from "Service > Super User Menu > Hydraulic System > Clean Cycles > Rinse Cytometer".
■ Check that the flowcell contains no or very few air bubbles.
■ Go to "Service > Technician Menu > Measurement > LMNE Adjustment" and press "Run LMNE
Adjustment".
Mix the RBC/PLT latex thorougly.
■ Close the tube holder when the message "Please sample LATEX" appears.
■ Check that the LMNE lamp voltage is 6.7 V +/-0.8 V.

■ Check that the other values are within the acceptable range.
Optical bench adjustment target values
Parameter Target Range

LMNE Lamp 6.7 V 5.9 V to 7.5 V
LMNE Res. 50 45 to 55
LMNE Abs. 170 Set to maximum
LMNE Transfer 200 ms 150 ms to 250 ms
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS326E - 5
Yearly maintenance
6. Diluent reservoir Joint & Washer replacement

(XEA286AS)
■ Go to "Service > Super User Menu >

Hydraulic System > Unprime Cycle" and
press "All" to drain the chambers and the
diluent reservoir.
■ Remove the right-hand side panel and the
mother board cover from the instrument (Refer
to RAS342C: Front panel & covers dismantling
for further details).
■ Remove the white vertical plastic mother board
protection.
■ Loosen the 2 diluent reservoir fixation screws
to free the diluent reservoir.
■ Open the diluent reservoir without

disconnecting its tubing (4 screws on the top).
■ Locate the new joint and washer on the
reservoir cap.
Hold the top part of the reservoir so that both tubes are above the diluent reservoir.
Top screws tightening torque: 120 m.Nm (17 Ozf.in).
■ Tighten the 4 diluent reservoir screws according to the tightening torque above.
■ If
the tube under the reservoir body has been disconnected, connect it before installing the diluent reservoir
back to its proper location.
■ Install the diluent reservoir back to its proper location and block the screws.
Technical Manual
RAS326E - 6 RAA022
Yearly maintenance
7. Draining chambers O-ring replacement

(4 x FAA066A)
If necessary, refer to RAS516B: Takasago valve assembly dismantling procedure for chamber access.
■ Make sure that the chambers are drained. If

not, go to "Service > Super User Menu >
Hydraulic System > Drain Chambers" and
press "All".
■ Put a piece of absorbant paper or cloth under
the chambers assembly.
■ Gently turn the chamber bottom part between
2 fingers.
■ Replace the O-ring.
■ Repeat the operation for each chamber.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS326E - 7
Yearly maintenance
8. Counting heads coaxial cable O-ring replacement

(2 x FAA046A)
If necessary, refer to RAS516A: Takasago valve assembly dismantling procedure for chamber access.
■ Make sure that the chambers are drained. If not, go to "Service > Super User Menu > Hydraulic System >
Unprime Cycle" and press "All".
■ Switch the instrument off.
■ Put a piece of absorbant paper or cloth under the chambers assembly.
■ Record the tube positions before dismantling the chambers assembly.
■ Disconnect the chambers tubes except for the waste.
■ Unscrew the 3 screws from the chambers

assembly.
■ Dismantle the electrode by loosening the 2

fixation screws.
■ Cut part of a micropipette tip off so that you can

use it to replace the electrode O-ring.
■ Reassemble the electrode then repeat the same operation for the other electrode.
Tightening torque: 120 m.Nm (17 Ozf.in).
Technical Manual
RAS326E - 8 RAA022
Yearly maintenance
9. Counting head aperture joint replacement

(2 x GBG275A)
If necessary, refer to RAS516A: Takasago valve assembly dismantling procedure for chamber access.
■ Carefully
dismantle the counting head and
plunge the aperture in distilled water.
■ Replace the EPO joints by the new ones.
■ Clean the chamber and the counting head with liquid soap.
Do not use any sharp objects inside the chamber and/or the aperture as it can cause damage.
Do not manipulate the aperture by using hard instruments. Clean the aperture with a soft paper or,
preferably, between 2 fingers.
■ Rinse thoroughly with distilled water.

■ Dry the exterior of the chamber with a soft paper.
It is recommended to reconnect the tubes on the counting head before reassembling the electrode
and the chamber in order to avoid applying constraint on the chamber.
Do not apply too much pressure on the electrode fixation screws as it can break the aperture.
Tightening torque: 400 m.Nm (56.8 Ozf.in).
■ Reassemble the electrode and repeat the same operation with the other counting head.
■ Reassemble in reverse order. Gently push down the chamber assembly when tightening the screws in order
to keep the correct position.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS326E - 9
Yearly maintenance
10. Tape on trays

■ If the sliding bands located on the loading and ejection trays are damaged, replace them using the tape
(JAJ007A) included in the kit.
310 mm
320 mm
■ Use Acetone to clean the trays.
Loading tray
220 mm
Ejection tray
11. Mixer assembly spring replacement

■ Please refer to RAS514B: Mixer assembly spring replacement.
12. Additional maintenance

■ The yearly maintenance includes the 6 month maintenance procedure.
■ Therefore, perform the 6 month maintenance procedure (Refer to RAS325F: 6 month maintenance).
13. Check up after intervention

■ Before reassembling the covers, start the instrument and check that there is no leak.
■ Reassemble the covers and perform the "Check up after intervention" procedure (refer to RAS340D: Check
up after intervention).
Technical Manual
RAS326E - 10 RAA022
RAS327F
2 year maintenance
■ Concerns
■ Sampling needle: Percutor replacement

■ Reagents syringe: Pistons replacement
■ Vacuum / waste pump: Piston replacement
■ Optical bench: Coaxial replacement
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal Keys
■ Dynamometric screwdrivers A302, A301, A300
■ Cutting pliers
■ Cruciform screwdrivers
■ Torx keys
■ ABX Minoclair
■2 hour
■ Frequency

■2 year maintenance kits:
- XEC282AS (1209179282) for ABX Pentra 80/ABX
Pentra XL80
- XEC196BS (1209178196) for Pentra XLR

the operations.
2 year maintenance
1. 2 year maintenance kits
■ The2 year maintenance kit for ABX Pentra 80/ABX Pentra XL80 XEC282AS (1209179282)
contains pistons, piercing needle and LMNE ABX Pentra 80/ABX Pentra XL80 coaxial.
■ The2 year maintenance kit for Pentra XLR XEC196BS (1209178196) contains piston, piercing
needle and LMNE Pentra XLR coaxial

Please follow RAS328D: Decontamination & rinse before starting this procedure.
ABX Pentra 80/ABX Pentra XL80: XEC282AS (1209179282)
P/N Designation Qty

XBA399C (1209113399) Coax LMNE flowcell P60/P80 1
GBG274A (1203201274) Piston D=31 3
GBL0651 (1203500651) Percutor 1
Pentra XLR: XEC196BS (1209178196)
P/N Designation Qty

XBA843A (1209111843) Coax CIS optical flowcell PXL Ret. 1
GBG274A (1203201274) Piston D=31 3
GBL0651 (1203500651) Percutor 1
Technical Manual
RAS327F - 2 RAA022
2 year maintenance
2. Maintenance
2.1. Percutor replacement: GBL0651 (1203500651)

power supply cable.
■ Open the right-hand side door.
■ Move the carriage to access the rinsing block.
■ Remove the 2 rinsing block screws and lift the
locker to free the needle and remove the rinsing
block.
■ Replace the percutor.
GBL0651
(1203500651)
Use new O-rings when you perform the 6 month maintenance at the same time.
Change the sampling needle XDA655ES (1209139655) when you perform the yearly maintenance at
the same time.
Use a dynamometric screwdriver to tighten the syringe. Tightenning torques: 120 mN.m \ 17 Ozf.in.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS327F - 3
2 year maintenance
2.2. Reagent syringe pistons replacement
GBC031A (1202801031) & 4xGBC030A (1202801030)
■ Switch the instrument off, disconnect the

power supply cable and remove the covers
(Refer to RAS342D: Front panel & covers
dismantling).
■ Disconnect the following tubes:
- valve 7 inlet 3,
- valve 8 inlet 3,
- valve 9 inlet 3,
- valve 10 inlet 3,
- valve 12 inlet 3.
■ Unscrew the 2 fixation screws and carefully
remove the reagent syringes.
■ Push the piston several times over the waste
container to drain the syringes.
1
■ On a piece of absorbant paper open the
reagents syringe (9 x CHC M3x12 screws, 2 x
FX M3x12 screws).
2
■ Replace the pistons.
■ Replace all O-rings and washers with the new
ones from the 6 month maintenance kit.
■ Use one drop of silicon grease between 2
fingers to lubricate the O-rings.
8
■ Reassemble in reverse order:
3
- 1 - Reagent syringe body
GBG033A (1203201033).
- 2 - XDA622A (1209131622) x4.
- 3 - Piston GBC030A (1202801030) x4.
- 4 - FX M3x12 screws x2. 7
- 5 - CHC M3x12 screws x9.
- 6 - Reagent syringe bottom plate.
- 7 - Hgb lyse reagent piston 4
GBC031A (1202801031). 6
- 8 - O-ring FAA073A (1202401073).
Technical Manual
RAS327F - 4 RAA022
2 year maintenance

Tightenning torques:
- 9 x CHC M3x12: 400 mN.m (56.8 Ozf.in)
- 2 x FX M3x12: 400 mN.m (56.8 Ozf.in)
The thickness of the washer matches each O-ring’s thickness:
XDA622A (1209131622) = O-ring FAA063A (1202401063) + Washer GBG149A (1203201149).
For this reason, keep the O-ring and the washer together.
The lyse piston O-ring (small one) has no washer.
2.3. Draining syringe 1 piston replacement: GBG274A (1203201274) &

GBG260A (1203201260)
■ Switch the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.
■ Remove the cover and the right-hand side door to access the draining syringe 1 (Refer to RAS342D: Front
panel & covers dismantling for further details).
■ Disconnect the electrical connectors from the

syringe, then untighten the 4 syringe screws to
release the silent block.
■ Put a piece of absorbant paper under the syringe and disconnect all the tubes from the syringe.
■ Remove the syringe.
■ Drain the syringe by pushing the piston up and down several times.
■ Open the syringe
- 4 x CHC M4x16 screws on the old model
- Rotation of the syringe body on the new model.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS327F - 5
2 year maintenance
Molded Syringe (New model) Machined Syringe (Old model)
Open
Close
■ Prepare the piston: on the new molded syringe,

the piston (1) is shorter.
■ For
new molded syringe, install only the piston
2
GBG274A (1203201274) (1).
■ For
old machined syringe, use the piston
GBG274A (1203201274) (1) + the cross piece
GBG260A (1203201260) (2) and use the CHC
M3x20 screws from the kit.
Old piston
1
Use the new O-ring when you perform the 6 month maintenance at the same time.
O-ring FAA017A (1202401017) + Washer GBG148A (1203201148) = XDA621A (1209131621)
Technical Manual
RAS327F - 6 RAA022
2 year maintenance
Molded Syringe Machined Syringe

(New model) (Old model)
1-Motor
assembly
2-O-ring
■ The chamber body of the new syringe is FAA017A
directly screwed to the motor block. When the (1202401017)
body is reinstalled on the motor block, it has to
be rotated until the mark on the body is located 3-Anti-extrusion
between the two marks of the motor block. ring GBG219A
(1203201219)
4-Washer
(GBG148A)
5-Syringe body
6-CHC M4x16
screws (x4)
2.4. Draining syringe 2 piston replacement
GBG274A (1203201274) & GBG260A (1203201260)

■ Remove the covers and the left-hand side panel to access the reagent syringe (Refer to the RAS342D: Front

syringe then untighten the 4 syringe screws to
release the silent blocks.
■ Follow the same procedure as for the draining syringe 1 to replace the piston.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS327F - 7
2 year maintenance
2.5. Counting syringe piston replacement
GBG274A (1203201274) & GBG260A (1203201260)

■ Remove the covers and the left-hand side panel to access the reagent syringe (refer to the RAS342D: Front

syringe then untighten the 4 syringe screws to
release the silent blocks.
■ Follow the same procedure as for the draining syringe 1 to replace the piston.
2.6. LMNE flowcell coaxial replacement
2.6.1. On ABX Pentra 80 / ABX Pentra XL80
XBA399C (1209113399)
■ Open the optical bench cover.
Technical Manual
RAS327F - 8 RAA022
2 year maintenance
■ Disconnect the coaxial connector from the

optical bench board, then disconnect the
coaxial from the LMNE flowcell.
■ Disconnect both tubes from the "T" connector.

A few diluent drops may leak.
■ Replace the coaxial cable.
2.6.2. On Pentra XLR
XBA843A (1209111843)
■ Remove the optical bench cover by unscrewing

the 3 plastic screws and the CHC M4X8 screw.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS327F - 9
2 year maintenance
■ Disconnect the coaxial connector from the

optical bench board.
■ Disconnect both tubes from the "T" connector.
A few diluent drops may leak.
■ Unscrew the CHC M3X6 screw.
■ Becareful not to lose the washer when you
remove the coaxial cable.
■ Replace the coaxial cable.
3. Instrument cleaning
■ Concerned assemblies:
- Thermostated compartment
- Outer surfaces of the instrument (perpex, covers, reagent locations, etc.)
- Waste connector plug
- Liquid valve push button
- Assemblies close to the needle
- Tube holder assembly
- Overflow trays
Cleaning:
■ Dilute the 9° Cl bleach to 1 part of bleach for 4 of deionized water (1/5).
■ Instrument environment must be cleaned.
■ No sponge nor cloth must be used. Only use absorbant paper and throw it away after use in contamination
bins. For small or sensitive assemblies, use delicate absorbant paper.
bleach (the stainless steel must be bleached below 30°C).
■ Reinstall all the assemblies and set the instrument back to its initial configuration.
Technical Manual
RAS327F - 10 RAA022
RAS328D
Decontamination & rinse
■ Concerns
Instrument decontamination before maintenance

operations in the following cases:
■ Instrument removed from biohazardous area
■ Maintenance intervention on contaminated
assemblies
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Clamps
■ Torx keys
■ Fungicidal, bacterial, virus killing detergent spray,
non corrosive for metals, non plastic altering.
■ ABX Minoclair
■ 9° bleach
■ Deionized water
■ Distilled water
■ Absorbant paper
■1 hour 30 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. Preparation
■ Switch the instrument on.
■ Open the thermal door (right-hand side of the instrument).
■ Perform a "Concentrated Cleaning" from "Service > Super User Menu > Hydraulic System > Clean
Cycles".
■ Confirm the concentrated cleaning by pressing "OK".
■ Pour 3 mL of ABX Minoclair in each chamber

when instructed to do so by the popup window,
then click "OK" to continue.
■ When the cycle is finished, switch the instrument off and remove the power supply cable.
■ Remove the instrument covers (Refer to RAS342D: Front panel & covers dismantling).
■ Spray the bactericidal cleaner on all biohazardous areas (assemblies in contact with the biohazardous
material such as instrument covers, tube holder, keyboard, etc.) and wait 10 minutes.
2. Manual decontamination
■ Dilute the 9° Cl bleach to 1 part of bleach for 4 of deionized water (1/5).
■ Instrument environment must be cleaned and decontaminated.
■ No sponge nor cloth must be used. Only use absorbant paper and throw it away after use in contamination
bins. For small or sensitive assemblies use delicate absorbant paper.
bleach (stainless steel must be bleached below 30°C).
■ Concerned assemblies:
- Outer surfaces of the instrument (perpex, covers, reagent locations, etc.)
- Waste connector plug
- Liquid valve push button
- Assemblies close to the needle
- Overflow tray
■ Put back all the assemblies and set the instrument back to its initial configuration.
Technical Manual
RAS328D - 2 RAA022
3. Analysis circuit decontamination

■ Prepare 1 bottle containing 1/2 litre of bleach diluted as follows: 1 part of bleach for 9 parts of deionized water
(1/10).
■ Prepare 1 bottle containing 1/2 litre of distilled water.
■ Replace the reagent bottles (ABX Lysebio, ABX Basolyse II and ABX Eosinofix) with the diluted bleach bottles.

■ Run an "ALL REAGENTS" prime cycle from "Service > Super User Menu > Hydraulic System >
Prime Cycles".
■ Fill a sample tube with bleach diluted as follows: 1 part of bleach for 4 parts of deionized water (1/5).
■ Run 15 "Burn-in" cycles by going to "Service > Technician Menu > Others > Burn in cycle", entering 15
cycles in "Total Cycles To Do" and then pressing "Start Rack".
■ Let the instrument operate until it stops on its own.
4. Instrument Rinse
Run this procedure before transporting the instrument, after a demonstration or before a long period without
functioning.
■ Run an Instrument general cleaning.
■ Remove the straws from the reagent bottles and put them in an empty bottle.
■ Remove the straw from the diluent cubitainer and put it in the empty bottle.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS328D - 3
■ Go to "Service > Super User Menu > Hydraulic System > Unprime Cycle" and then click "All".
■ Press" Validate" and then repeat this cycle a second time.

■ Dry the straws using absorbant paper.
■ Plunge the straws in a bottle filled with distilled water.
■ Go to "Service > Super User Menu > Hydraulic System > Prime Cycles" and then click "ALL REAGENTS".
■ Press "Validate" then repeat this cycle a second time.

■ Run several manual cycles.
■ Remove the straws from the distilled water bottle then plunge them into an empty bottle.
■ Run several "All" unprime cycles to drain the instrument.
Technical Manual
RAS328D - 4 RAA022
RAS329D
Chambers adjustment
■ Concerns
■ Chambers check and alignment
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal Keys
■ None
■ 15 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
Chambers adjustment
It is mandatory to perform the needle adjustment procedure after this adjustment.
1. Alignment check and adjustment

This adjustment procedure must be carried out after the chamber assembly has been moved or replaced.
If necessary, refer to RAS516B: Takasago valve assembly dismantling for chamber access.
■ Remove the covers (Refer to RAS342D: Front panel & covers dismantling).
■ Install a gauge over the Rinse chamber then move the carriage over the gauge.
■ Gently push down the needle until it comes just

in contact with the gauge.
If the teflon part of the needle comes into contact with the gauge, the needle will be damaged.
■ Without lifting the needle, gently push the carriage over the WBC/BASO chamber.
■ Check that there is the same height between

the needle and the gauge over the WBC/BASO
chamber and over the Rinse chamber.
Technical Manual
RAS329D - 2 RAA022
Chambers adjustment
■ If
you need to get a better position, free the
chamber support by loosening the 5 screws.
■ Locate the needle.

■ Gently tighten the left upper screw.
■ Without lifting the needle, gently push the carriage over the WBC/BASO chamber.
■ Check that the height between the needle and the top of the Rinse chamber is the same as the height between
the needle and the top of the WBC/BASO chamber.
■ If necessary, adjust the position by moving the chamber support up or down.
■ Perform an alignment check as described at the beginning of this procedure.
■ When the adjustment is correct, tighten the screws and perform a needle adjustment procedure (Refer to
RAS330E: Needle adjustment).
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS329D - 3
Chambers adjustment
Technical Manual
RAS329D - 4 RAA022
RAS330E
Needle adjustment
■ Concerns
■ Check and adjustment of the Needle
■ Required tools
■ GBG282A key for cover
■ None
■ 15 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
Needle adjustment
1. MDSS adjustment menu
This procedure applies to the V2.3.0 software version.

If you use a precedent version, please refer to the RAS330D procedure of the RAA022EEN technical
manual.
Make sure that the chamber assy is parallel to the carriage motion before checking or making an
adjustment of the needle position.
Follow RAS329D: Chambers adjustment.
The MDSS cycle is modified since the V2.3.0 version.
The first dilution is performed in two steps to noticeably improve the dilution accuracy:
■ After blood aspiration and needle rinsing, 0.88 mL of ABX Diluent is distributed in the DIL1/HGB chamber
during the descent of the needle at the bottom of the chamber.
■ Then, 10 µL of blood is distributed when the needle is at the bottom of the chamber.
■ Finally, the needle moves up to the ABX Diluent distribution inlet and distributes 0.80 mL of ABX Diluent.
The needle adjustments can be performed from "Service > Technician Menu > Gains >
M.D.S.S. Adjustment".
Technical Manual
RAS330E - 2 RAA022
Needle adjustment
2. Home adjustment
2.1. Needle home adjustment
■ Go to "Service > Technician Menu > Gains > M.D.S.S. Adjustment".
■ Press "Check Needle Home".
■ Check that the sampling needle is about 1 mm

lower than the piercing needle.
Piercing needle
1 mm
Sampling needle
Notch
■ Use the notch in GBG282A tool (key for cover)
as a gauge to measure the gap.
■ Press "OK" to continue.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS330E - 3
Needle adjustment
■ Adjust the needle home if necessary:

If the sampling needle is too low (gap > 1 mm), increase the number of steps of the needle home.
If the sampling needle is too high (gap < 1 mm), decrease the number of steps of the needle home.
Press "Check Needle Home" again to control the gap.
2.2. Carriage home adjustment
■ Press "Check Carriage Home".
The carriage home position is factory adjusted and must not be changed. It represents a gap of
2 mm between the tooth wheel and the front of the carriage.
This carriage position is also the sampling position. If you need to readjust the Sampling position,
move the tube holder instead of changing the "Carriage Home" value.
2 mm
■ Check the gap between the tooth wheel and the front of the carriage and press "OK".
■ If the carriage home position needs to be adjusted, change the "Carriage Home" value and then press
"Check Carriage Home" again. Use the MAJ004A gauge to check the gap between the tooth wheel and the
front of the carriage.
By changing the carriage home value, the carriage positions will change. If this position is modified,
increase or decrease the "Dil 1 carriage position" with the same number of steps, not to loose the
other adjustments:
- Increase "Dil 1 carriage position" if you increase "Carriage Home".
- Decrease "Dil 1 carriage position" if you decrease "Carriage Home".
The sampling position in the tube holder will change too. Re-adjust the tube holder position to center
the needle in the tube holder’s sampling hole (Refer to RAS338).
Technical Manual
RAS330E - 4 RAA022
Needle adjustment
3. MDSS adjustment
3.1. Adjustment

■ Press "Check Carriage Position".
■ The sampling needle goes at the bottom of the DIL1/HGB chamber.
This position is indexed according to the position of the inlet #1 of the first dilution chamber and does not
require adjustment.
■ Press "OK" to continue and move to the Dil1

position.
■ Disconnect
all tubes connected to the inlets of each chamber (Dil1/HGB-Inlet1; LMNE-Inlet3; RBC-Inlet1
and WBC-Inlet2).
■ Place yourself in front of the inlet to check the

proper position of the needle.
Your eye must be aligned to see through the
inlet as in diagram A and not as in diagram B
(where circles are not concentric).
A: Correct position B: Wrong position
■ The needle must be positioned as shown in

diagram C.
C: Needle position
■ Check the needle depth if necessary:
If the sampling needle is too low, decrease the number of steps of the needle.
If the sampling needle is too high, increase the number of steps of the needle.
■ If any modification has to be done, run again the "Check Carriage Position" from the begining to control
the correct position of the sampling needle.
■ If the adjustment is correct, put the tubing back to the inlet.
■ Press "OK" to continue.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS330E - 5
Needle adjustment
■ Adjust the needle position for all the chambers separately.

■ Makesure that all tubings are correctly connected to their respective inlet. Refer to the sticker above the
chambers for proper connections.
.
os
ep
i ag
c ar r po
s.
O e
AS i ag
/B ar r
W BC E c
(2) L MN
(3)
.
os
g ep
a rria
1c
IL
(1 )D
s .
po
ia ge
arr
RB
C
c 2
(4)
■ If
you want to modify only one of the positions,
make sure you increase or decrease the next
4
motions with the same number of steps, so that
you do not loose the other adjustments. 3
3.2. Final Check
■ At the end of the adjustement, press "Check Carriage Position" again.

The sampling needle goes at the bottom of the DIL1/HBG chamber.
Technical Manual
RAS330E - 6 RAA022
Needle adjustment
■ Make sure that the needle does not touch the inner side and bottom of the chamber.
■ Press "OK" until the window closes.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS330E - 7
Needle adjustment
4. Mechanical adjustments on vertical carriage
■ Use a 0.15 mm gauge (1) between the piercing

block (A) and the white safety block (B) to adjust
the collar (C) blocking the carriage vertical A
movement.
1 B
■ When the carriage is in the home position A

(2 mm from the tooth wheel), adjust the gap
between the white safety block (B) and the
piercing block (A) by unscrewing and moving
the white safety block. B
■ Thegap must be adjusted between 0.7 mm
and 1 mm.
■ If
any modification has been carried out, check
the MDSS adjustment. Refer to MDSS
adjustment.
Technical Manual
RAS330E - 8 RAA022
RAS331E
Mother Board Adjustment
■ Concerns
■ PCB and System Configurations

■ How to access to Main board
■ Main board general view
■ Main board supply check
■ Main board adjustment
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Voltmeter
■ RBC / PLT latex: 1300019538
■ 30 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. PCB and System Configurations

The following table shows the compatibilities for existing mother boards:
PCB PCB
P80 PXL80 PXLR
P/N Movex P/N SAP
XAA456A X
XAA456B 1209102456 X X
XAA694A 1209101694 X
XAA694B 1209102694 X X
2. How to access the main board

■ Remove the right-hand side cover of the instrument.
■ Open the right-hand side front cover.
■ Remove the thermal panel.
■ Unscrew the 9 screws from the right-hand side cover and carefully remove the cover.
■ Unscrew the 2 screws on the top of the frame of the inside protection to remove it.
3. Mother board general view
Technical Manual
RAS331E - 2 RAA022
3.1. XAA456 (1209102456) PCB

LMNE
J23 J24 HGB
Preampli J34 J26
Board photomet
HGB
R148
TP45
R248
RBC/PLT WBC/BASO
60 V_LMNE
60 V_WBC
60 V_RBC
TP1
LMNE
Resistive Gain
Resistive Threshold
TP39 PLT RBC Gain

Otpical Threshold
TP4 TP19
TP2 TP13 TP12
R159 TP15
TP30
Threshold
R160
R136
TP3 TP56 Threshold

R161
R158
TP24 TP17 TP33 TP16
TP14
R157
TP21 TP58 TP57
TP31
R135
TP44 TP22 Gain Gain TP59

TP23
TP55
Optical
J44
bench fan
U33 U34 U37 U38

HC11
HC11 LMNE HC11 PLT U39 HC11 RBC WBC/BASO
DS1 DS2 Acquisition CPLD DS3 DS4

Sampling
syringe
motor current
U45 U46 U47 U44
Vertical
TP66
carriage
motor current R114
U48
External reset E1
TP65 U49 U50
Carriage
Board J1 R126 J6 BD32
J46
U53
Motors J3 RS232#1
Board
J38
LEDS
Board U55 U56
J42 JTAG
Emergency
J19
posit° assy
U59
U63 U60
U64
Valves
#1 - 6
J16 J17
Valves
J30
Draining #
R151
#7 - 12 DS5 TP52 DS7 detection

TP47
J29
Valves Draining #
R177 R171 R78
DS6 TP48
#24 - 30 detection
U70
J18 J14 Counting
J41
U74 DS8
Valves
TP68 TP46 detection
DS9
#31 - 35
J28
Transfer
J37
& 36 - 37* DS10

TP67 detection
Valves J4
#13 - 19 TP42 TP40 TP41 TP43
J27
J15 J13 DS11 DS12 DS13 DS14

RS232#2
E2
J47
+24V +5V +15V -15V PC panel
TP50
TP51 J5
J33
DS15 DS16 J45

J31
RS232#3
Internal
Barcode
*: If equipped with Reagent Diluent level Room Heating room Waste level Power Power supply of barcode reader on J5
Takasago valves Heater detection Heater door detection detection supply Jumper on E2= VCC on J5-8 (by default)
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS331E - 3
3.2. XAA694 (1209101694/1209102694) PCB

CIS/OD HGB
Amplifier photometer
Board
Laser power setup
Laser
safety switch
Read power adjustement
Laser
system
Ret resistive gain

5V power
supply harness
Optical
bench fan
Sampling
syringe
motor current
Vertical
carriage
motor current
Carriage
Board
Motors
Board
LEDs
Board
Emergency
posit° assy
Valves
#1 - 6
Valves
#7 - 12 Draining #1
detection
Draining #2
Valves detection
#24 - 30
Counting
Valves detection
#31 - 35
Transfer
detection
Valves
#13 - 19
+24V RS232#2
Valves PC panel
#36 - 37 +5V +15V -15V
Shutter
solenoïd
+ Valves RS232#3
#38 - 39 Internal
Barcode
Reagent Diluent level Heating room Room Laser ambiant Waste level Power
Heater detection door detection Heater T° sensor detection supply
in red: Pentra XLR Only
Technical Manual
RAS331E - 4 RAA022
4. Main board check
4.1. Power supply check
■ The power supply test points are located at the bottom of the main board and are not adjustable.
Voltage Test Point Range Ground

+24 V TP42 ±1.4 V TP47
+5 V TP40 ±0.15 V TP47
+15 V TP41 ±0.5 V TP47
-15 V TP43 ±0.5 V TP47
4.1.1. XAA456 (1209102456) PCB
J16 J17
J30
R151
DS5 TP52
TP47 DS7
J29
R177 R171 R78
DS6 TP48
U70
J18 J14
J41
U74 DS8
TP68 TP46
DS9
J28
J37
DS10
TP67
J4
TP42 TP40 TP41 TP43
J27
J15 J13 DS11 DS12 DS13 DS14

E2
J47
+24V +5V +15V -15V
TP50
TP51 J5
J33
DS1
DS15 DS16 J45
J31
4.1.2. XAA694 (1209101694/1209102694) PCB
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS331E - 5
4.2. Aperture voltage supply check
The Aperture voltage test points are located in the right upper part of the main board and are not adjustable.
■ Select Services > Technician

Menu > Measurement >
Aperture Current
■ Select Check
Aperture Voltage check (ground on TP47 or TP58)
Voltage Test point

60 V TP5 RBC aperture voltage
60 V TP7 WBC aperture voltage
60 V TP9 LMNE aperture voltage
4.2.1. XAA456 (1209102456) PCB
J26
HGB
R248
Gain TP9 TP7 TP5

60 V_LMNE
60 V_WBC
60 V_RBC
TP1
Aperture voltage
supply
4.2.2. XAA694 (1209101694/1209102694) PCB
Technical Manual
RAS331E - 6 RAA022
5. Main board adjustment

■ Remove the right-hand side cover in order to access the main board.
5.1. Threshold adjustment on XAA456 (1209102456) PCB
■ The threshold test points are located at the top of the main board.
J34 J23 J24 J26

HGB
R148
R248
LMNE OD: LMNELMNE CIS: RBC/PLT WBC/BASO
TP4 - R161 TP3 - R160
RBC:
Resistive Threshold
TP13 - R158
PLT R134
Otpical Threshold
Threshold
TP4 TP19
TP2 TP13
R159
RBC
R160
R136
TP3
R161
R158
Threshold
TP14
R157
Threshold
R133
PLT:
R135
TP2 - R159
■ Check and adjust the threshold voltages, if necessary, according to the following table.
Threshold Test Point Potentiometer Range

BASO TP14 R157 390 mV ±5 mV
RBC TP13 R158 390 mV ±5 mV
390 mV ±5 mV
PLT TP2 R159
350 mV ±5 mV for instruments equiped with Takasago valves
LMNE CIS TP3 R160 700 mV ±5 mV
LMNE OD TP4 R161 350 mV ±5 mV
■ The threshold test points are located at the top of the main board.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS331E - 7
5.2. Threshold adjustment on XAA694 (1209101694/1209102694) PCB
5.2.1. PXLR and PXL80 Common Thresholds

■ Check and adjust if necessary the threshold voltages according to the following table:

WBC/BASO TP14 R157 390 mV ±5 mV
RBC TP13 R158 390 mV ±5 mV
350 mV ±5 mV
PLT TP2 R159
390 mV ±5 mV for PXL80 without Takasago valves
LMNE CIS TP3 R160 700 mV ±5 mV
LMNE OD TP4 R161 350 mV ±5 mV
5.2.2. PXLR Specific Threshold

■ For PXLR only, check and adjust if necessary the threshold voltage according to the following table:

RET CIS TP20 R258 500 mV ±5 mV
5.3. HGB blank adjustment
■ Make sure that the thermal door is closed.

■ Go to "Service > Technician Menu > Measurement > Gains" and press "HGB Blank Adjustment".
■ Theutility carries out a rinsing cycle of the WBC chamber and continuously displays the voltage used by the
converter. The adjustment cycle lasts for 20 seconds.
■ Adjust to 4.7 V ±0.02 V by the mean of R248 potentiometer.
Technical Manual
RAS331E - 8 RAA022
XAA694 (1209101694/1209102694) PCB XAA456 (1209102456) PCB
J26
HGB
R248
TP9 TP7 TP5
Gain
TP1
■ Check between Ground and TP1 that the voltage is in accordance with the value displayed on the screen.
5.4. RBC/PLT gain adjustment
A special cycle allows the dilution of the RBC/PLT latex. A special count program carries out the calculation of
the mean volume in the predefined zones and displays them every 700 ms.
The duration of the measurement cycle is 21 seconds.
■ The adjustments are made with
R133 potentiometer for RBC and
R135 for PLT.
■ Go to "Service > Technician Menu > Measurement\Gains" and press "RBC / PLT Gain".
Mix LATEX thoroughly before sampling.
5.4.1. XAA456 (1209102456) PCB

■ Target values (for 1300019538 latex lot): refer to the latest version of the RAN278 technical note.
J34 J23 J24 J26

HGB
R148
TP45
R248

RBC/PLT
60 V_LMNE
60 V_WBC
60 V_RBC
TP1
LMNE
Resistive Gain
WBC/BASO
Resistive Threshold
TP39 Gain
Otpical Threshold
TP4 TP19
TP2 TP13 TP12
R159 TP15
TP30
Threshold
R160
R136
TP3 TP56 Threshold

R161
R158
TP24 TP17 TP33 TP16

TP14 R157 TP21 TP58 TP57
TP31
PLT
R135
TP59
TP44 TP23 TP22
Gain
RBC
Gain
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS331E - 9
5.4.2. XAA694 (1209101694/1209102694) PCB

5.5. WBC/BASO gain adjustment
■A special cycle allows the dilution of the RBC/PLT latex. A special count program carries out the calculation
of the mean volume in the predefined zones and displays them every 700 ms. The duration of the
measurement cycle is 21 seconds.
■ The adjustment is made using the R134 potentiometer.
■ Go to "Service > Technician Menu > Measurement > Gains" and press "Wbc Gain".
Mix LATEX thoroughly before sampling.
5.6. Liquid sensors adjustment
■ The liquid sensor test points are located at the bottom of the main board.
■ From "Service > Technician Menu > Measurement > Gains > Liquid sensor adjustment", adjust all the
different voltage values according to the following table:
Technical Manual
RAS331E - 10 RAA022
Liquid Sensor Test Point Potentiometer Range Connector

Draining 1 TP52 R151 4.5 V ±0.3 V on air J30
< 1.0 V on liquid
Draining 2 TP48 R78 4.5 V ±0.3 V on air J29
< 1.0 V on liquid
Counting TP68 R171 4.5 V ±0.3 V on air J41
< 1.0 V on liquid
LMNE Transfer TP67 R177 4.5 V ±0.3 V on air J37
< 1.0 V on liquid
5.6.1. XAA456 (1209102456) PCB
J16 J17 J30

Draining #1
DS5 TP52 R151 DS7 detection
TP47
J29
Draining #2
R177 R171 R78
DS6 TP48 detection

U70
J18 J14 Counting
J41
U74 DS8
TP68 TP46 detection
DS9
J28
Transfer
J37
DS10 detection
TP67
J4
TP42 TP40 TP41 TP43
J27
J15 J13 DS11 DS12 DS13 DS14

E2
J47
+24V +5V +15V -15V
TP50
TP51 J5
J33
DS1
DS15 DS16 J45
J31
5.6.2. XAA694 (1209101694/1209102694) PCB
Draining #1
detection
Draining #2
detection
Counting
detection
Transfer
detection
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS331E - 11
5.7. Motor current adjustment
■ The motor current test points are located in the middle of the main board, on the left.
■ Check and adjust the motor current, if necessary, according to the following table.
Motor Test Point Potentiometer Range

Sampling syringe TP66 R114 2 V ±0.05 V
Vertical carriage TP65 R126 4.5 V ±0.3 V
5.7.1. XAA456 (1209102456) PCB
U45 U46
Sampling TP66
syringe R114
motor current
U48
Vertical TP65 U49

carriage J1 R126
motor current J46
U53
5.7.2. XAA694 (1209101694/1209102694) PCB
Sampling
syringe
motor current
Vertical
carriage
motor current
Technical Manual
RAS331E - 12 RAA022
5.8. PXLR Laser power setup Adjustment (XAA694B/1209102694)
■ The laser power setup test point is located on the top of the main board, on the left.
Laser power setup
■ Check and adjust if necessary the motor current according to the following table.
Laser power setup Test Point Potentiometer Range

Laser setup TP47 R274 3.70 V +/- 0.02 V
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS331E - 13
Technical Manual
RAS331E - 14 RAA022
RAS332D
Motor board adjustment
■ Concerns
■ Motor board adjustment:

■ How to access the Motor board
■ Motor board general view
■ Motor board check and adjustment
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Voltmeter
■ None
■ 15 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. How to access the motor board

The motor board is located under the sampler loader system on the left-hand side of the instrument.
■ Lift up the reagent cover and remove the bottles.
■ Remove the plastic protection under the reagents.
■ Remove the left-hand side panel of the instrument (4 screws).
■ Remove the reagent frame under the plastic protection (5 screws).
■ Remove the sampler loader inox plate (4 screws).
■ Remove the motor board plastic protection (2 screws).
For more details about the dismantling of the instrument covers, refer to the procedure RAS342D: Front panel
& covers dismantling.
2. Motor board check and adjustment
Motor Test Point Potentiometer Target

Reagent syringe TP1 R16 4 V ±0.05 V
Optical bench syringe TP2 R23 3 V ±0.05 V
4.8 V ±0.05 V for Molded Syringe (New)*
Counting syringe TP3 R38
4.0 V ±0.05 V for Machined Syringe (Old)
Draining syringe #2 TP4 R50
Horizontal carriage TP5 R59 3 V ±0.05 V
Draining syringe #1 TP6 R73
Sampler TP7 R92 3.5 V ±0.05 V
Loader TP8 R110 3.5 V ±0.05 V
Mixer (µ step motor) TP9 R122 0.6 V ±0.05 V
*: This motor current new value is only applicable on the new motorisation assemblies: in case a new
piston is installed on an old syringe assembly (motor + syringe), the motor current remains 4 V
+/- 0.05 V.
Technical Manual
RAS332D - 2 RAA022
3. Motor board general view

Main board Power supply
J1 J2
DS1
+24V
Motor Reagent
J3
U1
J4
Home syringe
Reagent syr. motor current
U2 R16
TP1 Motor
Injection
J5
J6
U3
Home syringe
Injection syr. motor current
TP10 R23
TP2
Motor
Counting
J7
J8
U4
Home syringe
Counting syr. motor current
U5 R38
TP3 Motor
Draining #2
J9
J10
U6 syringe
Home
R50
TP4
Home
J11
Sample horizontal
J12
U8 carriage
Carriage motor current Motor
U7 R59
TP5
Motor Draining #1
J13
J14
U9 syringe
Home
R73
J15
TP6 Home
Rack transfer
J16
U11 Motor
U10
Transfer motor current
Rack transfer & R92
J17
TP7
loading switches
J18
U13 Rack loading

U12 motor
Loading motor current
R110
TP8
J19
U15
U14
TP9 R122
Mixer
J20 J21 J22 J23 motor current
Rack transfer Head locking Home Grabber Motor

solenoïd solenoïd status
Mixer
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS332D - 3
Technical Manual
RAS332D - 4 RAA022
RAS333E
Temperature adjustment
■ Concerns
■ Reagent heating coil and Thermostatic

compartment temperature adjustment.
■ Required tools
■ Thermometer
■ None
■ 30 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. Reagent Heating Coil Check & Adjustment

■ Go to "Service > Technician Menu > Measurement > Gains".
The following screen is displayed.
■ Reagent Heating:
- Reference CTN value: Input the CTN value in this field.
- Temperature recorded: Allows to modify the temperature instruction.
- Run Cycle Number: Number of cycles to check temperature adjustment.
This control must be made with the thermal door closed and under stabilised thermic conditions (at
least 5 minutes after startup).
1.1. Reagent heating coil temperature check
■ Open the thermal door on the right-hand side of the instrument.
Technical Manual
RAS333E - 2 RAA022
■ Push the thermometer probe as deep as

possible through the LMNE chamber inlet 1.
Make sure the thermometer sensor is pushed as deep as possible into the liquid.
■ After the thermometer probe has been installed, close the thermal door.
■ Enter 5 in the "Run Cycles Number" field (in the "Reagents Heating" area of the window) to run 5 cycles.
■ Press "Check Thermic" (in the "Reagents Heating" area of the window) to start controling the temperature.
■ Every time your hear a beeping sound coming from the machine, check that the temperature is around
35°C +/-1°C.
The check is validated if you obtain the right temperature at least 4 times during the control.
If an adjustment is necessary, when the heating block has been replaced for example, perform the
following steps of this procedure.
1.2. Reagent heating coil temperature adjustment
■ Check and change the CTN value (if needed).
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS333E - 3
The heating coil CTN value is located on the CTN wire, close to the main board, connected on J31.
Be sure to read the correct value as the sticker may be up or down.
■ Adjust, as described for the control, the temperature by the mean of the "Temperature recorded" value in
the "Thermic adjustment" window.
■ The "Temperature recorded" value (in the "Reagents Heating" area of the window) must be rounded (e.g.
34, 35, 36, etc.):
- If "Temperature recorded" is increased, reagents pre-heating temperature increases.
- If "Temperature recorded" is decreased, reagents pre-heating temperature decreases.
■ Perform a reagent heating coil check after the adjustment as described at the beginning of the procedure.
■ If required, change the "Temperature recorded" value (in the "Reagents Heating" area of the window) and
check the temperature again until you obtain an acceptable temperature.
Technical Manual
RAS333E - 4 RAA022
2. Thermostatic compartment temperature check

and adjustment
2.1. Thermostatic compartment temperature check

■ Open the thermal door on the right-hand side of the instrument.
■ Put the thermometer sensor in the CTN sensor.
■ After the thermometer sensor has been installed, close the thermal door.
■ Wait during 20 minutes.
■ Check that the temperature is around 35°C +/-1°C. If not, perform an adjustment.
2.2. Thermostatic compartment temperature adjustment
■ Check the CTN value and adjust it if needed.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS333E - 5
The thermostatic compartment CTN value is located on the CTN wire, close to the main board,
connected on J33. Be sure to read the correct value as the sticker may be up or down.
■ Adjust, as described for the control, the temperature by the mean of the "Temperature recorded" value in
the "Thermic Adjustment" window.
■ The "Temperature recorded" value (in the "Thermostatic Compartment" area of the window) must be
rounded (e.g. 34, 35, 36, etc.):
- If "Temperature recorded" is increased, reagents pre-heating temperature increases.
- If "Temperature recorded" is decreased, reagents pre-heating temperature decreases.
■ Press "Check Thermic" in the "Thermostatic Compartment" area.
■ Perform a thermostatic compartment temperature check after the adjustment as described at the beginning
of this procedure.
■ If required, change the "Temperature recorded" value and check the temperature again until you obtain an
acceptable temperature.
Technical Manual
RAS333E - 6 RAA022
3. Optical bench temperature check (Pentra XLR

only)
■ Switch the instrument on
■ Go to "Service > Technician Menu > Measurement > Gains".
The thermic adjustment window is displayed.
This control must be made with the laser bench cover closed and under stabilised thermic
conditions (at least 5 minutes after startup).
■ Remove the plate located at the back of the instrument to access the CTN sensor.
■ Put the thermometer sensor in the CTN sensor.
■ Press "Check Thermic" (in the "Optical Bench" area of the window) to control the temperature.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS333E - 7
Technical Manual
RAS333E - 8 RAA022
RAS334E
Vacuum adjustment
■ Concerns
■ Counting and draining 1 & 2 syringes vacuum

control and adjustement
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Barflex
■ Flat screwdrivers
■ None
■ 15 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
Vacuum adjustment
1. Recommendation on vacuum adjustment

Note that the vacuum varies according to the altitude as shown on the following curves.
Those curves represent noted average values and are given for information only. Differences can be noted.
■ Depending on the altitude, the vacuum value will be different on the draining syringe 1 and the draining syringe
2, as shown on the following curves:
1000 2000 3000
0
-50
-100
Vacuum (mbar)
-150 Draining
-200 Syringe 1
-250
-300
-350
Altitude (m)
1000 2000 3000
0
-50
-100
Vacuum (mbar)
-150 Draining
-200 Syringe 2
-250
-300
-350
Altitude (m)
■ The number of steps to adjust the vacuum to -200 mbar +/-5 mbar on the counting syringe will be different,
as shown on the following curve:
1000 2000 3000
0
Number of steps for -200 mbar +/-5
250
500
750 Counting
1000 Syringe
1250
1500
1750
Altitude (m)
Technical Manual
RAS334E - 2 RAA022
Vacuum adjustment
When you reach an altitude of 1000 m or more, the cubitainer of ABX Diluent should be installed at
the same level as the instrument.
2. Draining syringe vacuum check

(no adjustment available).
2.1. Draining syringe 1
■ Disconnect the tube on the draining syringe 1

(inlet 1) and replace it by the barflex tube.
■ Go to "Service > Technician Menu > Gains > Vacuum control".
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS334E - 3
Vacuum adjustment
■ Press "Draining syringe 1".

■ Check the vacuum on the barflex. The vacuum must be stable for 30 seconds.
■ Press "OK".
■ Disconnect the barflex and connect the tube back to the draining syringe 1.
If the vacuum is not stable or if it is too low, check the vacuum circuit (tubings, valves, syringe or
O-ring) and repair if necessary.
2.2. Draining syringe 2
■ Disconnect the tube on the draining syringe 2 (inlet 1) and replace it by the barflex tube.

■ Press "Draining syringe 2".
■ Check the vacuum on the barflex. The vacuum must be stable for 30 seconds.
■ Press "OK".
■ Disconnect the barflex and connect the tube back to the draining syringe 2.
Technical Manual
RAS334E - 4 RAA022
Vacuum adjustment
3. Counting syringe vacuum check and adjustment
3.1. Counting syringe vacuum check
■ Disconnect the lowest tube (inlet 4) on the

counting syringe and replace it by the barflex
tube.

■ Press "Counting syringe".
■ Check the vacuum on the barflex while the

following screen is displayed. The vacuum
must be stable at 200 mbar.
■ Press "OK".
■ Disconnect the barflex and connect the tube back to the counting syringe.
3.2. Counting syringe vacuum adjustment.
■ Follow the counting syringe vacuum check procedure.

■ Change the "Vacuum value" (motor step). If the vacuum is too low, increase the step value.
■ Repeat the vacuum check and step value adjustment until you obtain the correct vacuum (200 mbar +/-
5 mbar).
■ Disconnect the barflex and connect the tube back to the counting syringe.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS334E - 5
Vacuum adjustment
Technical Manual
RAS334E - 6 RAA022
RAS335D
Bubbling adjustment
■ Concerns
■ Bubbling adjustment.
■ Required tools
■ None
■ None
■ 15 minutes
■ Frequency

■ None

the operations.
Bubbling adjustment
■ The bubbling is factory adjusted and normally does not require any further adjustment.
■ If an adjustment is necessary, follow this procedure.
■ Go to "Service > Technician Menu > Gains > Bubbling".
■ Enter the new step value for the bubbling of each chamber, and press "Accept Values".
To increase the bubbling, increase the number of steps.

To decrease the bubbling, decrease the number of steps.
Bubbling Low limit Normal Hight limit

First dilution 100 300 1000
LMNE 100 300 400
WBC/BASO 100 300 400
HGB 300 400 500
RBC 100 300 1000
The RBC bubbling value can be modified for all instruments but it will not have any effect on
instruments equipped with Takasago valves.
Technical Manual
RAS335D - 2 RAA022
RAS336F
LMNE flowcell adjustment

ABX Pentra 80 / ABX Pentra XL80
■ Concerns
■ Instrument adjustment: LMNE Flowcell
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Latex
■ Fresh blood sample
■ Calibrator
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Gauge set: GBG264A

the operations.
This adjustment procedure must be carried out after the LMNE flowcell has been moved or replaced, or when
the LMNE tube has been changed.
This adjustment must be checked in case of quality problems on the LMNE matrix.
For Pentra XLR, refer to RAS735D: RET optical bench procedure.
1. LMNE adjustment parameters

■ LMNE adjustment screen ("Service > Technician Menu > Measurement > LMNE Adjustment"):
This menu allows the adjustment of all the optical bench settings. A 1/400 dilution of RBC/PLT latex is
automatically prepared (5 µL of Latex, 1 mL of ABX Diluent, 1 mL of ABX Eosinofix) in the LMNE/RET
chamber. This dilution is then transferred to the optical chamber and injected.
The measurements are continuously displayed every 700 ms during a total of 27 seconds.
1.1. Lamp voltage
The lamp voltage corresponds to the voltage on the LMNE amplifier board, between TP55 and TP53.
This voltage is defined by the light received (from the lamp) on the cell of the LMNE amplifier board.
Target value: 6.7 V +/- 0.8 V, adjustable with R414 on the LMNE amplifier board.
1.2. Resistive gain
This volumetric adjustment defines the size of the cells counted through the micro aperture of the LMNE
flowcell.
Target value: 53 +/-2, adjustable with R136, located on the mother board.
Technical Manual
RAS336F - 2 RAA022
1.3. LMNE Abs. gain
Focal position of the LMNE flowcell.

This adjustment defines the position of the LMNE flowcell between the emission gun, where the light is sent by
the lamp, and the reception gun, where the light is received by the cell of the LMNE amplifier board.
Lamp Emission gun LMNE flowcell Reception gun
LMNE ABS
LMNE amplifier
board cell
1.4. Average time of transfer (transfer time)
Duration between the resistive detection of the cell in the micro aperture (1) and the absorbance detection of
the cell in the optical flow (2). The duration is defined by the height of the optical flowcell, adjustable with
gauges.
Gauges
2. Requirements
Before any adjustment, ensure that:
- The pneumatic circuit functions correctly.
- The transfer time is correct.
- The RA# on normal human fresh blood is correct (Refer to Section 4, 3. Raw counts, page 4-24). A correct
RA# is around 90% of the number of WBC counted in the WBC chamber.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS336F - 3
3. LMNE Flowcell adjustment check.
Never dismantle the emission gun or even unlock it. The adjustment is factory made and cannot be
performed on the field.
■ Remove the covers (Refer to RAS342D: Front

panel & covers dismantling), and then unscrew
the cover of the optical bench.
■ Goto "Service > Super User Menu >

Hydraulic System > Clean Cycles".
■ Press"Rinse Cytometer" to get rid of the air
bubbles stuck to the inner optical surfaces.
■ Check that the flowcell contains no or very few
air bubbles.
■ Goto "Service > Technician Menu >

Measurement > LMNE Adjustment".
■ Mix the RBC/PLT latex thoroughly.
■ Press "Run LMNE Adjustment".
Technical Manual
RAS336F - 4 RAA022
■ Remove the cap of the latex vial.

■ Place the RBC/PLT latex vial in the appropriate
tube holder position.
■ Closethe tube holder when the following pop-
up window appears:
■ When the optical bench is well adjusted:
■ Check that the displayed values are within the range in the following table.
Parameter Target Value Range

LMNE res. 53 51 to 55
LMNE Abs. 170 Set to maximum
LMNE Transfer 200 µs 150 µs to 250 µs
■ Ifthe values are out of range or if you want a better adjustment, follow the LMNE flowcell position adjustment
procedure.
4. LMNE flowcell position adjustment

air bubbles.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS336F - 5
■ Visually check the position of the optical

flowcell.
■ If
necessary, use the lateral screw (A) to adjust A
the lateral position.
Always perform this adjustment in a counterclockwise motion. If you have not reached a correct
adjustment, turn the screw clockwise and start turning counterclockwise again to obtain the best
adjustment.
■ The space between the emission gun and the

optical flowcell should be around 3 mm (this
can be checked using a 3 mm hexagonal key).
3 mm
■ If
necessary, adjust this position by turning the
axial toothed wheel (B). B
adjustment.

■ Closethe tube holder when the following
screen appears:
Technical Manual
RAS336F - 6 RAA022
■ Connecta voltmeter between TP55 (ground)

and TP53 on the optical bench amplifier board.
■ During the cycle, adjust the LMNE lamp voltage
to 6.7 V +/- 0.8 V by turning the R414
potentiometer located on this board.
J34 J23
R148
TP45
Optical Gain
RBC/PLT
LMNE
■ If
necessary, adjust the Resistive gain (LMNE
Resistive Gain
RES) to 53 +/-2 by turning R136 located on the PLT RBC
Resistive Threshold
TP39
Otpical Threshold
mother board. TP19
TP4 TP2
R159 TP13 TP12
Threshold
R160
R136
R161
TP3 TP56 Threshold
R158
TP24 TP17 TP33 TP16
TP31
TP18 TP36 TP54 R133 TP27
R135
TP44 TP23 TP22 Gain Gain
A
■ First, turn the lateral screw (A) to obtain a stable
transfer on the LMNE adjustment screen.
■ Turn
the axial toothed wheel (B) to obtain the
maximal absorbance. B
■ Adjust the lateral screw (A) again, then the axial
toothed wheel (B) to get a better absorbance.
■ If
necessary, press "Run LMNE Adjustment"
again.
■ Run several cycles on normal human fresh blood and check if the CO% (Refer to Section 4, 3. Raw counts,
page 4-24) can be increased by slightly turning the axial toothed wheel (B).
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS336F - 7
5. Final adjustment
Check and adjust the matrix position as follows:
■ Select the raw counts:
- ABX Pentra 80: Go to "Settings > System > Printer" and select "raw".
- ABX Pentra XL80: Go to "Settings > System > Printer" and select "raw", and then press "Print/Send" and
select "Print the run and raws in full page for selected rows".
■ Run 5 different normal human fresh blood samples and print the results.
■ Check the raw count on the printout (Refer to Section 03, 3.Raw counts):
- RA #: Number of cells counted. The RA# allows you to check the integrity of the pneumatical circuit from
the sampling needle to the LMNE flowcell. If the RA# is lower than the expected value (around 90% of the
WBC number), check the pneumatic circuit.
- CO%: Percentage of cells crossing the flowcell in the correct time (transfer time) between the aperture and
the optical measurement. A correct CO% should be > 95%.
- DIFF#: Number of impacts in LYM + MON + NEU + EOS population areas
■ Check the position of the populations on the matrix: the populations must be correctly placed in
their respective zone (box), without flags.
■ Check that the ALY and LIC values are as low as possible (average maximum 1.3%).
■ Check that no alarms are triggered.
Optical axis
■ If necessary, adjust the matrix position:
Resistivity axis
1- Resistive gain adjustment:
- The resistive gain is set by R136 on the mother board.
- According to the resistive gain adjustment, populations of cells will move along the resistive axis in different
proportions according to the population:
- If the resistive gain is increased, cell populations will move to the right of the matrix.
- If the resistive gain is decreased, cell populations will move to the left of the matrix.
A good adjustment is obtained when the Lymphocyte population is correctly centered in the LYM box.
2- Optical gain adjustment:

- The optical gain is set by R148 on the mother board.
- According to the optical gain adjustment, populations of cells will move along the optical axis in different
- If the optical gain is increased, cell populations will move upward on the matrix.
- If the optical gain is decreased, cell populations will move downward on the matrix.
Technical Manual
RAS336F - 8 RAA022
A good adjustment is obtained when the Lymphocyte population is close to the NL threshold.
■ Run the 5 normal human blood samples again to check the correct adjustment of the matrix.
6. Transfer time adjustment

■ Run this procedure in case the transfer time is out of range (target value: between 150 ms and 250 ms).
■ Incase of replacement of an optical flowcell, a gauge set may be necessary to adjust the transfer time.
This gauge set (GBG264A) is now available as service parts.
Before adjusting the height of the flowcell, make sure the other parameters are correct (lamp voltage,
resistive gain, LMNE Abs. gain).
■ After replacing the optical flowcell, remove a

gauge from the set if the transfer time is too
short.
■ Ifthe transfer time is too long, add a gauge
from the set.
Each gauge equals approximately 10 µs.
■ To add or remove a gauge, first remove the two

fixations.
■ Remove a gauge from the set.
■ Re-install the set, and then block it with the
fixations.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS336F - 9
■ Put the optical bench cover back.

■ Perform the LMNE flowcell position adjustment procedure again.
Technical Manual
RAS336F - 10 RAA022
RAS337D
LMNE balance adjustment
■ Concerns
■ LMNE Balance calibration and forced calibration
■ Required tools
■ None
■ Fresh and normal blood samples (5 different
samples at least)
■ 15 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.

If you suspect the instrument is not perfectly clean, perform a concentrated cleaning procedure.
■ Go to "Service/Technician Menu/Others/LMNE Calibration".
■ Prepare a minimum of five different human blood samples without WBC alarm.
■ Press "STAT Mode".
■ When the following screen appears, place one

of the tubes in the tube holder.
■ Close the tube holder.
■ When the analysis cycle ends, the first results are displayed on the result chart table.
■ When the tube holder opens, run another specimen. Repeat this action until you obtain a minimum of 5
different results.
At least 5 results are necessary to calibrate the LMNE balance.
Technical Manual
RAS337D - 2 RAA022
■ Selectresults that you want to include in the statistical calculation by selecting the check boxes in the "Sel"
column.
■ To discard a result from the statistical calculation, deselect the check box.
■ Press "Automatic Calibration" to apply the new calibration coefficient.
■ When the following screen appears, press

"OK".
■ The new LMNE Balance coefficient is applied to the instrument.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS337D - 3
The LMNE balance coefficient can be modified from the software.

Press "Calibration Coefficients", change the LMNE value, then press "Accept Values".
Technical Manual
RAS337D - 4 RAA022
RAS338D
Tube holder adjustment
■ Concerns
■ Tube holder general view

■ Tube holder assembly replacement
■ Tube holder adjustments
■ Needle adjustment
■ Adjustment check
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ None
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Tube holder assembly: XDA728A

the operations.
1. Tube holder assembly replacement

■ Remove the 2 front doors.
■ Push the electro-magnet axis to free and open the tube holder.
■ Remove the tube holder.
■ Cut the 2 tyraps and disconnect the electro-magnet switch.
■ Before dismantling the tube holder, mark the location of the tube holder support with a pen (Example: Red
lines).
■ Unscrew the 2 fixation screws.
■ Remove the tube holder assembly.

■ Install the new tube holder assembly at the same place (use the marks previously done).
■ Gently tighten the tube holder fixations screws.
■ Reconnect the electro-magnet switch and replace the tyraps.
■ Pushthe tube holder door so that it reaches its

sampling position.
■ Checkthat the tube holder axis support
touches the rail behind.
■ If necessary, adjust the position of the tube holder assembly by mean of the 2 screws to get a correct
adjustment.
Technical Manual
RAS338D - 2 RAA022
2. Tube holder adjustments

■ Switch the instrument on and log in as a technician.
■ Go to "Services > Technician Menu > Gains > M.D.S.S. Adjustment > Holder Adjustment" and press
"Control".
■ Put the tube holder back, then close the door

and check that the needle is correctly centered
in one of the tube holder sampling hole
(Position 1 for example).
■ Ifnot, adjust the tube holder position as

follows:
- Untighten the 2 screws of the tube holder axis
support.
- Adjust the tube holder axis support in order to
obtain a correct position of the tube holder and
the needle.
- When done, gently tighten the 2 screws.
- Open the tube holder.
- Tighten the 2 screws and check the
adjustment again.
- Repeat until you obtain a correct adjustment.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS338D - 3
■ The tube holder must have a little play (about

1 mm) after the sampling position. If not, the
tube holder may not open correctly. Check that
there is such a play.
■ If
necessary, adjust the tube holder locker to
obtain a correct play.
Without this play, the tube holder may not open correctly because of the tube cap.
■ Tighten the locker screws when the adjustment is correct.
Technical Manual
RAS338D - 4 RAA022
3. Needle adjustment
There is a high risk of damaging the needle if the teflon part of the needle comes into contact with
the tube holder.
When the adjustment of the tube holder is completed, adjust the "Tube Holder Position" to obtain a correct
needle sampling position.
■ Go to "Services > Technician Menu > Gains > M.D.S.S. Adjustment > Holder Adjustment" and press
"Control".
The needle moves down to the level of a tube position.
■ Gently press and turn the tube holder.
■ Check that the needle is as close as possible to the tube holder surface, without any actual contact.
■ Turn the tube holder to its initial position.
- If the adjustment is correct, press "OK". The needle moves up.
- If not, press "OK". The needle moves up and you can modify the number of steps in "Tube Holder Position".
Increase the number of steps if the needle is above the tube holder, decrease the number of steps if it is too
low inside the tube holder.
■ Press "Accept Values" and press "Control" again.
4. Opening speed adjustment

■ Go to "Services > Super User Menu > Mechanical System > Holder Adjustment".
■ Press "Holder Open Time".
■ Close the tube holder.
■ Once the tube holder is opened, a value is displayed in the "Time" field.
■ This value must range between 700 ms and 800 ms.
■ If
not, adjust the spring’s tightness using the
CHC screw to obtain the correct value, then
repeat the same steps as before.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS338D - 5
5. Adjustment check
■ Once all the adjustments have been carried out, make sure all the screws have been tightened properly.
■ Run a few samples in STAT mode to check that the tube holder operates correctly.
Technical Manual
RAS338D - 6 RAA022
RAS339D
Power supply replacement
■ Concerns
■ Instrument dismantling: Power supply
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ None
■ 30 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Power supply: DBN006B

the operations.

power supply cable.
■ Remove the covers (Refer to RAS342D: Front
panel & covers dismantling).
■ Lift the bar up by unscrewing the right screw.
■ Disconnect the supply connector on the power

supply.
■ Unscrew the 2 front screws of the power

supply.
Technical Manual
RAS339D - 2 RAA022
■ Unscrew the 2 back screws of the power

supply.
■ Remove the power supply.

■ Reassemble by following the previous steps in reverse order.
■ Check the following voltages on the mother board.
Test point Designation Target

TP40 +5 V Power supply +5 V
TP43 -15 V Power supply -15 V
J16 J17
J30
R151
DS5 TP52
TP47 DS7
J29
R177 R171 R78
DS6 TP48
U70
J18 J14
J41
U74 DS8
TP68 TP46
DS9
J28
J37
DS10
TP67
J4
TP42 TP40 TP41 TP43
J27
J15 J13 DS11 DS12 DS13 DS14

E2
J47
+24V +5V +15V -15V
TP50
TP51 J5
J33
DS1
DS15 DS16 J45
J31
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS339D - 3
Technical Manual
RAS339D - 4 RAA022
RAS340D
Check up after intervention
■ Concerns
Check up and control of the instrument accuracy:

■ Repeatability
■ Calibration
■ Control
■ Required tools
■ None
■ Freshand normal blood samples
■ Calibrationblood samples
■ Control blood
■ 45 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. Repeatability

If you suspect the instrument is not perfectly clean, perform a concentrated cleaning procedure.
The measurement of repeatability is based on a set of 10 results obtained from the consecutive analyses of the
same blood sample.
This procedure can be performed either on CBC or DIFF analyses, with a limitation of 35 results per test.
Beyond the 35th result, data generated from the latest analysis will be disregarded.
Note that some results may be automatically rejected. In that case, a dialog box informs the user.
■ From "Quality Assurance", press "Within Run" and run several samples in DIFF mode. Check that the
obtained coefficients of variation are within the following limits.
Parameter %CV Test Level

WBC < 2% at 10 x 103/µL
RBC < 2% at 5 x 106/µL
HGB < 1% at 15 g/dL
HCT < 1% at 45%
PLT < 5% at 300 x 103/µL
2. Calibration
Calibration is used to determine the values of the calibration coefficients in order to calibrate the instrument
with known result samples.
■ From "Quality Assurance" press "Calibration".
■ Select the calibrator lot number you are going to use for calibration in the left area of the window.
■ If the calibrator is not listed, create it.
■ Press "Target" and check that the target values are correct. If not, press "Edit", scan your current calibrator
barcode with the barcode reader (or manually enter the target values supplied within the calibrator leaflet),
then confirm by pressing "OK". Exit the "Target Values" by pressing "Return".
■ Prepare the calibrator according to the specific instructions detailed in the calibrator package insert
(temperature, mixing, etc.).
■ Press "STAT Mode", open the calibrator vial and place it in the tube holder.
■ Close the tube holder door.
■ When the tube holder opens, remove the vial and recap it.
Risk of erroneous results if the calibrator is not continuously mixed between each analysis.
In order to obtain a correct calibration, it is recommended to sample the calibrator at least 5 times.
Technical Manual
RAS340D - 2 RAA022
■ When the analysis cycle ends, the results are displayed in the result grid. Run the calibrator at least 4 more
times.
In the event that the results show an analysis fault or a reject, the result is not stored. An error
message advising to reject the result is diplayed.
■ To discard a result from the statistical calculation, deselect the check box in the "Sel" column to remove the
result from the statistical calculation.
■ If the coefficient of variation is within the limits, and if the percentage difference between the target and the
mean value is less than 20, the instrument allows an automatic calibration. Press "Automatic Calibration" to
calculate the new coefficients, and then press "OK" to confirm and apply the new coefficients of calibration.
You may need to force the calibration sometimes in order to enter the new coefficients when
the instrument is very far from its normal range. A warning message will prompt you to
confirm. You must then validate and perform a control of the instrument.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS340D - 3
3. Control
■ Run several controls to check and validate the calibration. When using ABX Difftrol or ABX Minotrol Retic, use
the floppy disk or a USB key to update the lot parameters.
■ Select the "Reserved" check box to link the lot number to the QC results for further analyses.
It may take a few moments for the USB key to be recognized by the computer.
4. RET parameters (Pentra XLR only)

■ Run analyses on the 3 levels of ABX Minotrol Retic.
■ Check that the PIC, the MFI and the RET% values are all within limits.
If not, refer to RAS735D: RET optical bench and perform the 3 following procedures:
- RET adjustment check
- RET adjustment
- RET matrix adjustment with control blood.
RET latex (P/n: LAD012AS) is required for the RET adjustment.
Technical Manual
RAS340D - 4 RAA022
RAS341E
Optical bench dismantling & replacement

(ABX Pentra 80 / ABX Pentra XL80 only)
■ Concerns
Optical bench:
■ Dismantling
■ Replacement
■ Control
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Dynamometric screwdriver A302, A301, A300
■ Torx keys
■ None
■ 30 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Lamp adjustment tool: XDB302AS

the operations.
1. Optical bench dismantling

■ Disconnect the power supply cable.
■ Remove the left-hand side panel and the top cover to access the optical bench.
■ Disconnect the following cables from the

optical bench: ground cable, ground fitting
cable and signal cable.
■ Disconnect the following tubes from the LMNE

syringe:
- Inlet 1
- Inlet 2
■ Disconnect the following tubes from the valves:
- Valve 1, inlet 1
- Valve 4, inlet 2
■ Disconnectthe optical bench lamp power

supply connector.
Technical Manual
RAS341E - 2 RAA022
As the electronic devices are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges (ESD), the use of an antistatic
kit is mandatory during boards handling/dismantling.
■ Unscrew the 2 screws maintaining the board.

■ Disconnect and remove the optical bench
board.
■ Untighten the 4 fixation screws (silent blocks)

of the optical bench on the frame.
■ Remove the optical bench with its silent blocks.
(the LMNE amplifier board should be removed
on the picture).
■ Locate the new optical bench and tighten the silent blocks (about 4 turns).
Do not tighten the silent blocks too much, and make sure that the optical bench cannot be lifted.
■ Re-connect all the tubings and wirings in the reverse order.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS341E - 3
2. Optical bench control
2.1. Emission gun position control
■ Remove the optical bench cover.
■ Check that the gap between the emission gun

and the flowcell is around 3 mm.
Be carefull not to damage the flowcell nor the emission gun with the hexagonal key.
This adjustment is factory made and must not be changed.
Technical Manual
RAS341E - 4 RAA022
2.2. Optical bench lamp alignement control
(Refer to Lamp height check)
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS341E - 5
3. Lamp replacement
■ Switch the instrument off and wait for the lamp to cool down for at least 10 minutes.
Do not touch the bulb with your fingers. This would reduce significantly the shelf life of the lamp. In
case of finger contact, clean the bulb with a solution of 90% alcohol and a soft paper.

■ Remove the left-hand side panel, the right cover and the top cover to access the optical bench.
■ Disconnect the optical bench lamp power supply connector.
■ Loosen the 2 CHC screws of the lamp holder.
■ Turn the lamp holder, and then remove the lamp and the holder from the optical bench.
Holder
■ Remove the holder from the lamp.
■ Install the holder on the new lamp.

■ Install the lamp and holder on the optical bench then tighten the 2 CHC screws.
Technical Manual
RAS341E - 6 RAA022
3.1. Lamp adjustment
Before starting the adjustment, make sure there are no air bubbles in the flowcell. If there are, go to
"Service > Super User Menu > Hydraulic System > Clean Cycles" and press "Rinse Cytometer" to clean
the flowcell.
3.1.1. Lamp height check
■ Loosen the 2 screws of the LMNE amplifier

board and lift the small plate.
■ Disconnect
the coaxial cable and remove the
LMNE amplifier board.
■ Remove the 2 screws.
■ Screw the first part of the adjustment tool in

place using the appropriate fixation screws
attached to the tool.
■ Set the second part of the adjustment tool on
the first part.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS341E - 7
■ Check the position of the lamp using the

adjustment tool.
The width of the top part (a) and the width of the
bottom part (b) of the light must be the same.
■ If the adjustment is not correct, perform the Lamp height adjustment procedure.
3.1.2. Lamp height adjustment
■ If
the image is too low, decrease the distance
between the bench and the lamp holder.
■ If
the image is too high, increase the distance
To do so:
■ Check the distance between the bench and the lamp holder.
■ Use the measured distance and your observation to estimate the thickness of the gauges required.
■ Loosen the small screw on the side of the lamp

assembly using a 2 mm hexagonal key.
Technical Manual
RAS341E - 8 RAA022
■ Insert the appropriate gauges (supplied with

the adjustment tool) between the lamp holder
and the optical bench on each side to adjust the
height of the lamp.
Add gauges until the the light is centered in the
circle.
■ Make sure you have the same height on each
side of the lamp holder plate. For example, use
a 0.9 mm gauge on one side, and a 0.8 mm
gauge + a 0.1 mm gauge on the other side.
■ Perform the Lamp orientation adjustment procedure when you have found the correct gauges.
3.1.3. Lamp orientation adjustment

■ Push the lamp holder down and turn the lamp until the light is as homogeneous as possible.
■ Once you have found the correct position of the lamp, push the lamp holder down and tighten the small screw
on the side of the lamp assembly.
■ Remove the gauges and check the adjustment again.
■ Re-assemble the LMNE amplifier board.
■ Adjust the lamp voltage to 6.7 V +/- 0.8 V with the R414 potentiometer on the LMNE amplifier board.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS341E - 9
Technical Manual
RAS341E - 10 RAA022
RAS342D
Front panel & covers dismantling
■ Concerns
■ Front panel & covers dismantling
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ None
■ 30 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.

■ Pull the front left cover down (1), then remove it

2
(2).
■ Pull the front right cover down (1), then remove

it (2).
2
■ Unlockthe captive screws by using the

screwdriver counterclockwise.
Technical Manual
RAS342D - 2 RAA022
■ Remove the right-hand side cover by

unscrewing the 9 CHC M4X8.
One of the screws is at the rear of the instrument, with a washer.
■ Open the reagent cover (lift up, then pull it slowly down).
■ Remove it with the reagent cover hinge by

unscrewing the 3 CHC M4X8 screws and the 2
CHC M3X6 screws with their washers.
■ Remove the left side cover by unscrewing the 6

CHC M4X6.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS342D - 3
■ Remove
the left panel by unscrewing the 2
CHC M4X6 at the front and loosening the 2
CHC M4X6 at the rear.
■ Removethe loading tray by unscrewing the 2

CHC M4X6 (A) and 1 FHC M4X6 and loosening
1 CHC M4X6 (B). 1
2
To remove the loading tray, open the 2 slides, then lift the tray from the rear to the front. Take
care not to damage the switches.
■ Remove the 4 reagent bottles (disconnect the tubes from the stoppers).
■ Remove the bottle recuperation tray.
■ Remove
the reagent plate by loosening the 4
CHC M4X6 screws.
Technical Manual
RAS342D - 4 RAA022
■ Remove
the bottle support by loosening the 4
CHC M4X6 screws.
■ Remove the motor board protection 1 by

loosening the 2 CHC M4X6 screws.
■ Remove the motor board protection 2 by

loosening the CHC M4X6 screw.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS342D - 5
■ Remove the ejection tray by unscrewing the 2

CHC M4X6 screws and the 2 FHC M4X6
screws, and by disconnecting the "Unloading
area full" switch.
■ Remove the upper cover by unscrewing the 6 CHC M4X6 screws: 2 on the right side, 2 on the left side and 3
at the rear of the instrument.
Technical Manual
RAS342D - 6 RAA022
RAS343D
Internal barcode reader adjustment
■ Concerns
■ Adjustment of the internal barcode reader.

■ Barcode configuration
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ None
■ 15 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. Barcode reader adjustment check

■ Remove the covers (refer to RAS342D: Front panel & covers dismantling).
■ Loada rack with 2 tubes fitted with the same large barcode sticker in position 1 and 2, to check the correct
barcode reading operation.
■ Go to "Service > Technician Menu > Gains > Sampler Adjustment".
■ Put the rack on the loading tray.
■ Press "Barcode Reader Adjustment".
■ The rack is moving in front of the barcode reader and the cycle starts.
■ At the end of the cycle, the rack label reading zone must be within the bargraph zone.
Tube 2 reading zone Rack label reading zone Tube 1 reading zone
Bargraph zone
The tube reading zone depends on the label width and condition. If there is reflection, the reading
zone may be in several parts.
Technical Manual
RAS343D - 2 RAA022
2. Barcode reader adjustment

■ If the rack label reading zone is not within the bargraph zone, free the barcode reader support plate by
loosening the two M3x6 CHC screws, then move it to adjust the reading position.
To reach the screws, there are two holes in the stripper plate.
The angle between the barcode reader and the label to be read must always be the same. The
barcode reader support plate purpose is only to move to the left or to the right.
■ When you are in front of the system:

- If the rack label reading zone is on the right, pull the barcode reader on the ejection tray side.
- If the rack label reading zone is on the left, push the barcode reader on the loading tray side.
■ Press "Barcode Reader Adjustment" and check the rack label reading zone position.
■ Repeat this procedure until you obtain the correct adjustment.
Striper plate
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS343D - 3
3. Barcode configuration
3.1. Typology and Ckeck Digit
Several standards of barcode labels with different encoding are available. According to the model of the
barcode used by the laboratory, it is necessary to define the settings of the read characters.
Following are the barcode standards that are the most largely used in laboratories:
- Code 2 of 5 interleaved
- Code 39
- Code 128
- Codabar
Among those typologies, some can be used with or without the check digit. The check digit is an added
encoding digit, located on the right part of the code, and corresponds to an algorithm returned value that
checks the integrity of the barcode reading.
The check digit is optional and is defined by the administrator of the barcode label edition software.
3.2. Barcode configuration
Before configuring the barcode, it is necessary to know the barcode models used in the laboratory and to note
the typology and the check digit exploitation.
Example:
1- Note the label models used in the laboratory as shown:
t
Laboratory XXX
Typology Check digit
Code 2 of 5 interleaved No
Code 128 Yes
Codabar Yes
2- Log in as Technician while starting the application.

3- Open the "Technician/Others" screen and perform the setting adjustment as follows:
- Open tab 1.
- Select "Code type = 2/5 Interleaved".
- Select "Check Digit = None".
- Confirm by pressing "Accept values".
Technical Manual
RAS343D - 4 RAA022
- Open tab 2.
- Select "Code type = Code 128".
- Select "Check Digit = Not transmitted".
- Open tab 3.
- Select "Code type = Codabar".
- Select "Check Digit = Not transmitted".
3.3. Settings parameters meaning
■ Code Type:
This parameter is set according to the barcode typology used in the laboratory. If several barcode labels are
used, each one must be defined in one of the tabs available onscreen.
■ Code length:
The recommended value is "01-16".
■ Reading direction:
Cannot be configured. It means that the label is readable whatever its position on the tube (right-to-left or left-
to-right).
■ Check Digit:
This parameter is set according to the barcode typology used in the laboratory.
■ None:
Must be checked if the barcode model is "without Check Digit".
■ Transmit:
Must not be used.
■ Not transmitted:
Must be checked if the barcode model is "with Check Digit".
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS343D - 5
■ Transmit Start/Stop:
Must be set on "Disabled".
■ Codabar Start/Stop Char.:
Disabled when "Transmit Start/Stop" is disabled.
3.4. Troubleshooting
1- Labels are never read:

- Check that the label is readable.
- Check that there is a white gap of at least 3 or 4 millimeters before the first bar and after the last one.
- Check that the typology of the label used has been defined in the "Service > Technician Menu > Others"
menu.
- Check that the label is with "Check Digit" and that it has been defined as "Check Digit: Not transmitted".
2- Labels are read, but an additional digit appears on the right side:
- Label includes "Check Digit", but the option has been defined as "None".
Technical Manual
RAS343D - 6 RAA022
RAS344G
External barcode reader configuration
■ Concerns
■ External barcode reader test and configuration.
■ Required tools
■ None
■ None
■ 15 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. XBA453D (1209114453) PS2 Barcode Reader
1.1. Barcode reader configuration check
■ Check that the barcode reader is working properly by means of the reading test.
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (no check digit control)
with C.D. without C.D.
1224488 121314151617
reading12244881 reading 121314151617
CODE 39 (no check digit control)
with C.D.
reading 12345ABCDE
without C.D.
reading 12345ABCDEW
CODE 128 (control without check digit transmission)
12345abcde QWERTY
12345ABCDE azerty
CODABAR (no equality control between start/stop character)
37859 123456/$
reading 37859 reading 123456/$
Technical Manual
RAS344G - 2 RAA022
1.2. Barcode reader setup
■A beeping sound occurs after each reading. Read all the labels from top to bottom and from left to right.
■ When the last label is read, check the test labels once more.
For the code I2 of 5, it is mandatory to hold the reader in order to read the entire code and avoid a
bad interpretation.
■ If the reading test has failed for the DATALOGIC reader, proceed to the barcode setup as follows:
Enter or Exit Configuration
KBD-AT-ALT
Global Suffix : NULL
GS1-AIM ID : Disable, Do not transmit GS1-128 labels
Code 39 Set Length
I 2 of 5 Set Length
Code 128 Set Length
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS344G - 3
Codabar Enable, Set Length
Codabar ST-SP Char not Xmit
UPC-A & UPC-E Disable
EAN 8 & EAN 13 Disable
Technical Manual
RAS344G - 4 RAA022
2. 1300011892 USB Barcode Reader
■ Never type data with the external keyboard when reading barcode label with the external barcode
reader. Risk of erroneous data entries!
■ Never use a PS2 keyboard at the same time as the external barcode reader (connected on the USB
port). Risk of erroneous data entries!
■ Never connect external barcode reader on PS2 port.
■ Check that the barcode reader is working properly by means of the reading test.
■ If the reading test has failed for the DATALOGIC reader, proceed to the barcode setup as follows:
USB-KBD-ALT
Global Suffix : NULL
GS1-AIM ID : Disable, Do not transmit GS1-128 labels
Code 39 Set Length
I 2 of 5 Enable, Four Reads
I 2 of 5 Set Length
Code 128 Set Length
Codabar Enable, Set Length
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS344G - 5
Codabar ST-SP Char not Xmit
UPC-A & UPC-E Disable
EAN 8 & EAN 13 Disable
Technical Manual
RAS344G - 6 RAA022
RAS345D
Heater assy replacement
■ Concerns
■ Replacement of the reagent heating system.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ None
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ XDA625AS

the operations.
1. Heater assy dismantling

■ Remove the covers and open the right-hand side panel (Refer to RAS342D: Front panel & covers dismantling).
■ Remove the lower part of thermostatic room.
■ Refer to RAS516B: Takasago valve assembly dismantling for more information on how to access the chamber.
■ From the chamber assy, disconnect the following tubes:

- Rinse chamber: Inlets 1 & 2
- Dil1/HGB chamber: Inlet 2
- LMNE/RET chamber: Inlet 4 (leave the detection cell connected to the LMNE/RET chamber)
- RBC chamber: Inlet 2
- WBC/BASO chamber: Inlets 1 & 4
■ Untighten the 2 heater fixation screws.

■ Unscrew the 5 chamber assembly fixation
screws.
Technical Manual
RAS345D - 2 RAA022
■ Unscrew the CTN fixation screw from the

heater.
■ Disconnect
all the tubes after making sure that
you know where each tube goes.
■ Disconnect the CTN from the main board plug

in J31.
■ Remove the heater.
2. Heater replacement
Install the new heater in the same way, in reverse order.
■ Use sleevings when necessary (for the tubes connected to the heater, for example).
■ Make sure that all the tubes are connected.
■ Enter the new CTN value and adjust the heating coil temperature after replacement.
■ When the new heater is installed, start the instrument and check that there are no leaks.
■ Enter the new CTN value (Follow the RAS333E: Temperature adjustment procedure).
■ Check and adjust the MDSS adjustment (Follow the RAS329D: Chambers adjustment procedure).
■ Complete a rinse cycle then prime all reagents.
■ Perform the RAS340D: Check up after intervention procedure in order to ensure that the instrument works
properly.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS345D - 3
Technical Manual
RAS345D - 4 RAA022
RAS346D
Mixer replacement
■ Concerns
■ Replacement of the mixer system.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Threadlocking: LAX003A
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ PC extension cable: XEA723AS
■ Mixerassembly: XDA972B
■ Grabber assembly: XDA973AS

the operations.
Mixer replacement
1. Mixer assembly dismantling

■ Switch the instrument off, remove the power supply cable then remove the covers (Refer to RAS342D: Front
panel & covers dismantling).
■ Remove the internal PC (Refer to RAS348D: Internal PC replacement) and install the XEA723AS extension
cable kit.
1.1. Top sampler transfer rail dismantling
■ Before dismantling, mark with a pen the location of the rail on its support.
Unscrew the 4 CHC screws and remove the rail.
1.2. Reagent syringe dismantling
■ Loosen the 4 CHC screws to free the silent blocks.
Technical Manual
RAS346D - 2 RAA022
Mixer replacement
■ Pushthe block to the left with the tubes still

connected.
1.3. Plastic protection
■ Remove the plastic protection located under

the mixer by unscrewing the CHC screw.
1.4. Mixer disconnection
■ Follow the RAS332D: Motor board adjustment procedure to access the motor board.
■ On the motor board, disconnect the following connectors:
- J19 (µstep motor)
- J22 (tube mixer motor home)
- J23 (grabber status)
- J21 (head locking solenoid)
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS346D - 3
Mixer replacement
1.5. Mixer assembly replacement
■ If
the instrument serial number is lower than P800154, find the mixer assembly location: mark the contour of
the mixer with a pen.
If the instrument serial number is higher than P800154, 2 squares are fixed on the support plate to keep the
location.
Never unscrew the squares. They are factory adjusted and that is the only way to keep the mixer
assembly position.
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws and carefully remove the mixer assembly.
Do not remove the wedge. The thickness of this wedge is factory calculated and associated with
this instrument to keep the correct distance between the mixer and the rack rails, apart from the
mixer assembly.
■ Write down the parameters written on the new mixer.

■ Install the new mixer assembly by following the previous steps in reverse order.
Technical Manual
RAS346D - 4 RAA022
Mixer replacement
2. Adjustments
If the instrument serial number is higher than P800154, no adjustments are necessary, except
entering the new movement values.
■ Plug the power supply cable then switch the instrument on.
■ Go to "Main Menu > Service > Technician Menu > Gains > Sampler adjustment".
■ In the "Mixer Mechanism Adjustment" window, enter the movement values (Move Forward 1, Open/Close
Grabbers / Move Back Home / Move Forward 2) noticed on the new mixer and previously written down.
The mixer adjustments are factory made and parameters are written on a label on the mixer body.
■ Press "Check Mixer":

The mixer runs the movements one by one.
■ Check each movement and press "Enter" after each of them to launch the next one.
If the serial number is lower than P800154, check the following grabber positions procedure.
■ Check the transfer mechanism home (Refer to RAS347D: Automatic sampler adjustment - 3.1.Transfer
Home).
■ Check the "First transfer" movement (Refer to RAS347D: Automatic sampler adjustment - 3.4.First Transfer).
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS346D - 5
Mixer replacement
■ Control the mixer vertical position as follow:

- Go to "Main Menu > Service > Technician Menu > Gains > Sampler adjustment".
- Press "Check mixer". The grabber moves forward with the grabbers open.
- Check the vertical position of the grabbers in relation to the rack: the lowest finger of the grabber must be
centered between the fingers of the rack. If it is not the case, loosen the 3 CHC mixer fixation screws then
adjust this position.
Grabber Rail
Rack
A
Side view
■ Control the horizontal position:

- To check the correct position of the grabber, place 2 tubes on the rack, position 7 and 9.
- Move the rack to have the left tracer in the notch number 10 of the rack.
- Go to "Main Menu > Service > Technician Menu > Gains > Sampler adjustment".
- Press "Check Mixer", the grabber moves forward with the grabbers open.
- Check the horizontal position of the grabbers in relation to the tubes: the tubes should be centered in the
grabbers. If it is not the case, loosen the 3 CHC mixer fixation screws then adjust this position.
Be careful not to move the vertical position previously adjusted.
Upper view
Grabber
9 8 7 6
Left tracer Rack
Technical Manual
RAS346D - 6 RAA022
Mixer replacement
3. Mixer grabber replacement
In case of grabber assy replacement, the screw (E) should be tightened using threadlocking
fluid (low strength LAX003A) to prevent mixer dysfunction.
The threadlocking fluid LAX003A is available for order (50 mL).
Procedure
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws (A)
■ Remove the plate (B).
■ Loosen the HC screw (E) and remove the grabber assy from the mixer axis.
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws (C).
■ Remove the white upper part (D).
■ Unscrew and remove the HC screw (E).
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS346D - 7
Mixer replacement
■ Put threadlocking fluid on this screw (E) and reinstall it without tightening.
■ Reinstall the white upper part (D) using the 3 CHC screws (C).
■ Reinstall the grabber assy on the mixer axis.
■ Make sure that the grabbers are closed and that the axis is situated in the front of the grabber assy.
Mixer axis at the

front grabber assy level
Grabber closed
■ Tighten the HC screw (E) on the mixer axis.

■ Reinstall the plate (B) using the 3 CHC screws (A).
Technical Manual
RAS346D - 8 RAA022
RAS347D
Automatic sampler adjustment
■ Concerns
■ Loading mechanism check & adjustment

■ Mixer mechanism check & adjustment
■ Transfer mechanism check & adjustment
■ Required tools
■ None
■ None
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. Loading mechanism check & adjustment

■ Remove the covers except for the loading tray and the ejection tray (Refer to RAS342D: Front panel & covers
dismantling).
■ Go to "Main Menu > Service > Technician Menu > Gains > Sampler Adjustment".
The following adjustments must be checked and performed in the following order.
Make sure not to damage the different switches by manually moving the racks.
1.1. Max Rack Loading
The Max Rack Loading value represents the maximum number of steps run by the slides to load a
rack. This number of steps must be superior to the number of steps necessary to load a rack,
without reaching a mechanical stop (noise) if there is no rack (to ensure the correct position of the
rack against the front plate).
This motion is never completed when there is a rack because it is stopped by the two switches.
■ Make sure there is no rack on the loading tray.

■ Press "Max Rack Loading".
■ When the motion has stopped, put a rack on the two slides against the front plate.
Technical Manual
RAS347D - 2 RAA022
■ The gap between the slides and the front plate (1) must be smaller than the thickness of the rack (2).
SLIDE
SLIDE SLIDE
SLIDE
RACK
RACK
22 1 1
front plate
■ Check the gap, then press "Validate".
- If the gap (1) is too small (mechanical stop, noise), decrease the "Max Rack Loading" value.
- If the gap (1) is too big, increase the "Max Rack Loading" value.
■ Repeat the procedure until you obtain the correct adjustment.
1.2. Stop Rack Loading
The Stop Rack Loading value represents the number of steps after the detection of the switches,
to ensure the correct rack position.
■ Put a rack on the loading tray, then press "Check Stop Rack".
■ When the motion has stopped, make sure that there is a bit of play between the slides, the rack and the front
plate.
■ Press the rack on the front plate, then check the play (1) between the rack and the slides. It must be around
0.5 mm.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS347D - 3
PRESS
SLIDE
1 SLIDE
RACK
front plate
Make sure that the motor does not loose steps (noise) when the slides touch the rack, because it
can return a little bit if the motion is too big.
- If the play (1) is too big: increase the Stop Rack Loading value.
- If the play (1) is too small: decrease the Stop Rack Loading value.
2. Mixer mechanism check & adjustment

■ The mixer adjustments are factory made and parameters are written on a label on the mixer body. They must
not be modified but, if necessary, follow the RAS346D: Mixer replacement procedure.
3. Transfer mechanism check & adjustment
The Transfer home value represents the offset of the Transfer carriage. Follow the procedure
in this order, because the First Transfer and the Rack Ejection depend on the Transfer Home.
Technical Manual
RAS347D - 4 RAA022
3.1. Transfer Home
■ On the side of a rack, mark the center position

of the hole with a pencil.
■ Put the rack on the loading tray, and adjust it to

the center, to have the same gap on the left and
on the right.
■ Press "Check Transfer Home".

■ Once the carriage has moved under the rack, gently push the finger up to check the position (using a
screwdriver or a pencil). The carriage finger must be adjusted in the center of the hole.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS347D - 5
Rack Hole
Carriage
Finger
At the end of the transfer carriage motion, the carriage motor is no longer supplied. Make sure it does
not move when you push the finger up.
■ Adjust the transfer home value to center the carriage finger into the hole of the rack:
- If the finger is on the right, increase the "Transfer Home" value.
- If the finger is on the left, decrease the "Transfer Home" value.
■ Press "Check Transfer Home" to check the position.
3.2. Stop Transfer
The Stop Transfer value represents the number of steps after the Stop Transfer switch detection.
After the transfer motion, you have only four seconds to check the position before the rack ejection.
Technical Manual
RAS347D - 6 RAA022
■ Press "Check Stop Transfer".

■ At the end of the transfer motion, before the ejection, make sure that there is a bit of play (around 0.5 mm)
between the mechanical stop (Ejection Tray side) and the rack.
Stop Transfer
RACK Switch
Ejection Tray
Play(~0.5 mm)
Make sure that the motor does not loose steps (noise) once the transfer motion has stopped.
- If the rack is too much on the right, decrease the "Stop Transfer" value.
- If the rack is too much on the left, increase the "Stop Transfer" value.
3.3. Rack Ejection
The Rack Ejection value is the number of steps run by the transfer carriage to move the
ejection assembly.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS347D - 7
■ Put one rack on the loading tray and nine racks in the ejection tray against the ejection stops to make sure
that it can push ten racks.
■ Press "Check Rack Ejection".
■ Once the cycle has ended, the rack must be out of the Ejection stops but the ejection assembly must not be
at the mechanical stop.
EJECTION STOPS
- If the rack is not out of the Ejection stops, increase the "Rack Ejection Value".
- If the rack is too much out of the Ejection stops, or at the mechanichal stop, decrease the "Rack Ejection
Value".
3.4. First Transfer
The "First Transfer" value represents the number of steps of the First Carriage motion. Other motions
are always the same, representing the space between two positions of tube on the rack.
Adjust this value to center the rack position under the two tracers (followers).

■ Press "Check Rack Transfer Movement".
The rack moves under the tracers (followers), then it runs 25 motions on the left and 25 on the right.
The following image shows the detection (A) and non-detection (B) zones of the tracer switches.
■ Increase or decrease the "First Transfer" value to center the non-detection zone (B) on the bargraph.
- If the non-detection zone is on the right, decrease the "First Transfer" value.
- If the non-detection zone is on the left, increase the "First Transfer" value.
■ Adjust it to have 9 +/-3 motions on each side of the middle bar.
■ The tracers (followers) position adjustments are factory made and the non-detection zone (B) width depends
on the tracers up and down position.
■ If you have to move the left tracer, for example during the mixer replacement, keep the right tracer as a
reference.
Technical Manual
RAS347D - 8 RAA022
A B A
Left tracer
Rack
Rack motion
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS347D - 9
Technical Manual
RAS347D - 10 RAA022
RAS348D
Internal PC replacement
■ Concerns
■ Dismantling of the internal PC
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal Keys
■ None
■ 10 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Refer to RAN326*

the operations.
1. PC dismantling
The PC hard disk may contains some user specific data (Worklist, Archives, etc.). If the PC is
replaced, this information will not be accessible.
Read the technical note included in the kit before replacing the PC assembly.
■ Remove the side and top covers of the instrument (Refer to RAS342D: Front panel & covers dismantling).
■ Disconnect the following accessories:

- Mouse
- Keyboard
- RS and Printer ports
- Local network
- Power supply
■ Disconnect the LED connector.
Technical Manual
RAS348D - 2 RAA022
■ Untighten the PC fixation screws.
■ Lift and carrefully remove the PC.
2. PC installation
■ Install the PC and tighten the fixation screws.
■ Connect the PC accessories.
■ Connect the LED connector.
■ Connect the power supply cable and start the instrument.
■ Log on and check that the instrument works properly.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS348D - 3
Technical Manual
RAS348D - 4 RAA022
RAS349D
PC Hard Disk replacement

(ABX Pentra 80 & ABX Pentra XL80)
■ Concerns
■ PC Hard Disk replacement
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal Keys
■ None
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Refer to RAN326: New PC assemblies for the
appropriate kit

the operations.
If possible, save and/or print the configuration before following this procedure (Refer to RAS357).
Read the technical note included in the kit before replacing the hard disk.
1. SATA Hard Disk

■ Remove the internal PC (Refer to RAS348D: Internal PC replacement).
■ Unscrew the 6 CHC M4x6 screws to remove the internal PC from the cover.
■ Make a mark, then remove the left angle plate

by unscrewing the 3 CHC M4x6 screws.
■ Unscrew the 4 CHC M3x6 and the 4 CHC M4x6 screws.
■ Disconnect the fan and remove the cover plate.
Technical Manual
RAS349D - 2 RAA022
■ Unscrew the 4 CHC M3x6 screws + M3

Washers and lift the "hard disk + CD-ROM drive
+ floppy reader" assy.
■ Disconnect the flat cable from the CD-ROM

drive.
■ Disconnect the FPC cable from the floppy disk reader.
Gently pull the brown part

of the connector up then
pull up the FPC flat cable.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS349D - 3
■ Disconnect the 2 Hard disk connectors from

the internal PC mother board and remove the
drive support with the hard disk, the floppy disk
drive and the CD-ROM drive.
■ Unscrew the 4 CHC M3x4 screws and remove

the drive support with the hard disk.
■ Return
the drive support and unscrew the 4
CHC M3x4 screws to free the hard disk.
Technical Manual
RAS349D - 4 RAA022
■ Remove the drive support and disconnect the

hard disk.
■ Change the hard disk.
■ The hard disk is formated and updated with the latest version of the software.
■ Ifthe instrument mother board EEPROM version is not compatible with the Hard disk software
version, it is necessary to load the new version by using the CD-ROM provided with the Hard disk
(please refer to the corresponding technical note to load the version).
Make sure that the blue band on the FPC cable (Floppy disk reader connector) is in the correct
position.
■ Restart the system and restore the configuration (Refer to RAS357E: Save and restore settings).
2. IDE Hard Disk

■ Remove the internal PC (Refer to RAS348D: Internal PC replacement).
■ Unscrew the 6 CHC M4x6 screws to remove the Internal PC from the cover.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS349D - 5
Do not remove the Left Angle Plate (A) in order to keep the PC/Cover adjustment.
Technical Manual
RAS349D - 6 RAA022

■ Unscrew the 4 CHC M3x6 screws + M3 Washers and lift the "Hard disk + CD-ROM Drive + Floppy Reader"
assy.
■ Disconnect the flat cable from the Hard Disk, and then from the CD-ROM Drive.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS349D - 7
■ Disconnect the FPC cable from the Floppy disk Reader, and remove the Drives Support with the Hard Disk,
Floppy Disk Reader and CD-ROM Reader.
Pull gently brown part of connector up (1).

1
Pull up FPC flat cable (2).
Blue band of
FPC cable in
this position

the Drives Support with the Hard Disk.
■ Turn
the Drives Support over and unscrew the
4 CHC M3x4 screws to free the Hard Disk.
Technical Manual
RAS349D - 8 RAA022
■ Remove the Drives Support.
■ Change the Hard Disk.
■ the Hard Disk is formated and updated with the latest version of the software.
■ Ifthe instrument mother board EEPROM version is not compatible with the Hard disk software
version, it is necessary to load the new version by using the CD-ROM provided with the Hard disk
(please refer to the corresponding technical note to load the version).
Make sure that the flat cable connector is correctly plugged into the Hard Disk in such a way that 4
pins are free, and that the blue band on the FPC cable (Floppy disk reader connector) is in the
correct position.
If you install a DVD drive (P/n: CBT021A) on CCC005L instead of the CD-ROM drive, make
sure you twist the flat cable so that the flat cable connector is inverted on the hard disk side.
Failing to do so will prevent the DVD drive from being functional.
■ Restart the system and restore the configuration (Refer to RAS357E: Save and restore settings).
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS349D - 9
Technical Manual
RAS349D - 10 RAA022
RAS351D
PC floppy disk reader replacement

■ Concerns
■ PC floppy disk reader replacement
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal Keys
■ None
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Floppy disk reader: CBT014A

the operations.
■ Remove the internal PC (See RAS348D: Internal PC replacement).

■ Make a mark and remove the left angle plate by

unscrewing the 3 CHC M4x6 screws.

Technical Manual
RAS351D - 2 RAA022

drive.

■ Disconnect the 2 Hard disk connectors from

reader and the CD-ROM reader.
■ Remove the drives support with the hard disk, the floppy disk reader and the CD-ROM reader.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS351D - 3
■ Unscrew the 4 CHC M2.5x6 then remove the

floppy disk reader.
■ Change the floppy disk reader (Reference: CBT014A) and reassemble in reverse order.
Make sure that the FPC cable is correctly plugged, with the blue band in the correct position.
No floppy drives are installed on the Pentra XLR. They are no longer installed on the new Pentra 80
range instruments either.
Technical Manual
RAS351D - 4 RAA022
RAS352D
PC CD-ROM drive replacement

■ Concerns
■ PC CD-ROM drive replacement
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal Keys
■ None
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ CD-ROM Drive: CBT013A or CBT018A
■ DVD Drive (CCC005L only): CBT021A

the operations.

■ Make a mark and remove the left angle plate by

unscrewing the 3 CHC M4x6 screws.

Technical Manual
RAS352D - 2 RAA022

drive.

■ Disconnect the two Hard disk connectors from

reader and the CD-ROM reader.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS352D - 3

the drive support with the hard disk.
■ Unscrew the 4 CHC M2.5x3 then remove the

floppy disk reader.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC M2x3 screws with 2.5 AZ washers (A) and remove the upper drives bracket.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC M3x4 with M3 washers (B) and remove the first lower drives bracket.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC M2x3 screws with 2.5 AZ washers (C) and remove the second lower drive bracket.
Technical Manual
RAS352D - 4 RAA022

the board from the CD-ROM drive (there is a nut
between the CD-ROM drive and the board).
■ Change the CD-ROM drive (Reference CBT013A or CBT018A) and reassemble in reverse order.
Make sure that the FPC cable is correctly plugged, with the blue band in the correct position.
Do not tighten the screws too much in order not to damage the CD-ROM drive.
If you install a DVD drive (P/n: CBT021A) on CCC005L instead of the CD-ROM drive, make
sure you twist the flat cable so that the flat cable connector is inverted on the hard disk side.
Failing to do so will prevent the DVD drive from being functional.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS352D - 5
Technical Manual
RAS352D - 6 RAA022
RAS353D
PC touch screen replacement
■ Concerns
■ PC Touch screen replacement
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal Keys
■ None
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ PC touch screen: XAA511BS

the operations.
1. Touch screen dismantling

■ Unscrew the 6 CHC M4x6 screws then remove the plate to access the interface board.
■ Disconnect the flat cable from the touch screen interface board.
Gently pull the black part of

the connector
up to free the flat cable
Depending on the instrument, different cases are possible:

■ The touch screen is fixed on the screen with double sided tape:
- It will be difficult to remove the touch screen without breaking it. Insert a thin blade between the touch screen
and the screen to remove it.
- Remove all the glue from the contour of the screen.
- Clean the screen.
■ The touch screen is fixed on the screen with 4 pieces of tape.

- Cut or remove the 4 pieces of tape then remove the touch screen.
- Clean the screen.
Technical Manual
RAS353D - 2 RAA022
2. New touch screen installation

■ Place the new touch screen on the screen, the flat cable should be on the right side.
On new instruments, a square located at the bottom of the screen allows you to keep the vertical
location of the touch screen.
■ Adjust the touch screen position to have its window centered with regards to the window of the screen.
■ Mount the touch screen using the tape included in the kit (cut 4 equal pieces).
The tape allows you to keep the touch screen in position before re-installing in the PC Cover.
■ Use a flat screwdriver to connect the flat cable on the interface touch screen board.
■ Do not forget to block the connector.
■ Put the plate back then fasten it using the 6 CHC screws.
■ Install the PC in its cover using the 6 CHC screws. Take care not to move the touch screen.
■ Install the PC on the instrument.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS353D - 3
3. Adjustment
■ Go to Menu > Service > Technician Menu > Others > System tools.
3.1. For the ABX Pentra 80
Press "Launch Windows Explorer".

Go to Start > Run then enter "Calwin.exe" in the window, and press "OK".
■A white window appears, with a red cross in the left upper corner.
■ Click on this cross, it will move to the next position.
■ Click the red cross for each position then press "Enter". The touch screen is calibrated.
3.2. For the ABX Pentra XL80 or the Pentra XLR
■ Press "Launch Windows Explorer".

■ Enter: C:\ FIDTSERV.
■ Launch Setup.exe, then Calwin.exe.
■A white window appears, with a red cross in the left upper corner.
■ Click on this cross, it will move to the next position.
■ Click the red cross for each position then press "Enter". The touch creen is calibrated.
Technical Manual
RAS353D - 4 RAA022
RAS354F
Instrument mother board replacement
■ Concerns
Replacement of the following PCBs:

■ XAA456 (1209102456)
■ XAA694 (1209102694/1209101694)
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal Keys
■ Voltmeter
■ None
■ 30 min
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ For ABX Pentra 80:
- XAA544* Kit
*: index according to the version number
■ For ABX Pentra XL80:

- XAA545* Kit
■ For Pentra XLR:

- XAA719* Kit

the operations.
Before changing a mother board, make sure that the analyzer settings are saved on a floppy disk,
or USB media or on the hard disk. If not, refer to RAS357E: Save and restore settings to save and/
or print the analyzer settings.
Read the technical note included in the kit before replacing the mother board.
1. Mother board Access

The mother board is located on the right-hand side of the instrument, at the rear.
■ Remove the right front cover, the thermic panel and the right side cover.
■ Remove the plastic protection by loosening the two CHC M4x6 Screws.
For further details, refer to procedure RAS342D: Front panel & covers dismantling.
Technical Manual
RAS354F - 2 RAA022
2. Mother board replacement

■ Carefully disconnect all the connectors from the mother board.
■ Unscrew the 9 CHC M4x 6 screws and remove the mother board.
XAA456 (1209102456) PCB XAA694 (1209101694/1209102694) PCB
■ Install the new mother board and tighten the 9 CHC M4x 6 screws.
■ Refer to RAS331E: Mother Board Adjustment to connect the connectors and adjust the mother board.
■ Restore the settings (Refer to RAS357E: Save and restore settings and follow the technical note included in
the kit).
It is very important to restore the settings after replacing the mother board. If you fail to do,
the system will not operate properly.
■ When the XAA694 (1209101694/1209102694) PCB is installed on a Pentra XL80, some

connectors remain un-used
■ For Pentra XLR only, make sure you also change the LMNE Delay value (set it to "175") and
the LMNE Window value (set it to "150") from Service > Technician Menu > Technical
Measurement > Pulse Adjustment
■ Put the covers back.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS354F - 3
Technical Manual
RAS354F - 4 RAA022
RAS355D
Motor board replacement
■ Concerns
■ Replacement of the motor electronic command

board.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Voltmeter
■ None
■ 30 min
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Motor board: XAA459BS

the operations.
1. How to access the motor board

The motor board is located under the sampler loader system on the left-hand side of the instrument.
■ Remove the motor board plastic protection (2 screws).
For more details about the dismantling of the instrument covers refer to RAS342D: Front panel & covers
dismantling.
2. Motor board dismantling

■ Carefully disconnect all the connectors from the motor board.
■ Unscrewthe 6 screws maintaining the board

and remove it.
Technical Manual
RAS355D - 2 RAA022
3. Motor board replacement

■ Install the new board and tighten the 6 fixation screws.
■ Connect all the connectors on the board.
■ Adjust the motor board (Refer to RAS332D: Motor board adjustment).
■ Put back the covers.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS355D - 3
Technical Manual
RAS355D - 4 RAA022
RAS356F
Sensors check & adjustment
■ Concerns
■ Sensors check and adjustment
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Setting rack GBL0339
■ Piercing switch adjustment tool: GBL0368
■ 0.6 mm gauge: MAJ004A
■ None
■2 hours
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. Sensor check
■ Go to Service > Super User Menu > Mechanical > Check Sensors.
1.1. Loading area
■ Remove the left front cover (See RAS342D: Front panel & covers dismantling) to acces the switches (front
cover status becomes red on previous screen).
Stop Rack Loading Sensor Left

■ Push on the sensor and check that the "Stop Rack Loading Sensor Left" status becomes red.
Technical Manual
RAS356F - 2 RAA022
Stop Rack Loading Sensor Right

■ Push on the sensor and check that the "Stop Rack Loading Sensor Right" status becomes red.
1.2. Sampler Transfer Rail
Tube Height Control

■ Push on the sensor lever and check that the "Tube Height Control" status becomes red.
PUSH
Tube Sensor
■ Push on the sensor lever and check that the "Tube Sensor" status becomes red.
PUSH
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS356F - 3
Left Rack Locker / Right Rack Locker

■ Pusha rack on the rail until it has moved under the tracers (followers) and check that the "Left Rack Locker"
and "Right Rack Locker" status become red when the tracers are not in a hole of the rack.
RACK
1.3. Unloading area
Rack End Transfer

■ Pusha rack on the rail until it stops against the unloading tray and check that the "Rack End Transfer" status
becomes red.
RACK
Ejection tray
Unloading Area Full

■ Press the "Unloading Area Full" switch and check that the "Unloading Area Full" status becomes red.
Technical Manual
RAS356F - 4 RAA022
1.4. Waste
Waste Control
■ Remove the waste detector from the waste container, then move the detector from the bottom up and check
that the "Waste Control" status becomes red.
1.5. Covers
Front cover
■ Open the right front cover and check that the "Front Cover" status becomes red then close it and repeat this
operation with the left front cover.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS356F - 5
Thermic Panel
■ Open the thermic panel and ckeck that the "Thermic Panel" status becomes red.
Laser Interlock
■ Remove the laser cover and check that the "Laser Interlock" status becomes red.
2. Sensors Adjustment
2.1. Description of Setting rack (GBL0339)
A special tool has been created to allow the adjustment of the different switches.
On this tool, different areas are available.
Technical Manual
RAS356F - 6 RAA022
■ Theareas A, B and C are used for the "Tube

height control switch" adjustment.
■ The areas 1, 2 and 3 are used to adjust:
- the "Stop rack loading sensors, left and right".
- the "Unloading area full switch".
■ Thearea 4 (on the side) is used to adjust the
"Rack end transfer switch".
2.2. Loading area sensors
Stop Rack Loading Sensor Left and right (p/n: XDA974AS).
The adjustment of these two sensors is the same. These sensors are delivered on a bracket and are
pre-stressed. This adjustment is factory made. Never remove the switch from its bracket.
■ Loosen the CHC M4x12 screws to adjust the switch assy (switch + bracket + CHC M2x10 screws + flat nut).
■ Use the setting rack (GBL0339) to adjust the switch position with regards to the front plate:
- Place the setting rack in order to have the wheel of the switch in the area "1".
- Move the switch assy to have the wheel of the switch just in touch with the area "1" of the setting rack.
- Tighten the CHC M4x12 screws.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS356F - 7
Adjust
Check
Check
- Place the Setting rack in order to have the wheel of the switch in the area "3".
- Check that the "Stop rack loading sensor" (left or right, depending of the switch) becomes red.
- Place the Setting rack in order to have the wheel of the switch in the area "2".
- Check that the "Stop rack loading sensor" (left or right, depending of the switch) becomes green.
■ Follow the same procedure for the second "Stop rack loading sensor".
Technical Manual
RAS356F - 8 RAA022
2.3. Sampler Transfer Rail
Tube Height Control switch (p/n: CAE10A)
Before any adjustment, move the setting rack under the stripper plate and check that it can move
under this plate.
The upper part of the setting rack is divided into 3 zones (A, B and C) witch have different heights.
The purpose of this procedure is to have detection of the "Tube height control" switch on the middle (B) and
higher zones (A), without detection on the lower zone (C) of the setting rack.
■ Move the setting rack in order to have the middle zone (B) under the left wheel.
Left wheel
Stop screw
A
C B
Setting rack
Switch screws Front view Rear view

■ Loosen the Stop screw.
■ Loosen the switch screws.
■ Move the switch up to find the commutation point (the "Tube height control" status becomes red), then move
it down to find the non-detection point (the "Tube height control" status becomes green).
■ Gently tighten the switch screws (switch tightening torque =150 m.Nm / 21 ozf.in).
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS356F - 9
During this adjustment, make sure the lever of the left wheel does not touch the stop screw.
■ Move the setting rack to have the lower zone (C) under the left wheel, and check that the "Tube height control
status" stay green. If it is not the case, start the adjustment again.
■ To correctly check this adjustment, remove the setting rack, then move it again under the left wheel, starting
by the lower zone (C) (the status must stay green), then the middle zone (B), where the status must be red, as
for the higher zone (A).
A
C B
Stop screw
■ To adjust the stop screw, remove the setting rack and install a 0.6 mm gauge (MAJ004A) between the lever
and the switch box.
■ Adjust the stop screw until it touches the lever, then block it with the nut.
Lever
0.6 mm gauge
Tube height
Nut
control switch
Stop screw
The object of this adjustment is only to ensure that the lever does not touch the box of the switch.
Technical Manual
RAS356F - 10 RAA022
Tube Sensor (p/n: CAE011A)

■ Unscrew the two CHC M2x10 screws and adjust the switch to obtain detection when you push a rack with
tubes under the caster (the "Tube sensor" status becomes red). Keep a little play in this position.
PLAY
Left Rack Locker / Right Rack Locker (p/n: CAE010A)

■ Enter: Main Menu > Service > Technician Menu > Gains > Sampler Adjustment
■ Press the "Check Rack Transfer Movement" button.
The rack moves under the Tracers (followers), then it run 25 motions on the left and 25 on the right.
The following screen shows the detection (A) and non-detection (B) zones of the tracer switches.
A B A
LEFT TRACER
Rack motion RACK
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS356F - 11
The non-detection zone (B) limits are:

- Minimum 6
- Maximum 12
The non-detection zone (B) width depends on the tracer and on the switch up and down position.
■ Loosen the two CHC M2x10 screws and adjust the switch position:
- If the non detection zone (B) is too small, pull the switch down.
- If the non detection zone (B) is too large, lift the switch up.
2.4. Unloading area
Rack End Transfer switch (p/n: CAE011A)
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws to remove the right

support cover plate.
■ Install the setting rack against the ejection tray mechanical stop.
■ Loosen the two CHC M2x10 switch screws and adjust the "Rack End Transfer" switch to find the
commutation point. The "Rack end transfer" status must change from green to red.
Technical Manual
RAS356F - 12 RAA022
■ Gently tighten the switch screws (switch

tightening torque =150 m.Nm / 21 ozf.in).
■ Check that the switch commutes really frankly when removing the rack (The "Rack end transfer" status must
change from red to green).
Unloading Area Full switch (reference: XDA975A)
This adjustment is the same as for the "Stop Rack Loading Left and Right" Sensors. The switch is
prestressed on the bracket. Never remove the switch from its bracket.
Front cover, left and right (p/n: CAE020A)

■ Unscrew the two CHC M3x12 screws and adjust the switch position in order to obtain detection (the "Front
cover" status becomes green) when the covers are closed. Keep a little play beetween the switches detection
and the switches mechanical stop.
Those switches are connected in series. During the adjustment of one cover switch, always keep the
opposite cover closed.
Thermic Panel (p/n: CAE006A)

■ Unscrew the two CHC M2x10 screws and adjust the switch position in order to obtain detection (the "Thermic
panel" status becomes green) when the thermic panel is closed. Keep a little play beetween switches
detection and switches mechanical stop.
2.5. Waste
Waste Control
■ No adjustment available.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS356F - 13
2.6. Others
Tube holder cam (p/n: CAE006A)

■ Open the tube holder (completely) and adjust the wheel of the left switch in the "V" of the left cam, then fasten
the switches and the left cam.
■ Completely close the tube holder and adjust the right cam to have the wheel of the right switch in the "V" of
the cam, then fasten the right cam.
Left switch
Right cam
Right switch Left cam
Home Loader switch (p/n: CAE019A)

■ Pushthe slide against the mechanical stop (ring) and adjust the switch to have detection in this position, and
keep a play of 1 mm on the switch.
1 mm
Slide
Mechanical stop
Technical Manual
RAS356F - 14 RAA022
Piercing assembly switches (p/n CAE006A)

■ Switch the instrument off and remove the internal PC (See RAS348D: Internal PC replacement).
■ Loosen the piercing motor screws to free the

cam.
■ Disconnect the two switches.

■ Install the GBL0368 tool on the upper switch.
■ Loosen the screws of the switch.
■ Manually turn the cam to have the wheel of the upper switch near the hole of the cam.
■ Turn the tool screw to push the switch until you obtain detection, then use a bent key to turn 1/4 more.
■ Gently tighten the switch screws (switch tightening torque =150 m.Nm / 21 ozf.in).
■ Turn the cam 1/2 turn to check that the switch does not change of status.
■ Follow the same procedure to adjust the second switch.
■ Re-assemble in reverse order.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS356F - 15
Technical Manual
RAS356F - 16 RAA022
RAS357E
Save and restore settings
■ Concerns
■ Workstation setting save and restore

■ Analyzer setting save and restore
■ Analyzer settings printing
■ Required tools
■ Floppy disk or USB drive
■ None
■ 30 min
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
For the analyzer, the following data is saved:

Cycles counter, reference CTN values, temperature recorded, calibration coefficient, motor home
and motion values, needle tube holder position, window counting and reagent levels.
For the workstation, the following data is saved:
Types, alarms level, global variables, limits level, pathological levels and the version number.
A floppy disk is provided with the instrument. All the factory parameters mentioned above are saved
on this floppy disk.
Make sure you save and print the configuration after any installation.
1. Analyzer settings
■ Go to "Menu > Settings > Save and Restore > Configuration".
1.1. To save analyzer settings
On the hard disk:
■ Press"Save Setting On Hard Disk" to save

the analyzer settings on the hard disk
■ Press "Validate".
Technical Manual
RAS357E - 2 RAA022
■ When the following screen is displayed, press

"Validate".
On a floppy disk (software versions prior to V2.0.0):
■ Insert a formated floppy disk in the floppy disk

drive.
■ Press"Save Setting On Floppy" to save the
analyzer settings on the floppy disk

"Validate".
If the floppy disk is not formated, it will be automatically formated.
On an external media (software versions from V2.0.0):
■ Insert a USB drive.

■ Press "Save Setting On External Media" to
save the analyzer settings on the USB drive.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS357E - 3

"Validate".
1.2. To restore analyzer settings
■ Press "Restore Setting From Hard Disk",

"Restore Setting From Floppy" (software
versions prior to V2.0.0) or "Restore Setting
From External Media" (software versions from
V2.0.0).
After pressing "Validate", you will automatically be logged out.
2. Workstation settings
■ Follow the same procedure as for analyzer settings using the buttons from the "Workstation Setting" area
instead.
Technical Manual
RAS357E - 4 RAA022
3. Print
■ Go to "Main Menu > Settings".
■ Press "Print/Send", the following popup window will be displayed.
■ Select an option then press "Validate".
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS357E - 5
3.1. Print analyzer settings
This option allows you to print:

- Mechanical Systems > Technical adjustment parameters
- Pulse Adjustment parameters
- Daily workload parameters
- Quality assurance parameters
3.2. Print settings
This option allows you to print:

- Analyzer identification
- Reagents configuration
- Quality assurance configuration and parameters
- Printer settings
- Cycle options
- Communication configuration
- Type parametering
3.3. Print both
Allows you to print the two previous options
Technical Manual
RAS357E - 6 RAA022
RAS514B
Mixer assembly spring replacement
■ Concerns
■ Mixer assembly spring replacement
■ Required tools
■ Clamp
■ None
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. Mixer assembly dismantling

■ Follow RAS346D: Mixer replacement - 1.Mixer assembly dismantling, page 2 to remove the mixer.
2. Springs replacement
■ Pull
the white part to close the grabber and to
move it against the front plate.
2.1. Old mixer assembly
■ Use a clamp to hold the spring, then push the

pin to remove it.
■ Replace the spring, then put the pin back.

■ Make sure the pins are correctly positionned in their locations.
■ Replace the second spring in the same way.
Technical Manual
RAS514B - 2 RAA022
2.2. New mixer assembly
■ Use a clamp to remove the springs, then

replace them with new ones.
■ Reinstall the Mixer assembly by following the "Mixer assembly dismantling procedure" in reverse order.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS514B - 3
Technical Manual
RAS514B - 4 RAA022
RAS516B
Takasago valve assembly dismantling
■ Concerns
■ Takasago valve assembly dismantling:

- for chamber or heater access
- for Takasago valve replacement
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Cruciform screwdriver
■ None
■ 15 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. Purpose
On instruments equiped with Takasago valves, it could be more difficult to access the chambers or the heater
assembly.
Follow the first part (Chamber access) of this procedure to remove the Takasago valves for maintenance on
those assemblies.
Follow the second part of this procedure (Valve assembly replacement) only to replace the Takasago valve
assembly or to dismantle a Takasago valve.
The second part of the procedure has to be used only in case of failure of the Takasago valve
assembly.
2. Chamber access
2.1. Dismantling
■ Drain the chambers: Main Menu > Super User Menu > Hydraulic > Drain Chambers.
■ Remove the right door and the right side cover (Refer to RAS342D: Front panel & covers dismantling).
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws maintaining the

valve plate on the crosspieces.
Technical Manual
RAS516B - 2 RAA022
■ Carefullydisconnect the small tubing (purple

on the picture) FROM THE VALVE MANIFOLD
ONLY in order not to damage the chamber
inlet.
■ In this configuration, it is possible to put the valve assembly on the ejection tray in order to work on the
chambers.
2.2. Reassembling
■ Locate the tubings (yellow on the picture) out of

the crosspieces, as shown on the picture:
■ Connect the short tubing (from the DIL1/HGB 4 inlet) on the manifold.
■ Install the valve plate on the crosspieces using the 2 CHC screws.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS516B - 3
■ Install
the loop of the BASO3/RBC3 tubing
(yellow on the picture) in the loop of the BASO4
tubing (green on the picture) as shown on the
following picture.
3. Valve assembly replacement

■ Drain the chambers: Main Menu > Super User Menu > Hydraulic > Drain Chambers.
■ Remove the right door and the right side cover (Refer to RAS342D: Front panel & covers dismantling).
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws maintening the

valve plate on the crosspieces.
■ Carefullydisconnect the small tubing (purple

on the picture) FROM THE VALVE MANIFOLD
ONLY in order not to damage the chamber
inlet.
Technical Manual
RAS516B - 4 RAA022
■ Disconnect the long tubing (green on the

picture) from RBC1.
■ Disconnect the "T" connector from the Reagent

heater 8 tubing (blue on the picture).
■ Disconnect the two electrical connectors from

the extension cable, then remove the valve
assembly.
■ Reassemble in reverse order. Be careful about the tubing position (See “2.2.Reassembling, page 3”).
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS516B - 5
4. Valve dismantling
■ Cut the tyraps maintening the valve wirings together.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws (A) to remove the valves + manifold from the plate.
■ Unscrew the 2 cruciform screws (B) to remove the valve from the manifold. Be careful to the seal (C).
Technical Manual
RAS516B - 6 RAA022
RAS519B
Rack needle height adjustment
■ Concerns
■ Adjustment of the needle height in the rack
■ Required tools
■ None
■ None
■ 10 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
Rack needle height adjustment
1. Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is the adjustment of the needle heigt in a tube located in a rack.
2. Adjustment
■ Enter: Service > Super User Menu > Mechanical System > Rack adjustment.
■ Select the type of rack you use (A or B, C is reserved for SARSTEDT rack).
■ The position of the needle in the tube can be adjusted by changing the "Depth" value.
- If the needle is too low, decrease the "Depth" value.
- If the needle is too high, increase the "Depth" value.
Technical Manual
RAS519B - 2 RAA022
RAS735D
RET optical bench

(Pentra XLR only)
■ Concerns
■ Retic optical bench disassembly/reassembly

■ Flowcell replacement
■ Retic optical bench adjustment
■ Required tools
■ Gauge set: GBD880A
■ Flowcell adj. knob: XDA555AS
■ Hexagonal keys
■ 10 mm flat key
■ Small flat screwdriver
■ Voltmeter
■ RBC/PLT latex: 1300019538
■ Retic latex: LAD012AS
■ ABX Minotrol Retic levels 1-2-3
■ Fresh blood sample
■ Calibrator
■ Optical bench replacement: 1 hour
■ Flowcell replacement: 45 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Optical
bench: XDB287AS (1209149287)
■ Flowcell:
1300012656
■ Lamp adjustment tool: XDB302AS (1209149302)

the operations.
RET optical bench
1. Purpose
This procedure allows the technician to:

- Dismantle the Retic optical bench
- Dismantle parts of the Retic optical bench
- Adjust the Retic optical bench
2. Maintenance Plan
Scenario: Procedures to perform:

- Complete Retic optical bench disassembly and reassembly procedures
Optical bench replacement - LMNE adjustment procedure
- RET adjustment procedure
- Flowcell disassembly and reassembly procedures
Flowcell replacement - LMNE adjustment procedure
- RET adjustment procedure
APD board replacement - APD (Hamamatsu) board disassembly and reassembly procedures
Amplifier board replacement - CIS OD amplifier board disassembly and reassembly procedures
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 2 RAA022
RET optical bench
3. Disassembly / Reassembly
3.1. Complete Retic optical bench
3.1.1. Disassembly
■ Remove the left-hand side panel and the top cover to access the optical bench (Refer to RAS342D: Front
panel & covers dismantling for more information on how to remove covers).

■ Loosen the 2 CHC M4X6 screws to remove the

plastic cover.
As the Melles Griot laser is very sensitive to electrostatic discharges, install the protection provided
with the laser bench onto the connector when you disconnect it.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 3
RET optical bench
■ Take the connector protection out of the plastic

bag.
■ Disconnect the laser connector.

■ Clip
the connector protection on the laser
connector.
D
B
■ Disconnect the lamp connector (A).
C
■ Disconnect the connector on J2 (B).
■ Disconnect the flat cable on J3 (C). E
■ Disconnect the switch (D).
■ Disconnect the solenoid shutter (E).
■ Disconnect the ground fitting on the instrument

side.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 4 RAA022
RET optical bench
■ Disconnect the tubings from valve 1, inlet 1 and

valve 4, inlet 2, using a small flat screwdriver.
■ Disconnectthe tubings from inlet 5 and inlet 1
of the LMNE syringe.
■ Disconnect the tubing coming from the isolator

at the ground fitting level (E2_1), using a small
flat screwdriver.
■ Loosen the 4 CHC M4X6 screws to remove the

reagent plate (Refer to RAS342D: Front panel &
covers dismantling).
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 5
RET optical bench
■ Unscrew the 4 plastic nuts.
■ Carefully remove the optical bench.
3.1.2. Reassembly
■ Put the power supply cable back and switch the instrument on.
■ Go to "Service> Super User Menu > Hydraulic System > Prime Cycles" and press "ABX DILUENT" to run
an ABX Diluent prime cycle.
■ Go to "Service > Super User Menu > Hydraulic System > Clean Cycles" and press "Rinse Cytometer" to
clean the flowcell.
■ Perform the LMNE flowcell adjustment check procedure.
■ Perform the RET adjustment check procedure.
3.2. APD (Hamamatsu) board
3.2.1. Disassembly

Technical Manual
RAS735D - 6 RAA022
RET optical bench

■ Disconnect the JP100 connector and the

coaxial cable on JP101.
JP100
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC M2X10 screws.
JP101
■ Remove the APD board.
3.2.2. Reassembly
■ Check the adjustment of the Reception gun.
■ Adjust the lamp voltage on the APD board on VR100.
3.3. CIS OD amplifier board
3.3.1. Disassembly
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 7
RET optical bench

■ Disconnect the J2, J3 and J4 connectors, and J4

the coaxial cable on J1.
J2
■ Unscrew the 4 CHC M3X8 screws. J3
J1
■ Remove the CIS OD amplifier board.
3.3.2. Reassembly
3.4. Flowcell
3.4.1. Disassembly

Technical Manual
RAS735D - 8 RAA022
RET optical bench
■ Unscrew and remove the 2 CHC M4X16 screws

to dismantle the flowcell.
Be careful not to damage the lens of the optical bench with the screwdriver.
■ Place
some absorbent paper below the "Y"
connector (T1).
■ Disconnect the tubing of the external sheath
from the "Y" connector (T1_1).
■ Disconnect the tubing from the anode fitting

using a small flat screwdriver. Wait for a few
seconds until the flowcell has drained.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 9
RET optical bench
■ Disconnect the electrode coaxial cable.
■ Unscrew the CHC M3X6 screw to remove the

ground fittings. Be careful not to lose the
washer when you remove the 2 ground fittings.
Be very careful not to damage the flowcell with the screwdriver.
■ Disconnectthe tubing from valve 4, inlet 2,

using a small flat screwdriver.
■ Disconnectthe tubings from inlet 5 and inlet 1
of the LMNE syringe.
■ Remove the flowcell.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 10 RAA022
RET optical bench

ground fitting. Be careful not to lose the washer
when you remove the ground fitting.

protection plate.
3.4.2. Reassembly
■ Insertand tighten the CHC M3X6 screw to

attach the protection plate to the new flowcell.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 11
RET optical bench
■ Insertand tighten the CHC M3X6 screw to put

the ground fitting in place.
Be very careful not to damage the flowcell with the screwdriver.
■ Pass the tubings of the new flowcell through

the bench sole.
■ Position the flowcell.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 12 RAA022
RET optical bench
■ Insertand tighten the CHC M3X6 screw to put

the ground fittings in place.
■ Connect the tubing of the external sheath to the

"Y" connector (T1_1).
■ Connect the electrode coaxial cable.
Be careful not to dirty the lens.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 13
RET optical bench
■ Connect the tubing to the anode fitting.
■ Connect the tubing to valve 4, inlet 2.

■ Connectthe shorter tubing to inlet 1 of the
LMNE syringe, and the longer one to inlet 5 of
the LMNE syringe.
■ Screw the CHC M4X16 screws to keep the

flowcell in place, without tightening them all the
way.
If you lose the screws, make sure you replace them with screws that are not too long. Using screws
that are too long could damage the flowcell.
■ Put the power supply cable back and switch the instrument on.
■ Go to "Service> Super User Menu > Hydraulic System > Prime Cycles" and press "ABX DILUENT" to run
an ABX Diluent prime cycle.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 14 RAA022
RET optical bench
■ Go to "Service > Super User Menu > Hydraulic System > Clean Cycles" and press "Rinse Cytometer" to
clean the flowcell.
■ Connect a voltmeter to TP1 (ground) and TP2 on the CIS OD amplifier board.
■ Gently move the flowcell until you get the maximum voltage.
■ Tighten the flowcell CHC M4X16 screws to keep the flowcell in the optimal position.
■ Perform the LMNE adjustment procedure.
The replacement of the flowcell requires that you re-set the displayed value of the laser power. Refer
to the Laser adjustment procedure.
4. Lamp replacement
■ Switch the instrument off and wait for the lamp to cool down for at least 10 minutes.
Do not touch the bulb with your fingers. This would reduce the shelf life of the lamp significantly. In
case of finger contact, clean the bulb with a solution of 90% alcohol and a soft paper.

■ Remove the left-hand side panel, the right cover, the top cover and the laser cover to access the optical
bench.
■ Disconnect the optical bench lamp power supply connector.
■ Loosen the 2 CHC screws of the lamp holder.
■ Turn the lamp holder, and then remove the lamp and holder from the optical bench.
Holder
■ Remove the holder from the lamp.
■ Install the holder on the new lamp.

■ Install the lamp and holder on the optical bench then tighten the 2 CHC screws.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 15
RET optical bench
5. Lamp adjustment
Before starting the adjustment, make sure there are no air bubbles in the flowcell. If there are, go to
"Service > Super User Menu > Hydraulic System > Clean Cycles" and press "Rinse Cytometer" to clean
the flowcell.
5.1. Lamp height check
■ Disconnect and remove the APD board.

■ Screw the first part of the adjustment tool in
place using the appropriate fixation screws
attached to the tool.
■ Set the second part of the adjustment tool on
the first part.
■ Check the position of the lamp using the

adjustment tool.
The width of the top part (a) and the width of the
bottom part (b) of the light must be the same.
■ If the adjustment is not correct, perform the Lamp height adjustment procedure.
5.2. Lamp height adjustment
■ If
the image is too low, decrease the distance
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 16 RAA022
RET optical bench
■ If
the image is too high, increase the distance
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 17
RET optical bench
To do so:
■ Check the distance between the bench and the

lamp holder.
■ Usethe measured distance and your
observation to estimate the thickness of the
gauges required.
■ Loosen the small screw on the side of the lamp
assembly using a 2 mm hexagonal key.
■ Insert the appropriate gauges (supplied with

the adjustment tool) between the lamp holder
and the optical bench on each side to adjust the
height of the lamp.
Add gauges until the the light is centered in the
circle.
■ Make sure you have the same height on each
side of the lamp holder plate. For example, use
a 0.9 mm gauge on one side, and a 0.8 mm
gauge + a 0.1 mm gauge on the other side.
■ Perform the Lamp orientation adjustment procedure when you have found the correct gauges.
5.3. Lamp orientation adjustment
■ Push the lamp holder down and turn the lamp

until the light is as homogeneous as possible.
■ Once you have found the correct position of the
lamp, push the lamp holder down and tighten
the small screw on the side of the lamp
assembly.
■ Remove the gauges and check the adjustment
again.
■ Make sure the shutter flap can move freely up
and down and that it is not in contact with the
shutter.
■ Put the APD board back in place and connect the cables back. Refer to the APD board Reassembly
procedure.
■ Adjust the lamp voltage to 6.7 V +/- 0.8 V on the APD board.
■ Make sure there are no air bubbles in the flowcell.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 18 RAA022
RET optical bench
6. LMNE adjustment
■ The blocking screws (with red varnish on the threading) are factory adjusted and must never be
turned.
■ Only the axes screws (F) and (G) can be adjusted.
6.1. Reception gun
■ Connect a voltmeter to TP1 (ground) and TP2 on the CIS OD amplifier board.
■ Turnthe up and down screw (F) using the

adjustment knob until the maximum voltage is
reached.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 19
RET optical bench
Note that there is a rather big play for each of the reception gun screws. Make sure you take
it into account when you adjust each axis. You can tell you are out of the play when you start
to feel resistance when you turn the adjustment knob.
■ Turn
the lateral screw (G) using the adjustment
knob until the maximum voltage is reached. G
■ Repeat the 2 previous steps once more to make sure you have the maximum voltage on both axes.
Once you are certain you have reached the maximum value on each axis, start turning in the
opposite direction, just enough to go in the play so that you do not damage the blocking
system.
■ Adjustthe lamp voltage on the APD board on

VR100.
Refer to the table in the LMNE flowcell
adjustment check procedure.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 20 RAA022
RET optical bench
6.2. Flowcell
6.2.1. LMNE flowcell adjustment check
Never dismantle the emission gun or even unlock it. The adjustment is factory made and cannot be
performed on the field.

air bubbles.

■ Mix the RBC/PLT latex thoroughly.

pop-up window appears:
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 21
RET optical bench
■ When the optical bench is well adjusted:
■ Check that the displayed values are within the range in the following table.
Parameter Target Value Range

LMNE res. 53 51 to 55
LMNE Abs. 170 (Minimum) Set to maximum
LMNE Transfer 150 µs 140 µs to 160 µs
■ If
the values are out of range or if you want a better adjustment, follow the LMNE flowcell position adjustment
procedure.
6.2.2. LMNE flowcell position adjustment

Technical Manual
RAS735D - 22 RAA022
RET optical bench

air bubbles.

■ Mix the RBC/PLT latex thorougly.

■ If
necessary, adjust the Resistive gain (LMNE
RES) to 53 +/-2 by turning R136, located on
the mother board.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 23
RET optical bench
■ Gently
turn the lateral screw (J) using a flat
screwdriver until you obtain a stable transfer on
the LMNE adjustment screen.
■ Gently turn the axial (focus) toothed wheel (K)
until you obtain the maximal absorbance.
■ Adjust the lateral screw (J) again, then the axial
(focus) toothed wheel (K) until you obtain the
best absorbance.
You may need to press "Run LMNE
Adjustment" several times to obtain the right
adjustment. K
J
adjustment.
■ If the transfer time remains out of range, perform the Transfer time adjustment procedure.
6.3. Transfer time adjustment
■ Run this procedure in case the transfer time is out of range (target value after stabilization: between 140 µs
and 160 µs).
■ In case of the replacement of the optical flowcell, a gauge set may be necessary to adjust the transfer time.
This gauge set (GBD880A) is now available as service parts.
Before adjusting the height of the flowcell, make sure the other parameters are correct (lamp voltage,
resistive gain, LMNE Abs. gain).
■ After replacing the optical flowcell, remove a

gauge from the set if the transfer time is too
short.
■ Ifthe transfer time is too long, add a gauge
from the set.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 24 RAA022
RET optical bench
Each gauge equals approximately 10 µs.
■ To add or remove a gauge, first remove the two

fixations.
■ Remove a gauge from the set.
■ Re-install the set, and then block it with the
fixations (Refer to the Reassembly procedure).
■ Put the optical bench cover back.

■ Perform the LMNE flowcell position adjustment procedure again.
6.4. Final adjustment
6.4.1. Matrix check

Check and adjust the matrix position as follows:
■ Select the raw counts by going to "Settings > System > Printer", selecting "raw", and then pressing
"Print/Send" and selecting "Print the run and raws in full page for selected rows".
■ Run 5 different normal human fresh blood samples and print the results.
■ Check the raw count on the printout:
- RA #: Number of cells counted. The RA# allows you to check the integrity of the pneumatical circuit from
the sampling needle to the LMNE flowcell. If the RA# is lower than the expected value (around 90% of the
WBC number), check the pneumatic circuit.
- CO%: Percentage of cells crossing the flowcell in the correct time (transfer time) between the aperture and
the optical measurement. A correct CO% should be > 95%.
- DIFF#: Number of impacts in LYM + MON + NEU + EOS population areas
■ Check the position of the populations on the matrix: the populations must be correctly placed in
their respective zone (box), without flags.
■ Check that the ALY and LIC values are as low as possible (average maximum 1.3%).
■ Check that no alarm is triggered.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 25
RET optical bench
Optical axis
■ If necessary, adjust the matrix position:
Resistivity axis
1- Resistive gain adjustment:

- The resistive gain is set by R136 on the mother board.
- According to the resistive gain adjustment, populations of cells will move along the resistive axis in different
- If the resistive gain is increased, cell populations will move to the right of the matrix.
- If the resistive gain is decreased, cell populations will move to the left of the matrix.
A good adjustment is obtained when the Lymphocyte population is correctly centered in the LYM box.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 26 RAA022
RET optical bench
2- Optical gain adjustment:

- The optical gain is set by R148 on the mother board.
- According to the optical gain adjustment, populations of cells will move along the optical axis in different
- If the optical gain is increased, cell populations will move upward on the matrix.
- If the optical gain is decreased, cell populations will move downward on the matrix.
A good adjustment is obtained when the Lymphocyte population is close to the NL threshold.
6.4.2. Focus adjustment
■ Runa DIFF analysis on a fresh human blood

sample in STAT mode.
■ Check the position of the LYM population on
the matrix.
It is recommended to print the results to check the matrix because it is easier to see on paper if the
matrix is properly adjusted.
■ Turnthe axial (focus) toothed wheel (K)

counterclockwise by an angle of 15°.
K
J
adjustment.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 27
RET optical bench
■ Rerun the blood sample.

■ Check the matrix.
■ Repeat the 3 previous steps until optical
saturation starts to appear on the matrix.
■ Once the matrix is saturated, make a mark so

that you remember the position of the toothed
wheel.
■ Go back to the original focus adjustment by
turning the axial toothed wheel clockwise.
■ Turnthe axial toothed wheel clockwise by an

angle of 15°.
■ Repeat the 3 previous steps until you lose
optical dynamic on the matrix.
■ Once the matrix has lost optical dynamic, make

a mark so that you remember the position of the
toothed wheel.
■ Turn the axial toothed wheel counterclockwise

until you reach the median angle.
■ The focus is properly adjusted.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 28 RAA022
RET optical bench
6.4.3. Lateral adjustment
■ Runa DIFF analysis on a fresh human blood

sample in STAT mode.
■ Check the position of the LYM population on
the matrix.
It is recommended to print the results to check the matrix because it is easier to see on paper if the
matrix is properly adjusted.
■ Turnthe lateral screw (J) counterclockwise by

an angle of 15°.
K
J
adjustment.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 29
RET optical bench

■ Once the matrix is saturated, make a mark so

that you remember the position of the lateral
screw.
■ Go back to the original lateral adjustment by
turning the lateral screw clockwise.
■ Turn the lateral screw clockwise by an angle of

15°.
■ Once the matrix has lost optical dynamic, make

a mark so that you remember the position of the
lateral screw.
■ Turnthe lateral screw counterclockwise until

you reach the median angle.
■ Thelateral position of the flowcell is properly
adjusted on the matrix.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 30 RAA022
RET optical bench
6.4.4. Final matrix check

■ Run the 5 normal human blood samples again to check the correct adjustment of the matrix.
■ Perform the RET adjustment check procedure.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 31
RET optical bench
7. RET adjustment
7.1. RET Adjustment screen description
1 2
3
4
5
8
6 9
10
Number Description
On the field, you must systematically use the "Holder" option to launch a RET
1
adjustment cycle. The "Chamber" option is used for the factory adjustment.
2 "Ret Adjust" allows you to launch the RET adjustment cycle.
Selecting or deselecting "Cumulative matrix" determines the aspect of the
matrix:
- If you do not select this option, the matrix is updated every second and you
only see the current position of the latex balls on the matrix. The numerical
3 values on the left-hand side of the screen are also updated every second.
- If you select this option, the dots that show the location of the latex balls are
added on top of each other in order to form a cloud of dots. All the dots are
taken into account to compile the numerical values on the left-hand side of the
screen.
Changing the "Optical Gain" value causes the cloud of dots to move upward
(by increasing the value) or downward (by decreasing the value).
4
Note that the Optical Gain can be adjusted from this screen and from
Service > Super User Menu > Others. If you change its value in either screen,
the value in the other screen will be affected.
5 The "Optical CV" should be below 0.4 if the RET adjustment is correct.
The "Correlation" only takes into account the dots that are above the threshold
(channel 25) on the matrix. To get a proper adjustment, the cloud of dots must
be located above the threshold. It may be necessary to temporarily increase the
6 optical gain to get the dots located in the upper part of the matrix.
If your adjustment is correct, you should have a "Correlation" higher than

95%.
The "Power" must be around 45 mW. If the value is close to zero, the laser
7 cover is probably open or not properly in place. The laser cover must be in
place for the laser to function.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 32 RAA022
RET optical bench
Number Description
The dots on the matrix need to be centered on the vertical axis and must be
8 above the threshold. Dots below the threshold will not be taken into account in
the correlation.
If you change the "Threshold" value on this screen, the electronic threshold will
not change. Only the position of the threshold on the matrix and the values in
"Upper" and "Lower" change.
9
The numerical values on the left-hand side of the screen will not be affected.
"Upper" and "Lower" display the average of dots located above and below the
threshold. These fields are only used for the factory adjustment.
The transfer time cannot be adjusted. On latex, it should be approximately
10
10 µs longer than the LMNE transfer time.
7.2. Laser adjustment
Before starting the RET adjustment procedure, you need to adjust the laser.
7.2.1. Laser setup adjustment
Adjust the laser power setup to 3.70 V

+/- 0.02 V by turning R274, located on the
mother board.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 33
RET optical bench
7.2.2. Laser power adjustment
■ Go to Service > Technician Menu > Technical

Measurement > Laser Adjustment.
■ Press "Power Adjust".
■ Adjustthe laser power to 45 mW by turning

R271, located on the mother board.
■ When the laser is properly adjusted:
The goal of this procedure is to adjust the displayed value of the laser power only. This has no effect
on the actual laser power.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 34 RAA022
RET optical bench
7.3. RET adjustment check
Make sure the LMNE adjustment is correct before attempting to perform the RET adjustment.
Make sure the laser cover is in place before attempting to perform the RET adjustment check
procedure. If the laser cover is not in place, the laser will not be able to function.
■ Goto Service > Technician Menu >

Measurement > RET Adjustment.
■ Make sure "Holder" is selected in the "Cycles
to launch" area.
■ Select "Cumulative matrix".
■ Mix the RET latex thoroughly.

■ Press "Ret Adjust".
■ Placethe latex vial in the appropriate tube
holder position.
■A good adjustment:
(Correlation > 95%)

(Optical CV < 0.4)
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 35
RET optical bench
Adjust the RET resistive gain by mean of the R257 potentiometer in order to get the latex cloud
centered on channel #100 (vertical line).
7.4. RET adjustment procedure
■ The blocking screws (with red varnish on the threading) are factory adjusted and must never be
turned.
■ The laser axes screws (U) and (V) are factory adjusted and must never be turned.
■ Only the lateral axis (L) can be adjusted.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 36 RAA022
RET optical bench
Make sure the laser cover is in place before attempting to perform the RET adjustment procedure.
If the laser cover is not in place, the laser will not be able to function.
■ Goto Service > Technician Menu >

Measurement > RET Adjustment.
■ Make sure "Holder" is selected in the "Cycles
to launch" area.
■ Deselect "Cumulative matrix".
■ Mix the RET latex thoroughly.

■ Press "Ret Adjust".
■ Placethe latex vial in the appropriate tube
holder position.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 37
RET optical bench
■ Remove the laser lateral screw cap.

■ Turnthe lateral screw (L) of the laser bench
using the adjustment knob until you obtain the
best correlation and the best optical CV
possible.
L
(Correlation > 95%
Optical CV < 0.4)
You may need to press "Ret Adjust" several

times before you obtain the right adjustment.
Once you are certain you have the best adjustment possible, start turning in the opposite direction,
just enough to go in the play so that you do not damage the blocking system.
■ Go back to the RET adjustment check procedure to make sure the adjustment is correct.
7.5. RET matrix adjustment with control blood
■ To adjust the RET matrix with control blood, proceed as described below:
OK OK
RET MFI RET% Run the 3
Control Control
Control levels of RET
Level 3 Level 1
control
NOK NOK
Main Menu / Service / Main Menu / Service /
Super User Menu / Others NOK
Super User Menu / Others
Adjust Optical Gain Adjust Sigma Factor F1
by steps of 5 by steps of 0.2
The RET matrix adjustment procedure is performed from Main Menu > Service > Super User Menu > Others.
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 38 RAA022
RET optical bench
Make sure the PIC value is between 4 and 16 at the risk of triggering a FIT alarm.
7.5.1. MFI value adjustment

■ Run an analysis on ABX Minotrol Retic level 3.
■ Check that the MFI value is within the limits provided in the control target sheet.
■ If the MFI value is outside the limits, you need to modify the Optical Gain in the RETIC Parameters area:
- If the MFI value is lower than the low limit, increase the optical gain by steps of 5.
- If the MFI value is higher than the high limit, decrease the optical gain by steps of 5.
■ Press Accept Values and rerun an analysis on ABX Minotrol Retic level 3.
■ Repeat the previous steps until the MFI value is within limits.
7.5.2. RET% value adjustment

■ Run an analysis on ABX Minotrol Retic level 1.
■ Check that the RET% value is within the limits provided in the control target sheet.
■ If the RET% value is outside the limits, you need to modify the Sigma Factor F1 in the RETIC Parameters
area:
- If the RET% value is lower than the low limit, decrease the sigma factor by steps of 0.2.
- If the RET% value is higher than the high limit, increase the sigma factor by steps of 0.2.
■ Press Accept Values and rerun an analysis on ABX Minotrol Retic level 1.
■ Repeat the previous steps until the RET% value is within limits.
7.6. Check-up after adjustment
■ Run analyses on the 3 levels of ABX Minotrol Retic.

■ Check that the PIC, the MFI and the RET% values are all within limits.
If not, perform the matrix adjustment again.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS735D - 39
RET optical bench
Technical Manual
RAS735D - 40 RAA022
RAS736C
Hub board replacement

(ABX Pentra XL80 and Pentra XLR)
■ Concerns
■ Hub board replacement
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ None
■ 30 minutes
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Antistatic kit: MZZ015A
■ Hub board: XAA705A

the operations.
1. How to access the hub board

The hub board is located under the sampler loader system, on the left-hand side of the instrument.
■ Remove the motor board plastic protection (2screws).
For more details about the dismantling of the instrument covers refer to RAS342D: Front panel & covers
dismantling.
2. Hub board dismantling
■ Disconnect the J5 and J6 connectors.
J6 J5
Technical Manual
RAS736C - 2 RAA022
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws.
■ Remove the hub board.
3. Hub board replacement

■ Install the new board and tighten the 3 fixation screws.
■ Connect the J5 and J6 connectors on the board.
■ Put back the covers.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS736C - 3
Technical Manual
RAS736C - 4 RAA022
RAS738E
Version installation and update
■ Objectives
■ Version installation and update
■ Required tools
■ None
■ None
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ CD VERSION:
- ABX Pentra 80: NAJ031
- ABX Pentra XL80: NAJ033 or NAJ129
- Pentra XLR: NAJ127

the operations.
Before setting up a new version, it is recommended to save analyzer settings, workstation settings
and database folder "ASP0X" on a USB flash drive from "Settings > Save and restore >
Configuration", and to print them by pressing "Print/Send". Refer to RAS357 procedure.
1 2
Technical Manual
RAS738E - 2 RAA022
1. Procedure to update the version
If you are using a version prior to the 2.3.0 version, you have to perform MDSS adjustment
after software installation.
1.1. To install the version
1- Switch the instrument on.
Windows XP Windows 7
2- After the operating system boot, the 2 - After the system boot, the login screen appears.
screen becomes black, then blue. Press Ctrl + Alt + Suppr and then press Log off.
When the screen is blue, press the Shift key
for several seconds. The Logon
Information system window appears.
3- Log in as “administrator” using “admin” as the password.

4- Click OK.
5- Launch Windows explorer.
6- Insert the installation CD-ROM in the instrument drive or in the external drive.
7- Execute Setup_ASP0x_Vxxxxxx.exe on the CD-ROM.
8- Depending on the embedded version currently flashed on mainboard, the BinLoader process will
start automatically.
This step can last from 10 seconds up to 3 minutes.
In case of incompatible laboratory apparatus message while running the BinLoader process,
please refer to the Software installation troubleshooting chapter at the end of this
document.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS738E - 3
9- Then the application starts to load:
10- Click Next to continue the installation. The following window is displayed:
11- Click Install to continue the installation. A progression bar is displayed:
Technical Manual
RAS738E - 4 RAA022
12- The installation is now completed. Click Finish to restart the computer.
Do not interrupt the software installation at this step.
13- After computer restart, press Validate if the following message appears: "Analyzer Serial Number
is missing. Only technician user can log in application".
14- Log in to the application using the initial password.
15- When prompted, enter a new password and press Validate.
Note that the default technician password will not be accepted anymore. Please create a new different
password.
16- After application start, press Validate if the following message appears: "Analyzer serial number
was retrieved".
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS738E - 5
17- Select the configuration of the instrument (with or without Takasago valves) and validate:
This screen never appears with a Pentra XLR since they are all equipped with Takasago valves.
18- Retart the instrument.
After a version update, the technician must go to Service > Technician Menu > Others > Barcode
Setup and press “Accept Values” to regenerate the barcode reader settings.
1.2. To uninstall the version
2- After the operating system boot, the 2 - After the system boot, the login screen
screen becomes black, then blue. appears.
When the screen is blue, press the Shift key Press Ctrl + Alt + Suppr and then press Log off.

4- Click OK.
6- Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel 6 -Go to Start > Control Panel > Programs and
> Add/Remove Programs. Features.
Technical Manual
RAS738E - 6 RAA022
7- Select ASP0x Vx.x.x.
8- Click Add/Remove. 8- Click Uninstall.
9- Click Yes to confirm.

10- In Windows Explorer, browse to C:\Program Files\ABX\ and delete the ASP0X folder if exists.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS738E - 7
1.3. To roll back to previous version
To properly roll back to previous version, you must have previously saved:
■ The complete ASP03 folder located in C:\Program Files\ABX
■ The analyzer settings (see RAS357 more details).
2- After the operating system boot, the 2 - After the system boot, the login screen

4- Click OK.
5- Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel 5- Go to Start > Control Panel > Programs and
> Add/Remove Programs. Features.
6- Select ASP0x Vx.x.x.
7- Click Add/Remove. 7- Click Uninstall.
8- Click Yes to confirm.

9- In Windows explorer, browse to C:\Program Files\ABX\ and delete the ASP0X folder.
10- Insert the installation CD-ROM in the instrument drive or in the external drive.
11- Execute the Setup_ASP0x_Vxxxxxx.exe file from the CD-ROM version you wish to roll back.
12- When installation process is completed, restart the computer.
13- Log in to the application, select the instrument configuration (with or without Takasago valves) and
press Validate.
The instrument restart.
14- After the operating system boot, the 14- After the system boot, the login screen
Technical Manual
RAS738E - 8 RAA022

16- In Windows explorer, browse to C:\Program Files\ABX\ and replace the ASP0X folder by the one
you saved from the software version you wish to roll back.
17- Once ASP0x folder is replaced and copied, restart the computer.
18- Log in to the application and go to Menu > Settings > Save and Restore > Configuration to
restore the analyzer settings.
Note that just after login, motors won’t be correctly initialized until you restore the analyzer settings.
19- Depending on the version and analyzer backup location, press:
■ Restore Settings From Hard Disk or Restore Settings From Floppy (software versions prior to
V2.0.0)
■ Restore Settings From External Media (software versions from V2.0.0)
20- Press Validate.
You will automatically be logged out at the end of the restoration process.
21- Shut the computer down, wait for 10 seconds and turn the computer on.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS738E - 9
2. Post-requisites
2.1. To update the counting window and the transfer time (PXLR only)
After installing the software version, it is very important to update the counting window and
the transfer time for Pentra XLR, as it is different from the other Pentra 80 range instruments.
1- Go to Service > Technician Menu > Technical Measurement > Pulse Adjustment.
2- Set the LMNE Delay to "175" and the LMNE Window to "150".
3- Press Accept Values.
Even though the LMNE Delay is set to "175", the physical transfer time adjustment is still at
150 µs +/-10.
Technical Manual
RAS738E - 10 RAA022
2.2. To check the serial number (PXL80 and PXLR)
■ Go to Main menu > Settings > System > Analyzer Serial Number and check the serial number field.
■ Ifthe serial number is missing, enter it manually strictly in the same format as indicated in the label at the rear
of the instrument.
The serial number field is mandatory to generate an unlocking key for the system in case of
password loss.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS738E - 11
3. Procedure to switch the interface to Japanese,

Chinese, Russian* or Polish*
Ensure the language of the application is English before starting this procedure (Settings >
System > Local Settings).
In order to switch the interface language to Japanese, Chinese, Russian* or Polish*, you first need to switch to
the appropriate language of Windows. To do so, please proceed as follow:
(*: not available on ABX Pentra 80)
2- After the operating system boot, the 2 - After the system boot, the login screen appears.
3- Log in as “administrator” using “admin” as the password

4- Click OK.
6- Go to Control Panel > Regional and Language Options.
7- In the Regional Options tab, select the language you want to install.
In the case of Chinese, you need to select Chinese (PRC).
8- Click Apply.
9- In the Languages tab, click Details.
10- In Text services and input languages, select the default input language (Chinese, Russian or
Polish).
11- Select the appropriate keyboard.
12- Click OK.
13- In the Advanced Settings tab, select the appropriate language.
14- Click OK three times.
15- Once the Windows language has been selected, the application can be switched from English to
the desired language (Settings > System > Local Settings).
Technical Manual
RAS738E - 12 RAA022
4. Help update
If necessary, the online help can be updated by performing these next steps:
1- Insert the CD-ROM RAXxxxx in the internal drive or the external drive.
2- Go to Settings > Save and Restore Settings.
3- Press "Update help" to access the User Manual screen.
4- Choose the language.
5- Press "Install" to update the online help on the instrument.
6- Remove the CD-ROM from the drive.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS738E - 13
5. Software installation troubleshooting

The following steps must be applied only in case of "incompatible laboratory apparatus" message.
5.1. First option: restart both instrument and computer
1- Close any software that is currently running.

2- Close Windows XP or Windows 7 and turn the computer off using the power switch.
3- Wait for 15 seconds.
5- After the operating system boot, the 5- After the system boot, the login screen appears.

7- Click OK.
8- As soon as the computer is restarted, try to rerun the software version installation from the CD or
USB flash drive.
5.2. Second option: reset the embedded firmware
1- Close any software that is currently running.

2- Close Windows XP or Windows 7 and turn the computer off using the power switch.
3- Remove the right cover of the instrument to access the main board.
5- After the operating system boot, the 5- After the system boot, the login screen appears.

7- Click OK.
8- Look at the four green LEDs on the motherboard: they must flash one after the other (not at the same
time).
Technical Manual
RAS738E - 14 RAA022
9- When all blinking at the same time, it means that the embedded software is crashed.
In that case, you have to reset the embedded firmware, depending on the motherboard type:
■ Press the reset button near the J6 connector during one second
■ Plug a jumper as described in the picture below on E1 strap near the J6 connector during one
second and remove it. Do not use metallic part.
10- After two seconds, LEDs should blink as expected.

11- Rerun the software version installation from the CD or USB flash drive.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS738E - 15
Technical Manual
RAS738E - 16 RAA022
RAS816A
Password Recovery
■ Objectives
■ Technicianpassword change in case of technician

password loss
■ Temporary password creation in case of needed
temporary access to technician functionalities
■ Required tools
■ None
■ None
■ N/A
■ Periodicity
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
Password recovery
1. Subject
To strengthen cybersecurity level and comply with FDA requirements, technician passwords are not hardcoded
anymore in the software application.
It is now mandatory to change the password the first time you log in to the application. The technician must
keep this new password.
The new password policy does not allow to re-use the common default password for default profiles (for
example 1224 for Technician profile).
However, the 2.4.0 application still allows to create any users whatever the profile type is. For more information,
refer to the user manual.
In any case of password loss, the technician has the possibibility to generate another one, as described in the
two procedures bellow:
■ One allowing you to unlock the system in case of password loss
■ One giving a temporary access to end users at a technician level
The password recovery only works with ABX Pentra XL80 and Pentra XLR that have been updated in V2.4.0
and upper versions.
To generate a security code or a temporary code, the instrument serial number must already be entered in the
following software menu: Settings > System > Analyzer serial number.
Serial number must be entered in the same format as written on the label at the rear of the instrument.
Once inputted through the software application, the serial number is available:
■ When pressing the unlock button in the login screen
■ At the rear of the instrument
■ On the results printouts footer
■ In the following software screen: Settings > System > Analyzer serial number.
Technical Manual
RAS816A - 2 RAA022
Password recovery
2. To Unlock the Access in Case of Password Loss

The instrument current date has to be up to date.
You can generate a security code to unlock the access. This security code lasts seven days and allows you to
change the technician password.
■ Select technician as Name.

■ Pressthe unlock button from the login screen.
The serial number appears.
■ Go to the Password eRecovery application

from ITS Web site http://its-information.horiba-
abx.com/.
■ Select the current date.
■ Select the instrument and its associated serial
number from the drop-down lists.
If your serial number does not appear in the list,
please contact ITS: itsh.med@horiba.com.
■ Select Lost password as access type.
■ Click Generate.
■ Thegenerated code appears in the Access
code area.
■ If necessary, send this code to your email box.
■ Onthe instrument enter the code in the

Security Code field (14 digits).
■ Validate.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS816A - 3
Password recovery
■ Enteryour new password from 1 to 10

alphanumeric characters twice.
■ Validate.
3. To Generate a Temporary Code

In case of temporary access to technician functionalities (for instance during customer service call), you can
generate a code to extend end users rights to technician rights. This code lasts from its creation until the end
of the day.
The instrument current date has to be up to date.
■ Go to the Password eRecovery application

from ITS Web site http://its-information.horiba-
abx.com/.
■ Select the current date.
■ Select the instrument and its associated serial
number from the drop-down lists.
If your serial number does not appear in the list,
please contact ITS: itsh.med@horiba.com.
■ Select
One day temporary password as
access type.
■ Click Generate.
■ Thegenerated code appears in the Access
code area.
■ If necessary, send this code to your email box.
Technical Manual
RAS816A - 4 RAA022
Password recovery
■ On the instrument, select technician as Name.

■ Enter the temporary code as password in the
login screen (14 digits).
■ Validate.
The technician mode disables reagent and technical alarms. At the end of the intervention, log in as user or
super user when technician mode is no more necessary.
Technical Manual
RAA022 RAS816A - 5
Password recovery
Technical Manual
RAS816A - 6 RAA022
Exploded Views
8 - Exploded Views
1. List ................................................................................................................................... 2
2. Valves .............................................................................................................................. 9
3. Carriage assy ................................................................................................................ 10
4. Rinse block & needles ................................................................................................... 11
5. Reagent syringe ............................................................................................................ 12
6. DIFF syringe .................................................................................................................. 13
7. Sampling syringe ........................................................................................................... 14
8. Waste syringe (1 & 2) .................................................................................................... 15
9. Counting syringe assy ................................................................................................... 16
10. 2.5 mL dispenser assy (PXLR) .................................................................................... 17
11. Diluent tank assy ......................................................................................................... 17
12. Optical bench for P80 / PXL80 ................................................................................... 18
13. Optical bench for Pentra XLR ..................................................................................... 19
14. Sampling percutor ....................................................................................................... 20
15. Chambers .................................................................................................................... 21
16. Chamber parts ............................................................................................................ 22
17. Thermostated room .................................................................................................... 23
18. Tube holder assy ......................................................................................................... 24
19. Mixer assy ................................................................................................................... 25
20. Barcode readers ......................................................................................................... 26
21. Loader assy ................................................................................................................. 27
22. Transfer assy ............................................................................................................... 28
23. Ejection assy ............................................................................................................... 29
24. Front covers magnets & switches ............................................................................... 30
25. Main fan ...................................................................................................................... 30
26. Electronic boards ........................................................................................................ 31
27. Cups ............................................................................................................................ 32
28. Internal computer ........................................................................................................ 33
29. Reagent straws and tubings ....................................................................................... 34
30. Stickers ....................................................................................................................... 35
31. Covers ......................................................................................................................... 36
32. References .................................................................................................................. 37
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
List
1. List
N° in
Drawing Reference Designation
drawing
“2.Valves, page 9” 1 XDB045A VALVE, LIQUID 12 VALVES ASSY (1-12)
“2.Valves, page 9” 2 XDB041A VALVE, LIQ. 2 WAYS/NC W/O COIL
“2.Valves, page 9” 3 XDB042A VALVE, LIQ. 3 WAYS W/O COIL
“2.Valves, page 9” 8 XBA685A TAKASAGO EQUIPED VALVE ASSEMBLY
TAKASAGO WIRING KIT (DAD136A +
“2.Valves, page 9” 9 XEA959AS
XBA645A)
“2.Valves, page 9” 10 EZZ003A TAKASAGO VALVE MANIFOLD
TAKASAGO SEALS AND SCREWS
“2.Valves, page 9” 11 XEA960AS
ASSEMBLY
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 1 XDA995CS KIT, CARRIAGE ASSY P80
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 2 FBR011A BELT, NEEDLE BELT L=364 P60/P80
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 3 FBR020A BELT, CARRIAGE L=660 P80
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 4 XBA396A SENSOR, SAMP NEEDLE MOVE P60/80
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 5 XBA474A MOTOR, RACK TRF / NEEDLE P80
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 6 GBG082A NEEDLE, BLOCK SHAFT
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 7 XDA930A CARRIAGE, PIERCING ASSY
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 8 GBG172A CARRIAGE, SLIDING PLATE
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 9 GBG176AS CARRIAGE, NEEDLE STOP P60C+/P80
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 10 DBE014A CABLE, BUSHING D=3.2 BLACK
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 11 GBG093A MOTOR, PULLEY P60
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 12 XBA478B MOTOR, CARRIAGE P80
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 13 XBA342A SENSOR, CARRIAGE MOVE P80
“3.Carriage assy, page 10” 14 XCA191A CHAMBER, ISOLATOR VENT. P80
“4.Rinse block & needles, page 11” 1 XEA810AS KIT, NEEDLE RINSE BLOCK PC+/P80
“4.Rinse block & needles, page 11” 2 FAA055A O-RING, SAMPL. NEEDLE
“4.Rinse block & needles, page 11” 3 FAA013A O-RING, NEEDLE RINSE BLOCK C+, P80
“4.Rinse block & needles, page 11” 4 FAA057A O-RING, PIERCING NEEDLE P120/C+/P80
“4.Rinse block & needles, page 11” 5 GBL0397 NEEDLE, PIERCING P80
“4.Rinse block & needles, page 11” 6 XDA655ES NEEDLE, SAMPLING NEEDLE
“5.Reagent syringe, page 12” 1 XDB001BS SYRINGE, REAGENT ASSY P60/P80
“5.Reagent syringe, page 12” 2 GBG033A SYRINGE, REAG BLOCK BODY P60/P80
“5.Reagent syringe, page 12” 3 XDA622A O-RING, REAGENT SYRINGE + WASHER
“5.Reagent syringe, page 12” 4 GBC030A SYRINGE, REAGENT PISTON P60/P80
“5.Reagent syringe, page 12” 5 GBC031A SYRINGE, LYSE PISTON MIC/P60/P80
“5.Reagent syringe, page 12” 6 FAA073A O-RING, REAGENT SYRINGE D=6.3+
“5.Reagent syringe, page 12” 7 XDB003D SYRINGE, REAGENT+MOTOR ASSY P80
“5.Reagent syringe, page 12” 8 XDB002BS MOTOR, BLOCK FOR REAG. SYR. P80
“5.Reagent syringe, page 12” 9 XBA485A MOTOR, SYRINGE EQUIPPED P80
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
List
N° in
drawing
“5.Reagent syringe, page 12” 10 GBG034A SYRINGE, 5DIFF BLOCK BOTTOM P60
“5.Reagent syringe, page 12” 11 GBG035B SYRINGE, REAGENT HOLDER PLATE
“6.DIFF syringe, page 13” 1 GBG037A SYRINGE, 5DIFF BLOC BODY P60/80
“6.DIFF syringe, page 13” 2 FAA040A O'RING, 5DIFF SYRINGE D=12.1
“6.DIFF syringe, page 13” 3 FAA067A O'RING, 5DIFF SYRINGE D=2.4
“6.DIFF syringe, page 13” 4 GBG042A SYRINGE, CROSSPIECE P60/SPS/P80
“6.DIFF syringe, page 13” 5 GBG040A SYRINGE, 5DIFF PISTON P60/P80
“6.DIFF syringe, page 13” 6 XDA616AS NEEDLE, 190 µL SYR. P60/SPS/P80
“6.DIFF syringe, page 13” 7 XDA591AS SYRINGE, 5 DIFF SYRINGE ASSY P60/P80
“6.DIFF syringe, page 13” 8 XDB033AS SYRINGE, 5DIFF BLOCK+MOTOR ASSY
“6.DIFF syringe, page 13” 9 XDA826AS MOTOR, BLOCK 5DIFF SYR. P60/P80
“6.DIFF syringe, page 13” 10 XBA548AS MOTOR, FOR 5 DIFF SYRINGE
“6.DIFF syringe, page 13” 11 GBG038A SYRINGE, 5DIFF BOTTOM PLATE
“6.DIFF syringe, page 13” 12 XBA460A CABLE, SYR. SWITCH L=500 P60/P80
“7.Sampling syringe, page 14” 1 GBG044A SYRINGE, SAMP. SYR. BODY P60/P80
“7.Sampling syringe, page 14” 2 FAA064A O-RING, SAMPLING SYR. P60/P80
“7.Sampling syringe, page 14” 3 GBG048A SYRINGE, SAMPLING CROSSPIECE
“7.Sampling syringe, page 14” 4 XDA617AS NEEDLE, 100 µL SAMPL. SYR. P60/P80
“7.Sampling syringe, page 14” 5 XDA593AS SYRINGE, SAMPLING SYRINGE ASSY
“7.Sampling syringe, page 14” 6 XDA834AS SYRINGE, SAMPL BLOCK+MOTOR ASSY
“7.Sampling syringe, page 14” 7 XDA824AS MOTOR, BLOCK SAMPL. SYR. P60/P80
“7.Sampling syringe, page 14” 8 XBA547AS MOTOR, FOR SAMPLING SYRINGE
“7.Sampling syringe, page 14” 9 GBG045A SYRINGE, SAMPLING BOTTOM PLATE
“8.Waste syringe (1 & 2), page 15” 1 XDA827BS SYRINGE, WASTE CPTE P60/C+/P80
“8.Waste syringe (1 & 2), page 15” 2 CAE010A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCC5-81
“8.Waste syringe (1 & 2), page 15” 3 FAA017A O'RING, TANK MIN/AG+WASTE MIC
“8.Waste syringe (1 & 2), page 15” 4 GBG219A O'RING, ANTI EXTRUSION RING
“8.Waste syringe (1 & 2), page 15” 5 GBG272A SYRINGE, VACCUM PUMPBODY P60/80
“8.Waste syringe (1 & 2), page 15” 6 FAL009A SILENT BLOCK, FOR SUB ASSEMBLIES
“8.Waste syringe (1 & 2), page 15” 7 XBA458A CABLE, SYR. SWITCH L=300 P60/P80
“8.Waste syringe (1 & 2), page 15” 8 XBA462A CABLE, MOTORS L=300 P60/P80
“8.Waste syringe (1 & 2), page 15” 9 XDA621A O-RING, VAC/WASTE PUMP + WASHER
“9.Counting syringe assy, page 16” 1 XDA828BS SYRINGE, VACUUM CPTE P60/C+/P80
“9.Counting syringe assy, page 16” 2 CAE010A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCC5-81
“9.Counting syringe assy, page 16” 3 FAA017A O'RING, TANK MIN/AG+WASTE MIC
“9.Counting syringe assy, page 16” 4 GBG219A O'RING, ANTI EXTRUSION RING
“9.Counting syringe assy, page 16” 5 GBG273A SYRINGE, VACCUM PUMPBODY P60/80
“9.Counting syringe assy, page 16” 6 FAL009A SILENT BLOCK, FOR SUB ASSEMBLIES
“9.Counting syringe assy, page 16” 7 XBA458A CABLE, SYR. SWITCH L=300 P60/P80
“9.Counting syringe assy, page 16” 8 XBA462A CABLE, MOTORS L=300 P60/P80
“9.Counting syringe assy, page 16” 9 XDA621A O-RING, VAC/WASTE PUMP + WASHER
“10.2.5 mL dispenser assy (PXLR), page 17” 2 XDA553B 2.5 ML DISPENSER
“11.Diluent tank assy, page 17” 1 XDA626AS CHAMBER, DIL. TANK COVER P60/P80
“11.Diluent tank assy, page 17” 2 GAL094A CHAMBER, WAST. P120/DIL TANK P60
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
List
N° in
drawing
“11.Diluent tank assy, page 17” 3 XEA286AS KIT, O'RING + WASHER P60/P80/P120
“11.Diluent tank assy, page 17” 4 XDA605A CHAMBER, DIL. TANK ASSY P60/P80
“12.Optical bench for P80 / PXL80, page 18” 1 DAJ007A OPTICAL, LAMP FOR BENCH P60/P80
“12.Optical bench for P80 / PXL80, page 18” 2 FAL006A SILENT BLOC, COMPR. VEP
“12.Optical bench for P80 / PXL80, page 18” 3 1300012654 CHAMBER, LMNE FLOWCELL P60/P80
“12.Optical bench for P80 / PXL80, page 18” 4 XBA399C FITTING, GROUND FLOWCELL P60/80
“12.Optical bench for P80 / PXL80, page 18” 5 XBA490A CABLE, LMNE FLOWCEL CATHOD WIRE
“12.Optical bench for P80 / PXL80, page 18” 6 XBA403A TUBING, SHIELD REPARTITOR P60
“12.Optical bench for P80 / PXL80, page 18” 7 XEA616BS KIT, FLOWCELL INJECTOR TUBE
“12.Optical bench for P80 / PXL80, page 18” 8 XBA193A CABLE, COAX BASO-O.D LMNE-LMNE
“12.Optical bench for P80 / PXL80, page 18” 9 XEA663A CABLE, COAX LMNE FLOWCEL P60/80
“12.Optical bench for P80 / PXL80, page 18” 10 XDA729BS OPTICAL, BENCH COMPLETE P80
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 1 XDB287AS RETIC OPTICAl BENCH XLR
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 2 1300012656 RETIC FLOWCELL XLR
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 3 DAJ007A OPTICAL, LAMP FOR BENCH
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 4 XAA695A CIS/OD PREAMPLIFIER BOARD XLR
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 5 CBR035A APD PREAMPLIFIER BOARD XLR
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 6 XBA844A CABLE, LMNE FLOWCEL CATHOD WIRE
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 7 XDB298AS SHUTTER ASSY
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 8 FAL016A SILENT BLOCK L17 M4x10 MM 55Sh
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 9 CAE034A SWITCH XCG5-J1Z1 (SAIA)
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 10 GBD880A CHAMBER, PEELABLE SPACER
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 11 GBL0555 LASER PROTECTION PLATE
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 12 KZZ054A SKIFFY KNURLED SCREW 140 0410
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 13 DBK034A WIRING HOLDER
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 14 DAC045A COAX. MMCX RG316 400MM
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 15 XBA845A OPTICAL FLOWCELL TUBE SHIELDING
“13.Optical bench for Pentra XLR, page 19” 16 XBA843A CIS OPTICAL COAX FLOWCELL XLR
“14.Sampling percutor, page 20” 1 XDB006AS SAMPLING, NEW PIERCING+CAM
“14.Sampling percutor, page 20” 2 XDB008AS SAMPLING, PIERCING OLD CAM
“14.Sampling percutor, page 20” 3 CAE006A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XC5-81-S2
“14.Sampling percutor, page 20” 4 DAL016C MOTOR, REDUCTOR 24 V RAP. 40+GEAR
“15.Chambers, page 21” 1 XDB035C 5 CHAMBERS BLOCK ASSY EQUIPED
5 CHAMBERS TAKASAGO BLOCK ASSY
“15.Chambers, page 21” 1* XDB021E
EQUIPED
“15.Chambers, page 21” 2 XDB036BS 4 CHAMBERS BLOCK ASSY EQUIPED
4 CHAMBERS TAKASAGO BLOCK ASSY
“15.Chambers, page 21” 2* XDB017ES
EQUIPED
“15.Chambers, page 21” 3 XDB019BS WBC/BASO CHAMBER EQUIPED
“15.Chambers, page 21” 4 XDB250AS 4 CHAMBERS TAKASAGO BLOCK ASSY
“16.Chamber parts, page 22” 1 XDB035C 5 CHAMBERS BLOCK ASSY
“16.Chamber parts, page 22” 2 GBG325A 4 CHAMBERS BLOCK
“16.Chamber parts, page 22” 3 GBG326A WBC/BASO CHAMBER NAKED
“16.Chamber parts, page 22” 4 GBG275A FLAT JOINT, COUNTING HEAD
“16.Chamber parts, page 22” 5 FAA066A O’ RING, DRAINING CHAMBER
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
List
N° in
drawing
“16.Chamber parts, page 22” 6 FAK001A APERTURE 50 µ
“16.Chamber parts, page 22” 7 GBG003A DRAINING, 1/4 TURN
“16.Chamber parts, page 22” 8 GBG007A CHAMBER, DRAINING CHICANE
“16.Chamber parts, page 22” 9 GBG157A CHAMBER, COUNTING HEAD
“16.Chamber parts, page 22” 10 XBA398B COAXIAL RBC & WBC PENTRA 60 CE
“16.Chamber parts, page 22” 11 FAK003A APERTURE 80 µ
HGB PHOTOMETER (HGB PHOTOCELL
“16.Chamber parts, page 22” 12 + 12* XBA389B
ALONE: CAX005A)
“16.Chamber parts, page 22” 13 XBA621A SENSOR, CHAMBERS DRAINING P80
“17.Thermostated room, page 23” 1 XCA167A CHAMBER, ISOLATOR
“17.Thermostated room, page 23” 2 GBL0089 CUP, OVERFLOW T° ROOM P80
“17.Thermostated room, page 23” 3 XDB035C CHAMBERS, 5 CHAMBERS BLOCK
“17.Thermostated room, page 23” 4 GBC015A CLIP, MIX CH. HOLDER MIC/P120
“17.Thermostated room, page 23” 5 XDB031CS HEATER, BLOCK COMPLETE P60/P80
“17.Thermostated room, page 23” 6 XCA166A CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (LONG)
“17.Thermostated room, page 23” 7 XDA813B KIT, T° ROOM FAN + HARNESS P80
“17.Thermostated room, page 23” 8 EBB059AS FILTER, RUBBER CAP DEBRIS 25 MM
“18.Tube holder assy, page 24” 1 GBL0183S SAMPLING, STD TUBE HOLDER P80
“18.Tube holder assy, page 24” 1* GBL0372S SAMPLING, OPT TUBE HOLDER P80
“18.Tube holder assy, page 24” 2 XDA728A SAMPLING, PIERCING BLOCK P80
“18.Tube holder assy, page 24” 3 FCB001A SAMPLING, BRAKING GEAR MIC/SPS
“18.Tube holder assy, page 24” 4 DAM009A VALVE, SOLENOID PIERC. BLOCK
“18.Tube holder assy, page 24” 5 CAE006A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XC5-81-S2
“18.Tube holder assy, page 24” 6 GBL0122 SAMPLING, LOCK PLATE TUBE HOLDER
“18.Tube holder assy, page 24” 7 CAE019A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCC5-81-S4
SAMPLING, STD TUBE HOLDER P80
“18.Tube holder assy, page 24” A XDB064A
(RAN273A)
SAMPLING, OPT TUBE HOLDER P80
“18.Tube holder assy, page 24” A* 1300015600
(RAN273A)
“18.Tube holder assy, page 24” B XDB063A SWITCH, EMERGENCY SWITCH ASSEMBLY
“18.Tube holder assy, page 24” C GBL0324 SPRING BLADE
“18.Tube holder assy, page 24” D CAE010A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCC5-81
“19.Mixer assy, page 25” 1 XDA972B MOTOR, MIXING COMPLETE P80
“19.Mixer assy, page 25” 2 XDA973AS SAMPLING, GRABBER BLOC ASSY P80
“19.Mixer assy, page 25” 3 DAM009A VALVE, SOLENOID PIERC. BLOCK
“19.Mixer assy, page 25” 4 XBA432A SENSOR, HOME RACK TRF/MOVE GRAB
“20.Barcode readers, page 26” 1 CBC008A PCB, BARCODE INTERNAL P80
“20.Barcode readers, page 26” 2 XBA725A PCB, EXT BARCODE USB PXLR
“20.Barcode readers, page 26” 3 XBA453B PCB, BARCODE EXTERNAL P80/XL80
“21.Loader assy, page 27” 1 XDA792AS SAMPLING, LEFT RACK LOADER P80
“21.Loader assy, page 27” 2 GBL0385 COVER, RACK LOADING TRAY P80
“21.Loader assy, page 27” 3 CAE019A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCC5-81-S4
“21.Loader assy, page 27” 4 XDA791AS SAMPLING, RIGHT RACK LOADER P80
“21.Loader assy, page 27” 5 XBA476A MOTOR, RACK LOADING AXIS P80
“21.Loader assy, page 27” 6 XBA475A MOTOR, RACK LOADING P80
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
List
N° in
drawing
“21.Loader assy, page 27” 7 XDA796AS SAMPLING, RACK LOADING LOCK P80
“21.Loader assy, page 27” 8 XDA964A KIT, LOADING FRONT PLATE EQUIPED
“21.Loader assy, page 27” 9 GBL0352 COVER, NEW FRONT PLATE LOADING
XDA974AS SWITCH, LEFT LOADING EQUIP P80 (Switch
“21.Loader assy, page 27” 10
alone: CAE019A)
“21.Loader assy, page 27” 11 XDA793AS BELT, RACK LOADING
“22.Transfer assy, page 28” 1 XDA794A SAMPLING, TUBE DETECTION P80
“22.Transfer assy, page 28” 2 CAE011A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCH5-S2
“22.Transfer assy, page 28” 3 CAE010A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCC5-81
“22.Transfer assy, page 28” 4 XDA795A SAMPLING, RACK TRACER ASSY P80
“22.Transfer assy, page 28” 5 XDA732A CARRIAGE, SAMPLING ASSY P80
“22.Transfer assy, page 28” 6 XBA432A SENSOR, HOME RACK TRF/MOVE GRAB
“22.Transfer assy, page 28” 7 XBA474A MOTOR, RACK TRF / NEEDLE P80
“22.Transfer assy, page 28” 8 XAA478B PCB, SOLENOID RACK TRANSFER
“23.Ejection assy, page 29” 1 XDA971BS KIT, EJECTION PLATE EQUIPPED
“23.Ejection assy, page 29” 2 CAE011A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCH5-S2
“23.Ejection assy, page 29” 3 GBL0062 CARRIAGE, RACK EJEC. PUSHROD P80
XDA975A SWITCH, RIGHT LOADING EQUIP P80
“23.Ejection assy, page 29” 4
(Switch alone: CAE019A)
“23.Ejection assy, page 29” 5 GBL0068 COVER, RACK EJECTION TRAY
“24.Front covers magnets & switches,
1 FAJ008A COVER, CLOSING MAGNET P80
page 30”
“24.Front covers magnets & switches,
2 CAE020A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XGG2A
page 30”
“25.Main fan, page 30” 1 XBA393A FAN, MAIN FAN 24 V P60/P80
XAA544* PCB, MAIN PCB P80 + VERSION (*: index
according to the version number)
XAA545* PCB, MAIN PCB PXL80 + VERSION (*: index
“26.Electronic boards, page 31” 1
XAA694* PCB, MAIN PCB XLR + VERSION (*: index
“26.Electronic boards, page 31” 2 XAA459BS PCB, MOTOR BOARD P80
“26.Electronic boards, page 31” 3 XAA429AS PCB, LED BOARD FOR COVER P60/80
“26.Electronic boards, page 31” 4 XAA458AS PCB, PREAMPLI BOARD for P80/PXL80
“26.Electronic boards, page 31” 5 DZZ018 CABLE, FERRITE FOR COAXIALS
“26.Electronic boards, page 31” 6 XAA695A PCB, CIS OD PREMPLI BOARD for XLR
“26.Electronic boards, page 31” 7 CBR035A PCB, APD PREAMPLIFIER BOARD XLR
“26.Electronic boards, page 31” 8 XAA705A PCB, HUB BOARD XLR
“27.Cups, page 32” 1 GBL0164 CUP, OVERFLOW REAG. BOTTLE P80
“27.Cups, page 32” 2 GBL0215 CUP, OVERFLOW TOP MOTOR PCB P80
“27.Cups, page 32” 3 GBL0332 CUP, OVERFLOW MOTOR BOARD P80
“27.Cups, page 32” 4 GBL0193 CUP, OVERFLOW LIQ. SYRINGES P80
“27.Cups, page 32” 5 GBL0194 DRAIN SYRINGE RECUP. TRAY
“27.Cups, page 32” 6 GBL0213 CUP, OVERFLOW MAIN BOARD
“27.Cups, page 32” 7 FBM003A COVER, REAGENT COVER HOLDER P80
“27.Cups, page 32” 8 GBL0149 CUP, FOR GRABBER
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
List
N° in
drawing
“27.Cups, page 32” 9 GBL0089 CUP, OVERFLOW T° ROOM P80
“28.Internal computer, page 33” 1 XAA511BS PCB, TOUCH PANEL FUTJI P80/P400
“28.Internal computer, page 33” 2 CBT014A PCB, FLOPPY DISK READER P80
CBT013A or
PCB, CD-ROM READER
“28.Internal computer, page 33” 3 CBT018A
PCB, DVDRW
or CBT021A
“28.Internal computer, page 33” 4 Refer to RAN326 Technical Note
“28.Internal computer, page 33” 5 XBA507AS FAN, FOR COMPUTER P80
“28.Internal computer, page 33” 6 CBR019A PCB, TACTILE BOARD FUTJI PC P80
“28.Internal computer, page 33” 7 ABC010A PCB, BACKLIGHT NEC COMPUTER P80
“28.Internal computer, page 33” 8 Refer to RAN326 Technical Note
“28.Internal computer, page 33” 9 DAK026A FAN, FAN FOR SOCKET 370 PC P80
CCC029A PCB, SODIM 256 MB P80
“28.Internal computer, page 33” 10
CCC033A PCP, DDR2 RAM
“29.Reagent straws and tubings, page 34” 1 GBG145A REAGENT, STRAW D=20 P60/P80
“29.Reagent straws and tubings, page 34” 2 GBG155A REAGENT, BOTTLE STOPPER D=25
“29.Reagent straws and tubings, page 34” 3 GBG245A REAGENT, STRAW D=28 P60/P80/ACT
“29.Reagent straws and tubings, page 34” 4 GAK302A REAGENT, BOTTLE STOPPER D=40
“29.Reagent straws and tubings, page 34” 5 XEA018A REAGENT, STRAW DILUENT L=360
“29.Reagent straws and tubings, page 34” 6 GBC284A REAGENT, STRAW D=28 XLR
EAE057AS
“29.Reagent straws and tubings, page 34” 7 TUBING, PTFE 1,59X0,8 LG=3M
(1202249057)
HAX0246 STICKER, RACK LABEL TYPE "A" 1-20
HAX0247 STICKER, RACK LABEL TYPE "B" 1-20
“30.Stickers, page 35” 1 HAX0250 STICKER, RACK LABEL TYPE "A" 41-99
HAX0252 STICKER, RACK LABEL TYPE "C" 1-20
HAE026B STICKER, VALVES JOUCO (1-10)
“30.Stickers, page 35” 2
“30.Stickers, page 35” 3 HAX034A STICKER, PC CONNECTIONS P80
“30.Stickers, page 35” 4 HAU108A STICKER, LASER
“30.Stickers, page 35” 5 HAX0356 STICKER, PC USB CONNECTION
HAX0236 STICKER, P80/XL80 CHAMBER equipped
“30.Stickers, page 35” 6 with Takasago valves
HAX0357 STICKER, XLR CHAMBER
“30.Stickers, page 35” 7 HAX0355 STICKER, OPTICAL BENCH BLOCKING
XDA803AS COVER, FRONT LEFT COVER P80
“31.Covers, page 36” 1
XDA896AS COVER, FRONT LEFT COVER XL/XLR
XDA804AS COVER, FRONT RIGHT COVER P80
XDA897BS COVER, FRONT RIGHT COVER XL/XLR
“31.Covers, page 36” 3 XDA912BS COVER, COMPUTER COVER
“31.Covers, page 36” 4 XDA895AS COVER, RIGHT DOOR EQUIPED 80 / XL
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
List
N° in
drawing
GBL0227 DOOR, MANUAL SAMPLING P80
GBL0313 DOOR, MANUAL SAMPLING XL / XLR
HAX0309 STICKER, COVER LABEL "PENTRA XL80
HAX0348 STICKER, COVER LABEL "PENTRA XLR"
“31.Covers, page 36” 7 HAX0307 STICKER, COVER LABEL "HORIBA Medical"
“31.Covers, page 36” 8 GBL0316 COVER, REAGENT COVER P80 / XL
“31.Covers, page 36” 9 GBL0318 GLUEING BOARD + RIGHT SIDE P80XL
“31.Covers, page 36” 10 GBL0315 LEFT SIDE COVER P80 XL
“31.Covers, page 36” 11 GBL0320 COVER, LEFT DOOR XLR
“31.Covers, page 36” 12 GBL0317 COVER, UPPER COVER
GBL0659
“31.Covers, page 36” 13 COVER, 1L LYSE REAG TRAY KIT
(1209179289)
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Valves
2. Valves
1
4
3
7
5
6
10
11
9
8
Index P/n Designation

1 XDB045A VALVE, LIQUID 12 VALVES ASSY (1-12)
2 XDB041A VALVE, LIQ. 2 WAYS/NC W/O COIL
3 XDB042A VALVE, LIQ. 3 WAYS W/O COIL
8 XBA685A TAKASAGO EQUIPED VALVE ASSEMBLY
9 XEA959AS TAKASAGO WIRING KIT (DAD136A + XBA645A)
10 EZZ003A TAKASAGO VALVE MANIFOLD
11 XEA960AS TAKASAGO SEALS AND SCREWS ASSEMBLY
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Carriage assy
3. Carriage assy
1
8 11
4
2
12
10
14
6
3
7 13

1 XDA995CS KIT, CARRIAGE ASSY P80
2 FBR011A BELT, NEEDLE BELT L=364 P60/P80
3 FBR020A BELT, CARRIAGE L=660 P80
4 XBA396A SENSOR, SAMP NEEDLE MOVE P60/80
5 XBA474A MOTOR, RACK TRF / NEEDLE P80
6 GBG082A NEEDLE, BLOCK SHAFT
7 XDA930A CARRIAGE, PIERCING ASSY
8 GBG172A CARRIAGE, SLIDING PLATE
9 GBG176AS CARRIAGE, NEEDLE STOP P60C+/P80
10 DBE014A CABLE, BUSHING D=3.2 BLACK
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Rinse block & needles

11 GBG093A MOTOR, PULLEY P60
12 XBA478B MOTOR, CARRIAGE P80
13 XBA342A SENSOR, CARRIAGE MOVE P80
14 XCA191A CHAMBER, ISOLATOR VENT. P80
4. Rinse block & needles

1
2 3 6

1 XEA810AS KIT, NEEDLE RINSE BLOCK PC+/P80
2 FAA055A O-RING, SAMPL. NEEDLE
3 FAA013A O-RING, NEEDLE RINSE BLOCK C+, P80
4 FAA057A O-RING, PIERCING NEEDLE P120/C+/P80
5 GBL0397 NEEDLE, PIERCING P80
6 XDA655ES NEEDLE, SAMPLING NEEDLE
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Reagent syringe
5. Reagent syringe
9 3
x4
7
6
4
x4
8 5
1
10
11

1 XDB001BS SYRINGE, REAGENT ASSY P60/P80
2 GBG033A SYRINGE, REAG BLOCK BODY P60/P80
3 XDA622A O-RING, REAGENT SYRINGE + WASHER
4 GBC030A SYRINGE, REAGENT PISTON P60/P80
5 GBC031A SYRINGE, LYSE PISTON MIC/P60/P80
6 FAA073A O-RING, REAGENT SYRINGE D=6.3+
7 XDB003D SYRINGE, REAGENT+MOTOR ASSY P80
8 XDB002BS MOTOR, BLOCK FOR REAG. SYR. P80
9 XBA485A MOTOR, SYRINGE EQUIPPED P80
10 GBG034A SYRINGE, 5DIFF BLOCK BOTTOM P60
11 GBG035B SYRINGE, REAGENT HOLDER PLATE
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
DIFF syringe
6. DIFF syringe
9
7
1
2
8
3 x4
4 x2
12
10
5
11
6 x2

1 GBG037A SYRINGE, 5DIFF BLOC BODY P60/80
2 FAA040A O'RING, 5DIFF SYRINGE D=12.1
3 FAA067A O'RING, 5DIFF SYRINGE D=2.4
4 GBG042A SYRINGE, CROSSPIECE P60/SPS/P80
5 GBG040A SYRINGE, 5DIFF PISTON P60/P80
6 XDA616AS NEEDLE, 190 µL SYR. P60/SPS/P80
7 XDA591AS SYRINGE, 5 DIFF SYRINGE ASSY P60/P80
8 XDB033AS SYRINGE, 5DIFF BLOCK+MOTOR ASSY
9 XDA826AS MOTOR, BLOCK 5DIFF SYR. P60/P80
10 XBA548AS MOTOR, FOR 5 DIFF SYRINGE
11 GBG038A SYRINGE, 5DIFF BOTTOM PLATE
12 XBA460A CABLE, SYR. SWITCH L=500 P60/P80
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Sampling syringe
7. Sampling syringe
2 x2
5
8
4

1 GBG044A SYRINGE, SAMP. SYR. BODY P60/P80
2 FAA064A O-RING, SAMPLING SYR. P60/P80
3 GBG048A SYRINGE, SAMPLING CROSSPIECE
4 XDA617AS NEEDLE, 100 µL SAMPL. SYR. P60/P80
5 XDA593AS SYRINGE, SAMPLING SYRINGE ASSY
6 XDA834AS SYRINGE, SAMPL BLOCK+MOTOR ASSY
7 XDA824AS MOTOR, BLOCK SAMPL. SYR. P60/P80
8 XBA547AS MOTOR, FOR SAMPLING SYRINGE
9 GBG045A SYRINGE, SAMPLING BOTTOM PLATE
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Waste syringe (1 & 2)
8. Waste syringe (1 & 2)
Please refer to RAS325C: 6 month maintenance, Draining & counting syringes and to
RAH964 technical note for more information.
2 9
8 1
3
4
7
5
6 x4

1 XDA827BS SYRINGE, WASTE CPTE P60/C+/P80
2 CAE010A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCC5-81
3 FAA017A O'RING, TANK MIN/AG+WASTE MIC
4 GBG219A O'RING, ANTI EXTRUSION RING
5 GBG272A SYRINGE, VACCUM PUMPBODY P60/80
6 FAL009A SILENT BLOCK, FOR SUB ASSEMBLIES
8 XBA462A CABLE, MOTORS L=300 P60/P80
9 XDA621A O-RING, VAC/WASTE PUMP + WASHER
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Counting syringe assy
9. Counting syringe assy
Please refer to RAS325C: 6 month maintenance, Draining & counting syringes and to
RAH964 technical note for more information.
2 9
3
4
6 x4

1 XDA828BS SYRINGE, VACUUM CPTE P60/C+/P80
3 FAA017A O'RING, TANK MIN/AG+WASTE MIC
4 GBG219A O'RING, ANTI EXTRUSION RING
5 GBG273A SYRINGE, VACCUM PUMPBODY P60/80
6 FAL009A SILENT BLOCK, FOR SUB ASSEMBLIES
8 XBA462A CABLE, MOTORS L=300 P60/P80
9 XDA621A O-RING, VAC/WASTE PUMP + WASHER
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
2.5 mL dispenser assy (PXLR)
10. 2.5 mL dispenser assy (PXLR)

1 XDA553B 2.5 ML DISPENSER
11. Diluent tank assy

1 XDA626AS CHAMBER, DIL. TANK COVER P60/P80
2 GAL094A CHAMBER, WAST. P120/DIL TANK P60
3 XEA286AS KIT, O'RING + WASHER P60/P80/P120
4 XDA605A CHAMBER, DIL. TANK ASSY P60/P80
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Optical bench for P80 / PXL80
12. Optical bench for P80 / PXL80
7 10
1
6
2 x4
4
8

1 DAJ007A OPTICAL, LAMP FOR BENCH P60/P80
2 FAL006A SILENT BLOC, COMPR. VEP
3 1300012654 CHAMBER, LMNE FLOWCELL P60/P80
4 XBA399C FITTING, GROUND FLOWCELL P60/80
5 XBA490A CABLE, LMNE FLOWCEL CATHOD WIRE
6 XBA403A TUBING, SHIELD REPARTITOR P60
7 XEA616BS KIT, FLOWCELL INJECTOR TUBE
8 XBA193A CABLE, COAX BASO-O.D LMNE-LMNE
9 XEA663A CABLE, COAX LMNE FLOWCEL P60/80
10 XDA729BS OPTICAL, BENCH COMPLETE P80
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Optical bench for Pentra XLR
13. Optical bench for Pentra XLR
12
11
9 2
3
13
10
4
7 6
16
14
15
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Sampling percutor

1 XDB287AS RETIC OPTICAl BENCH XLR
2 1300012656 RETIC FLOWCELL XLR
3 DAJ007A OPTICAL, LAMP FOR BENCH
4 XAA695A CIS/OD PREAMPLIFIER BOARD XLR
5 CBR035A APD PREAMPLIFIER BOARD XLR
6 XBA844A CABLE, LMNE FLOWCEL CATHOD WIRE
7 XDB298AS SHUTTER ASSY
8 FAL016A SILENT BLOCK L17 M4x10 MM 55Sh
9 CAE034A SWITCH XCG5-J1Z1 (SAIA)
10 GBD880A CHAMBER, PEELABLE SPACER
11 GBL0555 LASER PROTECTION PLATE
12 KZZ054A SKIFFY KNURLED SCREW 140 0410
13 DBK034A WIRING HOLDER
14 DAC045A COAX. MMCX RG316 400MM
15 XBA845A OPTICAL FLOWCELL TUBE SHIELDING
16 XBA843A CIS OPTICAL COAX FLOWCELL XLR
14. Sampling percutor
2
4
3
1

1 XDB006AS SAMPLING, NEW PIERCING+CAM
2 XDB008AS SAMPLING, PIERCING OLD CAM
3 CAE006A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XC5-81-S2
4 DAL016C MOTOR, REDUCTOR 24 V RAP. 40+GEAR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Chambers
15. Chambers
1 1*
2*

1 XDB035C 5 CHAMBERS BLOCK ASSY EQUIPED
1* XDB021E 5 CHAMBERS TAKASAGO BLOCK ASSY EQUIPED
2 XDB036BS 4 CHAMBERS BLOCK ASSY EQUIPED
2* XDB017ES 4 CHAMBERS TAKASAGO BLOCK ASSY EQUIPED
3 XDB019BS WBC/BASO CHAMBER EQUIPED
4 XDB250AS 4 CHAMBERS TAKASAGO BLOCK ASSY
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Chamber parts
16. Chamber parts
10 x2
3
4 x4
12
9 x2
11
2
6
5
x4
8
x4
1 7 x4 12*
13

1 XDB035C 5 CHAMBERS BLOCK ASSY
2 GBG325A 4 CHAMBERS BLOCK
3 GBG326A WBC/BASO CHAMBER NAKED
4 GBG275A FLAT JOINT, COUNTING HEAD
5 FAA066A O’ RING, DRAINING CHAMBER
6 FAK001A APERTURE 50 µ
7 GBG003A DRAINING, 1/4 TURN
8 GBG007A CHAMBER, DRAINING CHICANE
9 GBG157A CHAMBER, COUNTING HEAD
10 XBA398B COAXIAL RBC & WBC PENTRA 60 CE
11 FAK003A APERTURE 80 µ
12 + 12* XBA389B HGB PHOTOMETER (HGB PHOTOCELL ALONE: CAX005A)
13 XBA621A SENSOR, CHAMBERS DRAINING P80
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Thermostated room
17. Thermostated room
6 1 x2
4 x3
2
8

1 XCA167A CHAMBER, ISOLATOR
2 GBL0089 CUP, OVERFLOW T° ROOM P80
3 XDB035C CHAMBERS, 5 CHAMBERS BLOCK
4 GBC015A CLIP, MIX CH. HOLDER MIC/P120
5 XDB031CS HEATER, BLOCK COMPLETE P60/P80
6 XCA166A CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (LONG)
7 XDA813B KIT, T° ROOM FAN + HARNESS P80
8 EBB059AS FILTER, RUBBER CAP DEBRIS 25 MM
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Tube holder assy
18. Tube holder assy
1
1* B
A
C
A*
D x4
7 x4
4
6
5 x2
2

1 GBL0183S SAMPLING, STD TUBE HOLDER P80
1* GBL0372S SAMPLING, OPT TUBE HOLDER P80
2 XDA728A SAMPLING, PIERCING BLOCK P80
3 FCB001A SAMPLING, BRAKING GEAR MIC/SPS
4 DAM009A VALVE, SOLENOID PIERC. BLOCK
5 CAE006A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XC5-81-S2
6 GBL0122 SAMPLING, LOCK PLATE TUBE HOLDER
7 CAE019A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCC5-81-S4
A XDB064A SAMPLING, STD TUBE HOLDER P80 (RAN273A)
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Mixer assy

A* 1300015600 SAMPLING, OPT TUBE HOLDER P80 (RAN273)
B XDB063A SWITCH, EMERGENCY SWITCH ASSEMBLY
C GBL0324 SPRING BLADE
D CAE010A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCC5-81
19. Mixer assy
4 1 2
3
1 XDA972B MOTOR, MIXING COMPLETE P80
2 XDA973AS SAMPLING, GRABBER BLOC ASSY P80
3 DAM009A VALVE, SOLENOID PIERC. BLOCK
4 XBA432A SENSOR, HOME RACK TRF/MOVE GRAB
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Barcode readers
20. Barcode readers

1 CBC008A PCB, BARCODE INTERNAL P80
2 XBA725A PCB, EXT BARCODE USB PXLR
3 XBA453B PCB, BARCODE EXTERNAL P80/XL80
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Loader assy
21. Loader assy
8
9
2
1
10 3
11
7
6
5

1 XDA792AS SAMPLING, LEFT RACK LOADER P80
2 GBL0385 COVER, RACK LOADING TRAY P80
3 CAE019A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCC5-81-S4
4 XDA791AS SAMPLING, RIGHT RACK LOADER P80
5 XBA476A MOTOR, RACK LOADING AXIS P80
6 XBA475A MOTOR, RACK LOADING P80
7 XDA796AS SAMPLING, RACK LOADING LOCK P80
8 XDA964A KIT, LOADING FRONT PLATE EQUIPED
9 GBL0352 COVER, NEW FRONT PLATE LOADING
10 XDA974AS SWITCH, LEFT LOADING EQUIP P80 (Switch alone: CAE019A)
11 XDA793AS BELT, RACK LOADING
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Transfer assy
22. Transfer assy
2 4 x2
3
1
5
8

1 XDA794A SAMPLING, TUBE DETECTION P80
2 CAE011A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCH5-S2
4 XDA795A SAMPLING, RACK TRACER ASSY P80
5 XDA732A CARRIAGE, SAMPLING ASSY P80
6 XBA432A SENSOR, HOME RACK TRF/MOVE GRAB
7 XBA474A MOTOR, RACK TRF / NEEDLE P80
8 XAA478B PCB, SOLENOID RACK TRANSFER
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Ejection assy
23. Ejection assy

1 XDA971BS KIT, EJECTION PLATE EQUIPPED
2 CAE011A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XCH5-S2
3 GBL0062 CARRIAGE, RACK EJEC. PUSHROD P80
4 XDA975A SWITCH, RIGHT LOADING EQUIP P80 (Switch alone: CAE019A)
5 GBL0068 COVER, RACK EJECTION TRAY
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Front covers magnets & switches
24. Front covers magnets & switches
1 x4
2 x2

1 FAJ008A COVER, CLOSING MAGNET P80
2 CAE020A SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XGG2A
25. Main fan

1 XBA393A FAN, MAIN FAN 24 V P60/P80
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Electronic boards
26. Electronic boards

1
5 7

XAA544* PCB, MAIN PCB P80 + VERSION (*: index according to the version number)
1 XAA545* PCB, MAIN PCB PXL80 + VERSION (*: index according to the version number)
XAA719* PCB, MAIN PCB XLR + VERSION (*: index according to the version number)
2 XAA459BS PCB, MOTOR BOARD P80
3 XAA429AS PCB, LED BOARD FOR COVER P60/80
4 XAA458AS PCB, PREAMPLI BOARD for P80/PXL80
5 DZZ018 CABLE, FERRITE FOR COAXIALS
6 XAA695A PCB, CIS OD PREMPLI BOARD for XLR
7 CBR035A PCB, APD PREAMPLIFIER BOARD XLR
XAA514A PCB, USB BOARD (2 PORTS) PXL80
8
XAA705A PCB, HUB BOARD XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Cups
27. Cups
7
6
5
4
8 9

1 GBL0164 CUP, OVERFLOW REAG. BOTTLE P80
2 GBL0215 CUP, OVERFLOW TOP MOTOR PCB P80
3 GBL0332 CUP, OVERFLOW MOTOR BOARD P80
4 GBL0193 CUP, OVERFLOW LIQ. SYRINGES P80
5 GBL0194 DRAIN SYRINGE RECUP. TRAY
6 GBL0213 CUP, OVERFLOW MAIN BOARD
7 FBM003A COVER, REAGENT COVER HOLDER P80
8 GBL0149 CUP, FOR GRABBER
9 GBL0089 CUP, OVERFLOW T° ROOM P80
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Internal computer
28. Internal computer
5 1 7
3
4

1 XAA511BS PCB, TOUCH PANEL FUTJI P80/P400 (ABX Pentra 80)
2 HARD DRIVE: Refer to RAN326 Technical Note
3 XBA507AS FAN, FOR COMPUTER P80
4 CBR019A PCB, TACTILE BOARD FUTJI PC P80
5 ABC010A PCB, BACKLIGHT NEC COMPUTER P80
6 Refer to RAN326 Technical Note
7 DAK026A FAN, FAN FOR SOCKET 370 PC P80
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Reagent straws and tubings
29. Reagent straws and tubings
6 1
3
4

1 GBG145A REAGENT, STRAW D=20 P60/P80
2 GBG155A REAGENT, BOTTLE STOPPER D=25
3 GBG245A REAGENT, STRAW D=28 P60/P80/ACT
4 GAK302A REAGENT, BOTTLE STOPPER D=40
5 XEA018A REAGENT, STRAW DILUENT L=360
6 GBC284A REAGENT, STRAW D=28 XLR
EAE057AS
7 TUBING, PTFE 1,59X0,8 LG=3M
(1202249057)
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Stickers
30. Stickers
4
3
5
1 2
7
6

1 HAX0250 STICKER, RACK LABEL TYPE "A" 41-99
2
3 HAX034A STICKER, PC CONNECTIONS P80
4 HAU108A STICKER, LASER
HAX0356 STICKER, PC USB CONNECTION PXLR
5
HAX0102 STICKER, PC USB CONNECTION PXL
6 HAX0236 STICKER, P80/XL80 CHAMBER equipped with Takasago valves
HAX0357 STICKER, XLR CHAMBER
HAX0355 STICKER, OPTICAL BENCH BLOCKING PXLR
7
HAX0079 STICKER, OPTICAL BENCH BLOCKING PXL
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
Covers
31. Covers
8 11 12 4
9
13
10
or
7 3
2
5
1

XDA803AS COVER, FRONT LEFT COVER P80
1
XDA896AS COVER, FRONT LEFT COVER XL /XLR
XDA804AS COVER, FRONT RIGHT COVER P80
2
XDA897BS COVER, FRONT RIGHT COVER XL/XLR
3 XDA912BS COVER, COMPUTER COVER
4 XDA895AS COVER, RIGHT DOOR EQUIPED 80 / XL
GBL0227 DOOR, MANUAL SAMPLING P80
5
GBL0313 DOOR, MANUAL SAMPLING XL / XLR
HAX0309 STICKER, COVER LABEL "PENTRA XL80
6
HAX0348 STICKER, COVER LABEL "PENTRA XLR"
7 HAX0307 STICKER, COVER LABEL "HORIBA Medical"
8 GBL0316 COVER, REAGENT COVER P80 / XL
9 GBL0318 GLUEING BOARD + RIGHT SIDE P80XL
10 GBL0315 LEFT SIDE COVER P80 XL
11 GBL0320 COVER, LEFT DOOR XLR
12 GBL0317 COVER, UPPER COVER
13 GBL0659 (1209179289) COVER, 1L LYSE REAG TRAY KIT
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References
32. References
REFERENCE ERP_REFERENCE DESIGNATION INSTRUMENTS

PRINTER,EPSON WF5110 100 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
1300012172 1300012172
240V XL, Pentra XLR
CHAMBER,LMNE FLOWCELL ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
1300012654 1300012654
P60/80/XL XL
KIT,MASTER GHOST P80 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
1300013944 1300013944
RANGE XL, Pentra XLR
SAMPLING,OPT.TUBE HOLD ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
1300015600 1300015600
P80 NEW SWITCH XL, Pentra XLR
SAMPLING,OPT TUBE HOLD ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
1300015601 1300015601
P80 OLD SWITCHES XL
KIT,SARSTEDT 10 RACK P80/ ABX Pentra 80,A BX Pentra 80
1300015603 1300015603
ACT5D XL, Pentra XLR
ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
1300017778 1300017778 PCB,QWERTY KEYBOARD USB
XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL, LATEX RBC/PLT (2 X 2 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
1300019538 1300019538
ML) XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,GHOST WINDOW 7 P80 P/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
1300022568 1300022568
PC400 NEXUS XL, Pentra XLR
CARRIAGE, SAMPLING ASSY ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
1300028557 1300028557
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
PCB,BATT+RTC/SRAM P60/CP/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
AAH014A 1201161014
XL/80 XL, Pentra XLR
SWITCH,MICROSWITCH XC5- ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
CAE006A 1201531006
81-82 XL, Pentra XLR
SWITCH,MICROSWITCH XC5- ABX Pentra 80 ,ABX Pentra 80
CAE010A 1201531010
81 XL, Pentra XLR
SWITCH,MICROSWITCH XCH5- ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
CAE011A 1201531011
S2 XL, Pentra XLR
SWITCH,MICROSWITCH XCC5- ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
CAE019A 1201531019
81-S4 XL, Pentra XLR
SWITCH,MICROSWITCH ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
CAE020A 1201531020
XGG2A XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References
CONNECTOR,RS OUTPUT ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80

CAJ025A 1201561025
ADAPTOR XL ,Pentra XLR
PHOTOMETER,HGB ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
CAX005A 1201641005
PHOTOCELL XL, Pentra XLR
CBC008A 1201681008 PCB,BARCODE INTERNAL P80
XL, Pentra XLR
CBK043A 1201721043 PCB,QWERTY KEYBOARD PS2
XL, Pentra XLR
CBK045A 1201721045 PCB,AZERTY KEYBOARD PS2
XL, Pentra XLR
PCB, OPT. MOUSE 3 BUT. & ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
CBK048A 1201721048
WHEEL XL, Pentra XLR
CBK055A 1201721055 PCB, USB AZERTY KEYBOARD
XL, Pentra XLR
CCC039A 1201841039 PCB,PC ASSEMBLY
XL
DAC011A 1201891011 CABLE,POWER EUROPE
XL, Pentra XLR
DAC012A 1201891012 CABLE,POWER USA
XL, Pentra XLR
CABLE,PRINTER IEEE1284 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
DAC024A 1201891024
SHIELD XL, Pentra XLR
DAC028A 1201891028 CABLE,PC/MAIN BOARD P80
XL, Pentra XLR
ABX Pentra 80,ABX Pentra 80
CABLE,LIQUID VALVE L=350
DAD075A 1201921075 XL,Pentra XLR,Yumizen H500
10F14
OT,Yumizen H500 CT
CABLE,LIQUID VALVE L=480 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
DAD107A 1201921107
10F14 XL, Pentra XLR
DAD109A 1201921109
CABLE,CARRIAGE BOARD ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
DAD112A 1201921112
P60C+/P80 XL, Pentra XLR
CABLE,RACK TRANSF ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
DAD119A 1201921119
SOLENOID P80 XL, Pentra XLR
CABLE,CABLE PREAMP P80/XL/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
DAD120A 1201921120
XLR XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References
CABLE,MOTOR PCB/MAIN PCB ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80

DAD121A 1201921121
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
DAD122A 1201921122
CABLE,PC/PRINT L=1000 5-25 ABX Pentra 80,A BX Pentra 80
DAD123A 1201921123
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
DAD124A 1201921124 CABLE,PC/RS L=1000 5-09 P80
XL, Pentra XLR
DAJ007A 1201941007 OPTICAL,LAMP FOR BENCH
XL, Pentra XLR
MOTOR,REDUCTOR 24V ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
DAL016C 1201963016
RAP.40+GEAR XL, Pentra XLR
VALVE,SOLENOID RACK ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
DAM009A 1201971009
TRANSFERT XL, Pentra XLR
DBE019A 1202101019 CLIP,CABLE CLIP
XL, Pentra XLR
DBH001A 1202121001 COLLAR,TYRAP SMALL
XL, Pentra XLR
DBH002A 1202121002 COLLAR,TYRAP BIG
XL, Pentra XLR
DBK001A 1202141001 ADHESIVE,HOLDER D=3MM
XL, Pentra XLR
DBK002A 1202141002 ADHESIVE,HOLDER D=6MM
XL, Pentra XLR
ADHESIVE,HOLDER FOR FLAT ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
DBK003A 1202141003
CABLE XL, Pentra XLR
ADHESIVE,HOLDER TYRAP ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
DBK004A 1202141004
D=3MM XL, Pentra XLR
ADHESIVE,HOLDER TYRAP ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
DBK009A 1202141009
D=9MM XL, Pentra XLR
DBK025A 1202141025 ADHESIVE,HOLDER FOR CABLE
XL, Pentra XLR
PCB,PWR SUPPLY BLOCK,P80 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
DBN006C 1202163008
DZZ018A 1202191018 CABLE,FERRITE FOR COAXIALS ABX Pentra 80, Pentra XLR
DZZ052A 1202191052 TOOL,WIRE GRIP BLACK
XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References

DZZ053A 1202191053 TOOL,WIRE GRIP RED
XL, Pentra XLR
FITTING,STRAIGHT I=4X27 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
EAA002A 1202201002
M10 XL, Pentra XLR
EAB001A 1202211001 FITTING,Y 3 WHITE
XL, Pentra XLR
XL,Pentra XLR,ABX Pentra 120
(not CE),ABX Pentra 120
(CE),ABX Pentra 120 RETIC,ABX
EAB006B 1202212006 FITTING,T 2.3 CLEAR
Pentra DF,ABX Pentra
DX,Nexus DF,Nexus DX,ABX
SPS,ABX SPS 3,ABX SPS
W5,Yumizen H500 OT
FITTING,STRAIGHT 1.6/1.6 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
EAB009A 1202211009
CLEAR XL, Pentra XLR
FITTING,ANTI ROTATION ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
EAC008A 1202221008
WASHER XL, Pentra XLR
EAC010A 1202221010 FITTING,LUER FEMALE I=3MM
XL, Pentra XLR
EAC015A 1202221015 FITTING,LUER MALE FITTING
XL, Pentra XLR
EAC019A 1202221019 FITTING,LUER MALE I=3MM
XL, Pentra XLR
TUBING,TYGON 1,016(0,040) ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
EAE005AS 1202249005
L=2M XL, Pentra XLR
EAE006AS 1202249006
L=2M XL, Pentra XLR
EAE007AS 1202249007
L=2M XL, Pentra XLR
EAE008AS 1202249008
L=2M XL, Pentra XLR
EAE009AS 1202249009
L=2M XL, Pentra XLR
EAE011AS 1202249011 TUBING,CRYSTAL 3X6 L=10M
XL, Pentra XLR
TUBING,SILICON 1,5X3,5 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
EAE025AS 1202249025
L=10M XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References

EAE026AS 1202249026 TUBING,SILICON 2X4 L=10M
XL, Pentra XLR
EAE028AS 1202249028 TUBING,CRYSTAL 4X6 L=2M
XL, Pentra XLR
EAE033AS 1202249033
L=2M XL, Pentra XLR
TUBING,TYGON 2.54(0,100) ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
EAE034AS 1202249034
L=2M XL, Pentra XLR
TUBING,TYGON 3.2X6.4 TYPE ABX Pentra 60,ABX Pentra 60
EAE053A2S 1202248053
2375 C+,ABX Pentra 80
TUBING, TYGON 0,85X2,06 ABX Pentra 80,ABX Pentra 80
EAE059AS 1202249059
LG=2M XL,Pentra XLR
FILTER,RUBBER CAP DEBRIS ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
EBB059AS 1202369059
25MM XL, Pentra XLR
O RING,NEEDLE RINSE BLOC ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
FAA013A 1202401013
C+/80 XL, Pentra XLR
O RING,TANK WASTE MIC/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
FAA017A 1202401017
YUMI XL, Pentra XLR
O RING,FLOW CELL+LYSE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
FAA036A 1202401036
DISP.MIC XL, Pentra XLR
FAA040A 1202401040 O RING,5DIFF SYRINGE D=12,1
XL, Pentra XLR
FAA046A 1202401046 O RING,COAXIAL CABLE
XL, Pentra XLR
O RING,SAMPLE NEEDLE CT/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
FAA054A 1202401054
C+/P80 XL, Pentra XLR
O RING,MICROS SAMPLING ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
FAA055A 1202401055
SYRINGE XL, Pentra XLR,
O RING,PIERC NEEDLE P120/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
FAA057A 1202401057
C+/80 XL, Pentra XLR
O RING,SAMPL. SYRINGE P60/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
FAA064A 1202401064
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
O RING,DRAINING CHAMBER ABX Pentra 80,A BX Pentra 80
FAA066A 1202401066
P60/80 XL, Pentra XLR
FAA067A 1202401067 O RING,5DIFF SYRINGE D=2,4
XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References

FAA073A 1202401073 O RING,SYRINGE O RING
XL, Pentra XLR
FAJ008A 1202471008 COVER,CLOSING MAGNET P80
XL, Pentra XLR
FAK001A 1202481001 CHAMBER,APERTURE 50æ
XL, Pentra XLR
FAK003A 1202481003 CHAMBER,APERTURE 80µ
XL ,Pentra XLR
SILENT BLOCK,SHOCK
FAL006A 1202491006 ABX Pentra 80
ISOLATOR
SILENT BLOCK,FOR SUB ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
FAL009A 1202491009
ASSEMBL. XL, Pentra XLR
FAL010A 1202491010 SILENT BLOCK,OPT. BENCH
XL ,Pentra XLR
FBH018A 1202581018 COVER,DUST COVER P80
XL, Pentra XLR
REAGENT,REAGENT CAP 2 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
FBL001A 1202591001
HOLES XL, Pentra XLR
COVER,REAGENT COVER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
FBM003A 1202601003
HOLDER P80 XL, Pentra XLR
FBR011A 1202621011 BELT,NEEDLE L=364 P60/P80
XL ,Pentra XLR
FBR020A 1202621020 BELT,CARRIAGE L=660 P80
XL, Pentra XLR
REAGENT,STRAW DILUENT ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GAB067A 1202671067
L=360MM XL, Pentra XLR
GAB068A 1202671068 REAGENT,STRAW LYSE
XL, Pentra XLR
REAGENT,BOTTLE STOPPER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GAK302A 1202711302
D=40 XL
GAL087A 1202721087 CLIP,CHAMBER HOLDER
XL, Pentra XLR
CHAMBER,WASTE/DILUENT ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GAL094A 1202721094
TANK XL ,Pentra XLR
GBC015A 1202801015 CLIP,MIX CH. HOLDER
XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References

GBC030A 1202801030 SYRINGE,REAGENT PISTON
XL ,Pentra XLR
SYRINGE,LYSE PISTON MIC/ ABX Pentra 80,A BX Pentra 80
GBC031A 1202801031
GBC109A 1202801109 CHAMBER,COUNTING HEAD
XL, Pentra XLR
GBD880A 1202901880 CHAMBER,PEELABLE SPACER
XL, Pentra XLR
CHAMBER,DRAINING 1/4 ABX Pentra 80,A BX Pentra 80
GBG003A 1203201003
TURN P60 XL, Pentra XLR
CHAMBER,DRAINING CHICANE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG007A 1203201007
P60 XL, Pentra XLR
SYRINGE,REAG BLOC BODY ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG033A 1203201033
P60/P80 XL, Pentra XLR
SYRINGE,5DIFF BLOCK ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG034A 1203201034
BOTTOM P60 XL, Pentra XLR
SYRINGE,REAGENT HOLDER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG035B 1203202035
PLATE XL, Pentra XLR
GBG037A 1203201037 SYRINGE,5DIFF BLOCK BODY
XL, Pentra XLR
SYRINGE,5DIFF BOTTOM ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG038A 1203201038
GBG040A 1203201040 SYRINGE,5DIFF PISTON
XL, Pentra XLR
SYRINGE,CROSSPIECE P60/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG042A 1203201042
P80/YUM XL, Pentra XLR
SYRINGE,SAMPL.SYR. BODY ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG044A 1203201044
SYRINGE,SAMPLING BOTTOM ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG045A 1203201045
SYRINGE,SAMPLING ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG048A 1203201048
CROSSPIECE XL, Pentra XLR
GBG082A 1203201082 NEEDLE,BLOCK SHAFT
XL, Pentra XLR
GBG093A 1203201093 MOTOR,PULLEY P60
XL ,Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References

GBG138A 1203201138 DOOR,KEY FOR Tø ROOM P60
XL, Pentra XLR
REAGENT,STRAW D=20 P60/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG145A 1203201145
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
REAGENT,BOTTLE STOPPER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG155A 1203201155
D=25 XL, Pentra XLR
CHAMBER,COUNTING HEAD ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG157A 1203201157
GBG172A 1203201172 CARRIAGE,SLIDING PLATE
XL, Pentra XLR
CARRIAGE,NEEDLE STOP ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG176AS 1203209176
CARRIAGE,SAMPLING NEEDLE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG181A 1203201181
STOP XL, Pentra XLR
CARRIAGE,VERTICAL STOP BAR ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG218A 1203201218
C+ XL, Pentra XLR
GBG219A 1203201219 O RING,ANTI EXTRUSION RING
XL, Pentra XLR
REAGENT,STRAW D=28 P60/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG245A 1203201245
P80/ACT XL, Pentra XLR
SYRINGE,WASTE PUMP BODY ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG272A 1203201272
SYRINGE,VACCUM PUMP ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG273A 1203201273
BODY XL, Pentra XLR
GBG275A 1203201275 O RING,APERTURE D=0,5 XL,Pentra XLR,Yumizen H500
OT,Yumizen H500 CT
GBG282A 1203201282 TOOL, KEY FOR COVER C+,ABX Pentra 80,ABX Pentra
80 XL,Pentra XLR
CHAMBER,4 CHAMBERS ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG325A 1203201325
NAKED XL, Pentra XLR
CHAMBER,WBC/BASO NO ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBG326A 1203201326
EQUIPED XL, Pentra XLR
CARRIAGE,RACK ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0062 1203500062
EJEC.PUSHROD P80 XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References

GBL0089 1203500089 CUP,OVERFLOW Tø ROOM P80
XL, Pentra XLR
GBL0092 1203500092 COVER, FOR THERM ROM P80
XL, Pentra XLR
COVER,PROT.FOAM THERM ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0097 1203500097
ROOM P80 XL, Pentra XLR
CARRIAGE, HORIZONTAL ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0109 1203500109
SHAFT D=8 XL, Pentra XLR
CARRIAGE,HORIZONTAL SHAFT ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0110 1203500110
D7.9 XL, Pentra XLR
GBL0118 1203500118 SPRING, P80 ABX Pentra 80
SAMPLING,LOCKPLATE TUBE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0122 1203500122
HOLDER XL, Pentra XLR
GBL0149 1203500149 CUP,FOR GRABBER P80
XL, Pentra XLR
CUP,OVERFLOW REAG. ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0164 1203500164
BOTTLE P80 XL, Pentra XLR
SAMPLING,OLD TUBE HOLDER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0183S 1203509183
P80 XL
CUP,OVERFLOW LIQ. ABX Pentra 80,ABX Pentra 80
GBL0193 1203500193
SYRINGES P80 XL,Pentra XLR
CUP,OVERFLOW MAIN BOARD ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0213 1203500213
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
CUP,OVERFLOW TOP MOTOR ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0215 1203500215
PCB P80 XL, Pentra XLR
GBL0250 1203500250 KEYBOARD,PLASTIC TRAY P80
XL, Pentra XLR
GBL0280 1203500280 RACK,10 TUBES 13X82 P80
XL ,Pentra XLR
GBL0301 1203500301 CARRIAGE,PERCUSSION PLATE
XL, Pentra XLR
GBL0315 1203500315 COVER, LEFT SIDE P80/XL
XL
COVER, REAGENT COVER P80 / ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0316 1203500316
XL XL, Pentra XLR
GBL0317 1203500317 COVER, TOP COVER P80 / PXL
XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References
COVER,RIGHT SIDE COVER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80

GBL0318 1203500318
P80/XL XL, Pentra XLR
SWITCH, HOLDER SPRING ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0324 1203500324
BLADE XL, Pentra XLR
COVER, MOTORS BOARD ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0332 1203500332
PROTECTION XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,RACK FOR SWITCH ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0339 1203500339
ADJUST XL, Pentra XLR
GBL0342 1203500342 SPRING, FOR NEW MIXER
XL, Pentra XLR
COVER,NEW FRONT PLATE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0352 1203500352
LOADING XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,GAUGE FOR NEEDLE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0355 1203500355
TOOL,SPRING FOR BELT ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0359 1203500359
TIGH.ADJ. XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,PIERCING SWITCH ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0368 1203500368
COVER,EJECTION TRAY P80/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0384 1203500384
ACT AL XL, Pentra XLR
COVER,LOADING TRAY P80/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0385 1203500385
ACT5DAL XL, Pentra XLR
CARRIAGE,FRONT RAIL FOR
GBL0526 1203500526
RACKS
CARRIAGE,REAR RAIL FOR
GBL0527 1203500527 ABX Pentra 80, Pentra XLR
RACKS
NEEDLE, PIERCING P60C+/P80/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0651 1203500651
XL/XLR XL, Pentra XLR
COVER, 1L LYSE REAGENTS ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
GBL0659 1203500659
TRAY XL
ABX Pentra 80,A BX Pentra 80
HAE026B 1207022026 STICKER,VALVES JOUCO (1-10)
XL, Pentra XLR
STICKER,VALVES JOUCO (11- ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
HAE027B 1207022027
20) XL, Pentra XLR
HAE028B 1207022028
30) XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References

HAE029B 1207022029
40) XL
HAX0034 1207230034 STICKER,PC CONNECTIONS P80
XL, Pentra XLR
HAX0246 1207230246 STICKER,RACK LABEL A 01-20
XL, Pentra XLR
HAX0247 1207230247 STICKER,RACK LABEL B 01-20
XL, Pentra XLR
XL, Pentra XLR
XL, Pentra XLR
XL, Pentra XLR
XL, Pentra XLR
HAX0252 1207230252 STICKER,RACK LABEL C 01-20
XL, Pentra XLR
XL, Pentra XLR
XL, Pentra XLR
HAX0308 1207230308 STICKER, COVER PENTRA80 ABX Pentra 80
ADHESIVE,TAPE FOR RACK ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
JAJ007AS 1207309007
L=1M XL, Pentra XLR
SAMPLING,PIERCING SCREW ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
KAC025A 1207421025
M2X12 XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,HEXA SPACER F/F L=10 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
KAN017A 1207541017
M4 XL, Pentra XLR
KZZ005A 1207591005 SCREW,BALL SCREW M5X12
XL ,Pentra XLR
LAJ001A 1207661001 TOOL,GLUE SILICOMET
XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,GREASE THERMAL ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
LAM001A 1207681001
CONTACT XL ,Pentra XLR
LAM003A 1207681003 TOOL,GREASE SILICON L250L
XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References

LAM004A 1207681004 TOOL,GREASE SILICON TUBE
XL, Pentra XLR
LAM005A 1207681005 TOOL,GREASE SILICON GR220
XL,Pentra XLR
TOOL,GREASE VERSILUBE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
LAM006A 1207681006
TUBE XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,WSA ORAPI GREASE 200 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
LAM009A 1207681009
ML XL, Pentra XLR
LAX003A 1207721003 TOOL, THREADLOCKING
XL, Pentra XLR
MAA003A 1207811003 TOOL,FLAT LONG PLIERS
XL, Pentra XLR
MAA006A 1207811006 TOOL,CLAMP PLIER
XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,ALEN SCREWDRIVER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
MAB002A 1207821002
2,5MM XL, Pentra XLR
MAB056AS 1207829056 TOOL,6 ALEN KEYS 2 TO 6
XL, Pentra XLR
MAB069A 1207821069 TOOL,ALEN SCREWDRIVER 2,5
XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL, SCREWDRIVER MULTI ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
MAB089A 1207821089
FONC XL ,Pentra XLR
MAB090A 1207821090 TOOL,TORX KEY T10
XL, Pentra XLR
MAB092A 1207821092 TOOL,TORX KEY T20
XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,ALLEN KEY SET 2 TO 6 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
MAB096AS 1207829096
MM XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,ADJUSMENT ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
MAG014A 1207851014
POT.SCREWDRIVER XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,TORX SCREWDRIVER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
MAG024A 1207851024
6X50 XL ,Pentra XLR
TOOL,20 WEDGES KIT 0.04 TO ABX Pentra 80 ,ABX Pentra 80
MAJ004A 1207881004
1MM XL, Pentra XLR
MAJ008A 1207881008 TOOL,RULER 30CM
XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References

MAM001AS 1207899001 TOOL,MULTIMETER
XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,PROBE FOR ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
MAM004A 1207891004
THERMOMETER XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,THERMOMETER FLUKE + ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
MAM009AS 1207899009
PROBE XL, Pentra XLR,
TOOL,BARFLEX (PRESS. 0- ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
MAM013AS 1207899013
10BARS) XL, Pentra XLR
MZZ010BS 1207929010 TOOL,TECHNICAL CASE EMPTY
XL, Pentra XLR
MZZ015A 1207921015 KIT, ANTISTATIC KIT
XL ,Pentra XLR
STICKER,FOR TUBING (169 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
NAA068A 1207931068
ITEMS) XL, Pentra XLR
NAA082C 1207933082 LABEL, RETURN LABEL STI
XL, Pentra XLR
MANUAL,TECHNICAL P80 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
RAA022EEN 1208015022
RANGE XL ,Pentra XLR
MANUAL,TECHNICAL P80 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
RAA022FEN 1300012448
RAB108KEL 1208059108 MANUAL,USER S P80 GREEK ABX Pentra 80
CDROM,TECH. MANUAL P80 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
RAX034D 1208414034
CDROM,TECH. MANUAL P80 ABX Pentra 80 ,ABX Pentra 80
RAX034E 1300012450
PCB,LED BOARD FOR COVER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XAA429AS 1209109429
XAA458AS 1209109458 PCB,PREAMP. LMNE P80 ABX Pentra 80
XAA459BS 1209109459 PCB,MOTOR BOARD P80
XL, Pentra XLR
PCB,SOLENOID RACK ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XAA478AS 1209109478
TRANSFER P80 XL, Pentra XLR
PCB,TOUCH SCREEN PANEL ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XAA511BS 1209109511
FUTJI P80 XL, Pentra XLR
XAA544HS 1209109544 PCB,MOTHERB.P80 V1.12KIT ABX Pentra 80
CABLE,REAGENT GROUND ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA144A 1209111144
FITTING XL
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References
CABLE,COAX BASO-O.D LMNE- ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80

XBA193A 1209111193
LMNE XL,
SENSOR,WASTE DETECTION ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA322D 1209114322
SENSOR,CARRIAGE MOVE P80/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA342A 1209111342
P120 XL, Pentra XLR
XBA343CS 1209119343 CABLE,RS232/PC TEST CABLE
XL, Pentra XLR
PHOTOMETER,HB CPTE P60/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA389B 1209112389
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
XBA393A 1209111393 FAN,MAIN FAN 24V P60/P80
XL
SENSOR, L=260 MOTOR HOME ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA396A 1209111396
P60/P80/YUMI XL, Pentra XLR
CABLE,COAX RBC/WBC P60/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA398B 1209112398
C+/P80 XL, Pentra XLR
CABLE,COAX CIS FLOWC.P60/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA399C 1209113399
80/XL XL
TUBING,SHIELD REPARTITOR ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA403A 1209111403
P60 XL, Pentra XLR
CABLE,CARRIAGE CABLE
XBA428A 1209111428 ABX Pentra 80
SWITCHES
SENSOR,HOME RACK TRF/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA432A 1209111432
MOVE GRAB XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,INST.BARCODE PS2 TOUCH ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA453D 1209114453
65 XL, Pentra XLR
CABLE,SYR.SWITCH L=300 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA458A 1209111458
CABLE,SYR.SWITCH L=500
P60/P80
CABLE, THERSMOSTATIC ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA461A 1209111461
DOOR SWICHT HARNESS XL
XBA462A 1209111462 CABLE,MOTORS L=300 ABX Pentra 80, Pentra XLR
XBA463A 1209111463 CABLE,MOTORS L=400
XL, Pentra XLR
CABLE,REAGENT SYRINGE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA465A 1209111465
MOTOR XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References
MOTOR,RACK TRF / NEEDLE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80

XBA474A 1209111474
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
XBA475A 1209111475 MOTOR,RACK LOADING P80
XL, Pentra XLR
MOTOR,RACK LOADING AXIS ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA476A 1209111476
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
XBA478B 1209112478 MOTOR,CARRIAGE P80
XL, Pentra XLR
MOTOR,SYRINGE EQUIPPED ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA485A 1209111485
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
CONNECTOR,WASTE P80 & ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA488A 1209111488
ACT5D AL XL, Pentra XLR
CABLE,LMNE FLOWCEL
CATHOD WIRE
FITTING,GROUND FOR ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA492A 1209111492
REAGENT P80 XL, Pentra XLR
XBA507AS 1209119507 FAN,FOR COMPUTER P80
XL, Pentra XLR,
MOTOR,FOR SAMPLING ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA547AS 1209119547
SYRINGES XL, Pentra XLR
XBA548AS 1209119548 MOTOR,FOR DIFF SYRINGE
XL, Pentra XLR
SENSOR,CHAMBERS DRAIN ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA621A 1209111621
P80/YUMI XL, Pentra XLR
VALVE,TAKASAGO + ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XBA685A 1209111685
MANIFOLD ASSY XL,P entra XLR
XCA167A 1209121167 CHAMBER,ISOLATOR (SMALL)
XL
CHAMBER,ISOLATOR VENT. ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XCA191A 1209121191
P80/C+ XL, Pentra XLR
XDA555AS 1209139555 TOOL,FLOWCELL ADJ. KNOB
XL, Pentra XLR
SYRINGE,5DIFF ASSY YUM/ ABX Pentra 80 ,ABX Pentra 80
XDA591AS 1209139591
SYRINGE,SAMPLING ASSY P60/ ABX Pentra 80,A BX Pentra 80
XDA593AS 1209139593
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References
CHAMBER,LMNE FLOWCELL ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80

XDA601DS 1209139601
P60/80/XL XL
CHAMBER,DIL. TANK ASSY ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA605A 1209131605
NEEDLE,190µL SYR. YUM/P60/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA616AS 1209139616
P80 XL,Pentra XLR
NEEDLE,100µL SAMPL SYR. ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA617AS 1209139617
P60/80 XL ,Pentra XLR
O RING,VAC/WASTE PUMP + ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA621A 1209131621
O RING,REAGENT SYR. + ABX Pentra 80 ,ABX Pentra 80
XDA622A 1209131622
REAGENT,BLOCK EQUIPED ABX Pentra 80,A BX Pentra 80
XDA623AS 1209139623
P60/P80 XL,P entra XLR
CHAMBER,DIL.TANK COVER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA626AS 1209139626
P60/P80 XL,P entra XLR
NEEDLE,SAMPL. NEEDLE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA655ES 1209139655
SAMPLING,PIERCING BLOCK ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA728A 1209131728
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
OPTICAL,BENCH COMPLETE
XDA729BS 1209139729 ABX Pentra 80
P80/XL
SAMPLING,RIGHT RACK ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA791AS 1209139791
LOADER P80 XL, Pentra XLR
SAMPLING,LEFT RACK LOADER ABX Pentra 80 ,ABX Pentra 80
XDA792AS 1209139792
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
XDA793AS 1209139793 BELT,RACK LOADING P80
XL, Pentra XLR
SAMPLING,TUBE DETECTION ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA794A 1209131794
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
SAMPLING,RACK TRACER ASSY ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA795A 1209131795
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
SAMPLING,RACK LOADING ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA796AS 1209139796
LOCK P80 XL, Pentra XLR
COVER,FRONT LEFT COVER
XDA803AS 1209139803 ABX Pentra 80
P80
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References
COVER,FRONT RIGHT COVER

XDA804AS 1209139804 ABX Pentra 80
P80
KIT,Tø ROOM FAN + HARNESS ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA813B 1209132813
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
MOTOR,BLOCK SAMPL. ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA824AS 1209139824
SYR.P60/P80 XL, Pentra XLR
MOTOR,BLOCK 5DIFF SYR. ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA826AS 1209139826
SYRINGE,WASTE CPTE P60/C+/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA827BS 1209139827
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
SYRINGE,VACUUM/PRESSURE/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA828BS 1209139828
COUNTING SYRINGE XL, Pentra XLR
SYRINGE,SAMPL ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA834AS 1209139834
BLOCK+MOTOR ASSY XL, Pentra XLR
COVER,RIGHT DOOR EQUIPED ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA895AS 1209139895
80/XL XL, Pentra XLR
XDA911AS 1209139911 COVER,TRAP DOOR PENTRA 80
XL, Pentra XLR
COVER,COMPUTER COVER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA912CS 1209139912
FOR P80 XL, Pentra XLR
XDA930A 1209131930 CARRIAGE,PIERCING ASSY
XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,LOADING FRONT PLATE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA964A 1209131964
EQUIP XL, Pentra XLR
XDA971BS 1209139971 KIT,EJECTION PLATE EQUIPPED
XL, Pentra XLR
MOTOR,MIXING COMPLETE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA972B 1209132972
P80/ACT XL, Pentra XLR
SAMPLING,GRABBER BLOC ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA973AS 1209139973
ASSY P80 XL, Pentra XLR
SWITCH,LEFT LOADING EQUIP ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA974AS 1209139974
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
SWITCH,RIGHT LOADING P80/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDA975A 1209131975
ACTAL XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,EJECT&LOADING ASSY ABX Pentra 80,ABX Pentra 80
XDA999BS 1209139999
P80/XL XL,Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References
SYRINGE,REAG.ASSY P60/P80/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80

XDB001BS 1209149001
PXL XL, Pentra XLR
MOTOR,BLOCK FOR REAG. ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB002BS 1209149002
SYR. P80 XL, Pentra XLR
SYRINGE,REAGENT+MOT ASS ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB003D 1209144003
P80/XL XL, Pentra XLR
SAMPLING,NEW ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB006AS 1209149006
PIERCING+CAM XL ,Pentra XLR
XDB008AS 1209149008 SAMPLING,PIERCING OLD CAM
XL, Pentra XLR
CHAMBER,4 CHAMBER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB017ES 1209149017
TAKASAGO XL, Pentra XLR
CHAMBER,WBC/BASO CPTE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB019BS 1209149019
CHAMBER,5 CHAMBER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB021E 1209145021
TAKASAGO XL, Pentra XLR
HEATER,BLOCK COMPLETE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB031CS 1209149031
PXL/P80 XL, Pentra XLR
SYRINGE,5DIFF WITH MOTOR ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB033AS 1209149033
80/AL XL, Pentra XLR
CHAMBER,5 CHAMBERS ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB035C 1209143035
BLOCK XL
CHAMBER,4 CHAMBERS BLOC ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB036BS 1209149036
P80 XL
VALVE,LIQ 12 VALVE ASSY (1- ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB045A 1209141045
12) XL, Pentra XLR
XDB046A 1209141046
19) XL, Pentra XLR
XDB047A 1209141047 VALVE,LIQ 4 VALVE ASSY
XL, Pentra XLR
XDB048A 1209141048
30) XL, Pentra XLR
XDB049A 1209141049
35) XL Pentra XLR
SWITCH, TUBE HOLDER DET. ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB063A 1209141063
ASSY XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References
SAMPLING,STD TUBE HOLDER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80

XDB064A 1209141064
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
SAMPLING,OPT.TUBE HOLD
XDB065BS 1209149065 ABX Pentra 80
P80 NEW SWITCH
XDB092BS 1209149092 KIT,RACK TRANSF LOW. RAILS
XL, Pentra XLR
VALVE,LIQ. 2WAYS/NC W/O ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB135A 1209141135
COIL XL, Pentra XLR
XDB136A 1209141136 VALVE,LIQ. 3WAYS W/O COIL
XL, Pentra XLR
TUBING,DILUANT TUBE P80/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB199A 1209141199
P60 XL, Pentra XLR
CHAMBER,4 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB250AS 1209149250
CHAMBERS+PHOTO HB XL, Pentra XLR
SAMPLING,OPT TUBE HOLD ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB293AS 1209149293
P80 OLD SWITCHES XL
XDB302AS 1209149302 TOOL,LAMP ADJUST TOOL
XL, Pentra XLR
KIT, CARRIAGE ASSY P80/XL/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XDB305AS 1209149305
XLR XL,P entra XLR
REAGENT,STRAW DILUENT ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA018A 1209151018
L=360 XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,GREASE SILICON ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA019A 1209151019
CONTAINER XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,GREASE CONTAIN. ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA218A 1209151218
VERSILUBE XL ,Pentra XLR
ABX Pentra 80 ,ABX Pentra 80
XEA286AS 1209159286 KIT,O RING + WASHER
XL, Pentra XLR
XEA293AS 1209159293 KIT,SCREWS
XL, Pentra XLR
XEA311AS 1209159311 KIT,FITTINGS
XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,GREASE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA381A 1209151381
AIR+LIQ.SYR.MICROS XL,P entra XLR
XEA410BS 1209159410 KIT,TYGON TUBINGS
XL, Pentra XL
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References
KIT,MAINT.1 YEAR P60/80 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80

XEA486FS 1209159486
RANGES XL, Pentra XLR
XEA616BS 1209159616 KIT,FLOWCELL INJECTOR TUBE
XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,GREASE MOLYKOTE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA641A 1209151641
CONTAINER XL, Pentra XLR
XEA658AS 1209159658 TUBING,SLEEVER (100 ITEMS)
XL, Pentra XLR
CABLE,COAX LMNE FLOWCEL ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA663A 1209151663
P60/80 XL
XEA720AS 1209159720 KIT,SPRINGS P80
XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,GROUND FITTINGS P80/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA722AS 1209159722
YUMI XL, Pentra XLR
XEA723AS 1209159723 KIT,EXTENSION CABLE PC P80
XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,SILENTBLOC OPTIC BENCH
XEA740AS 1209159740 ABX Pentra 80
P80
XEA747AS 1209159747 KIT,PISTON + CROSS PIECE
XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,MASTER GHOST P80 ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA749KS 1209159749
XEA750QS 1209159750 KIT,INSTAL KIT V1.12.0 P80 ABX Pentra 80
KIT,10 RACKS + STICKERS P80/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA760BS 1209159760
AL XL, Pentra XLR
XEA785F 1209156785 KIT,INSTAL. PENTRA XL/XLR
XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL,FOR KIT XEA801BS 60C+/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA800AS 1209159800
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,PIERC. RETROFIT P60C+/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA801BS 1209159801
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,NEEDLE RINSE BLOCK PC+/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA810AS 1209159810
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
TOOL, GREASE OIL VACTRA ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA821A 1209151821
100ML XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,CARRIAGE CHANGING ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA858BS 1209159858
TOOL KIT XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References
KIT,SWITCH ADJUST FOR P80/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80

XEA862AS 1209159862
PXL XL,P entra XLR
XEA874DS 1209159874 KIT,BASOLYSE TUBING 2075
XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,INSULATING PADS P80/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA905AS 1209159905
ACT5AL XL,P entra XLR
KIT,PIERCING SWITCH ADJUST ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA908AS 1209159908
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
XEA909AS 1209159909 KIT,SCREWS FOR AIR SYRINGE
XL, Pentra XLR
XEA930AS 1209159930 KIT,EJECTION STOP P80/ACTAL
XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,1/4 ROUND SCREW RIGHT ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA942AS 1209159942
DOOR XL
CABLE,TAKASAGO VALVE ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA959AS 1209159959
WIRING XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,TAKASA VALVES INST.P80/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA962LS 1209155962
XL XL
KIT,SW SIMULATOR P60C+ P80
XEA986AS 1209159986 ABX Pentra 80
PXL
KIT, TUBE HOLDER DET. ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEA991AS 1209159991
SWITCH XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,PARTS FOR TUBE HOLDER ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEC020AS 1209179020
P80 XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,HARD DISK SATA P80 XL ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEC188BS 1209179188
XLR UNDER XP XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,MAINT,6 M P60/P80/PXL/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEC236AS 1219179236
PXR XL, Pentra XLR
KIT,MAINT 2YEARS P80/PXL/ ABX Pentra 80, ABX Pentra 80
XEC282AS 1209179282
ACTAL XL
XEC289AS 1209179289 COVER, 1L LYSE REAG TRAY KIT
XL, Pentra XLR
Technical Manual
Exploded Views
References
Technical Manual

Pentra XL 80

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pentra XL 80

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical manual

2. Legal Information ..................................................................................................4

3. Operational Conditions .........................................................................................6

4. Labels and connections .....................................................................................10

5. Instrument general cleaning ..............................................................................18

6. Warning and precautions ...................................................................................20

8. Instrument description & technology ................................................................27

9. Reagent specifications .......................................................................................29

10. Printer .................................................................................................................29

2 - Hydraulic & Pneumatic Principles

1. Hydropneumatic connections ............................................................................. 2

2. Valves functions .................................................................................................. 13

3. Hydraulic circuit .................................................................................................. 15

4. Pneumatic diagrams .......................................................................................... 26

3 - Electric & Electronic Principles

2. Flat cables ..............................................................................................................9

4 - Analysis Cycle Technology

1. Analysis cycle description (principles) ............................................................... 2

2. Measuring principles .......................................................................................... 12

3. Raw counts ......................................................................................................... 24

1. Service software overview ...................................................................................2

2. Windows Explorer Access ....................................................................................3

3. Software releases .................................................................................................3

6 - Alarms & Errors

1. Analyzer error messages ..................................................................................... 2

2. Transfer error messages ..................................................................................... 3

3. STAT mode error messages ................................................................................ 4

4. Environment error messages .............................................................................. 4

5. User error messages ............................................................................................ 5

6. Expiration date error messages .......................................................................... 5

7. Analyzer internal error types messages ............................................................. 6

2. Prevention against the electrostatic discharges ...............................................3

3. Maintenance tables and kits ................................................................................6

4. Maintenance kits ...................................................................................................7

5. Maintenance procedures .....................................................................................9

3. Carriage assy ...................................................................................................... 10

4. Rinse block & needles ........................................................................................ 11

5. Reagent syringe .................................................................................................. 12

6. DIFF syringe ........................................................................................................ 13

7. Sampling syringe ................................................................................................ 14

8. Waste syringe (1 & 2) .......................................................................................... 15

9. Counting syringe assy ........................................................................................ 16

10. 2.5 mL dispenser assy (PXLR) ......................................................................... 17

11. Diluent tank assy .............................................................................................. 17

12. Optical bench for P80 / PXL80 ........................................................................ 18

13. Optical bench for Pentra XLR .......................................................................... 19

14. Sampling percutor ............................................................................................ 20

15. Chambers .......................................................................................................... 21

16. Chamber parts .................................................................................................. 22

17. Thermostated room .......................................................................................... 23

18. Tube holder assy .............................................................................................. 24

19. Mixer assy ......................................................................................................... 25

20. Barcode readers ............................................................................................... 26

21. Loader assy ....................................................................................................... 27

22. Transfer assy ..................................................................................................... 28

23. Ejection assy ..................................................................................................... 29

24. Front covers magnets & switches ...................................................................30

25. Main fan .............................................................................................................30

26. Electronic boards ..............................................................................................31

27. Cups ...................................................................................................................32

28. Internal computer ..............................................................................................33

29. Reagent straws and tubings ............................................................................34

30. Stickers ..............................................................................................................35